diff options
Diffstat (limited to '38447.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 38447.txt | 11014 |
1 files changed, 11014 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/38447.txt b/38447.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a441017 --- /dev/null +++ b/38447.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11014 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Adventures in Swaziland, by Owen Rowe O'Neil + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Adventures in Swaziland + The Story of a South African Boer + +Author: Owen Rowe O'Neil + +Release Date: December 30, 2011 [EBook #38447] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ADVENTURES IN SWAZILAND *** + + + + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Richard Prairie and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +[Illustration: HAND WRITTEN DEDICATION] + +[Illustration: SWAZI MOTHER CARRYING HER BABE + +Like most of the South African natives, the Swazis carry all burdens +on their heads, the women invariably being the beasts of burden. +Babies are the only things the women ever carry on their backs, this +being because they keep their children with them while doing the +housework. The splendid stature and erect carriage of Swazi women is +directly due to carrying all weights on their heads] + + + + + ADVENTURES + IN SWAZILAND + + THE STORY OF A SOUTH AFRICAN BOER + + BY + + OWEN ROWE O'NEIL + + WITH MANY ILLUSTRATIONS + FROM PHOTOGRAPHS + +[Illustration: Publisher's Mark] + + NEW YORK + THE CENTURY CO. + 1921 + + Copyright, 1921, by + + THE CENTURY CO. + + Printed in U. S. A. + + + TO MY FATHER + COUNSELOR, FARMER, AND WARRIOR + THIS HUMBLE RECORD IS DEDICATED + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER I PAGE + + HOW THE O'NEILS CAME TO THE TRANSVAAL--BOERS WITH IRISH NAMES--OOM + PAUL'S REFUSAL TO BUY DELAGOA BAY--THE BOERS BREAK FOR FREEDOM--THEIR + BLOODY BATTLES WITH THE SAVAGE TRIBES--THE GREAT TREK--DINGAANZULU'S + TREACHERY--THE DINGAAN DAY CELEBRATION 3 + + + CHAPTER II + + RIETVLEI, THE "VALLEY OF REEDS"--THE O'NEIL HOMESTEAD--PIONEER + HARDSHIPS--THE WAR AGAINST MALEUW, "THE LION"--"SLIM GERT" O'NEIL + BREAKS THE POWER OF THE MAKATEESE KING--JAFTA, KING OF THE MAPORS--MY + TROUSERS NEARLY COST ME AN EYE--OUR TOY FACTORY AND MIMIC BATTLES--OOM + TUYS GROBLER TELLS OF SWAZILAND AND KING BUNO, "THE TERRIBLE" 12 + + + CHAPTER III + + MY DESIRE TO VISIT KING BUNO--HOW I WON THE TRIP ON A BET--A BOER RACE + MEET--"BLACK HAND TOM," THE HOPE OF RIETVLEI--KLAAS'S RIDE TO SAVE HIS + SKIN--FATHER GIVES PERMISSION FOR MY VISIT--BELFAST CELEBRATES THE + BOER VICTORY 31 + + + CHAPTER IV + + I LEAVE FOR MY FIRST VISIT TO SWAZILAND--MOTHER WARNS ME ABOUT OOM + TUYS--WHY THE BOERS PAID TRIBUTE TO KING BUNO--QUEEN LABOTSIBENI, THE + BRAINS OF SWAZILAND--BUNO'S VISIT TO OOM PAUL KRUGER--OUR RECEPTION IN + SWAZILAND--EZULWENI, THE "VALLEY OF HEAVEN"--BUNO'S RIFLE--SIBIJAAN + AND I EXPLORE BY NIGHT 44 + + + CHAPTER V + + SHEBA'S BREASTS AND THE PLACE OF EXECUTION--ZOMBODE AND THE ROYAL + KRAAL OF QUEEN LABOTSIBENI--COMMON AND ROYAL GROUND--WE REACH KING + BUNO'S KRAAL AT LEBOMBO--GIN FOR THE KING--BUNO, THE REGAL SAVAGE--I + PRESENT A RIFLE TO THE KING--LOMWAZI TAKES ME TO LABOTSIBENI--THE OLD + QUEEN IS WORRIED OVER TUYS' ACTIVITIES--THE SHOOTING-MATCH WITH THE + KING--TUYS AND I MANAGE TO MISS A FEW HUMAN TARGETS 57 + + + CHAPTER VI + + TUYS ORDERS ME TO REMAIN IN CAMP DURING THE CELEBRATION--I VISIT THE + ROYAL KRAAL--FEASTING, DANCING, AND COMBATS TO THE DEATH--BUTCHERY OF + YOUNG WOMEN--BUNO AND TUYS WRESTLE FOR GOLD--HOW TUYS BECAME RICH--A + "LEGAL EXECUTION" IN SWAZILAND--THE UNFAITHFUL WIFE EXPIATES HER + SIN--HOW TUYS SHOOTS--FATHER GATHERS INFORMATION BY MENTAL SUGGESTION + 73 + + + CHAPTER VII + + I VISIT SWAZILAND AGAIN--BUNO'S ILLNESS--AN APPEAL FROM THE KING--THE + RACE AGAINST DEATH--UMZULEK MEETS US--THE DYING KING--BUNO MAKES TUYS + GUARDIAN OF HIS PEOPLE--THE LAST ROYAL SALUTE OF THE IMPIS--THE + DEATH-DEALING PUFF-ADDER--BUNO DIES LIKE A TRUE SAVAGE KING--TZANEEN, + THE ROYAL WIDOW, SUSPECTS MURDER--THE QUEENS MEET--TUYS ESCAPES THE + FUNERAL SACRIFICE 92 + + + CHAPTER VIII + + THE ROYAL FUNERAL--THE "THUNDER OF THE SHIELDS"--NOT AFRAID TO + DIE--THE WITCH-DOCTOR'S BLOODY WORK--WHAT LABOTSIBENI WANTED--THE + BURIAL OF THE INDUNAS--RAIN-MAKING AND THE "RAIN STONE"--BUNO'S BURIAL + IN THE CAVES--WITCH-DOCTORS PREVENT OUR ENTERING THE CAVES--LABOTSIBENI + SENDS FOR GIN 110 + + + CHAPTER IX + + SIBIJAAN'S SPORTIVENESS ALMOST COSTS HIS LIFE--HOW TUYS BECAME THE + FRIEND OF BUNO--LABOTSIBENI ENDORSED AS REGENT OF SWAZILAND--UMZULEK + PLOTS TO SEIZE THE THRONE--THE BOERS INVADE SWAZILAND--TUYS DICTATES + PEACE BETWEEN THE QUEENS--UMZULEK GETS HIS LESSON 129 + + + CHAPTER X + + WAR WITH ENGLAND--SIEGE OF BELFAST--OUR BOYISH IMPI ATTACKS THE + BRITISH--GHOSTS DEFEAT US--JAFTA'S FRIENDSHIP--ENGLISH TROOPERS DO THE + "SPORTING THING"--UMZULEK STILL PLANNING DEVILTRY--DEATH OF KLAAS, OUR + JOCKEY--FATHER SENDS ME AWAY TO GET AN EDUCATION 150 + + + CHAPTER XI + + BACK TO RIETVLEI FROM HARVARD--I LOCATE IN ERMELO--TUYS BRINGS NEWS + THAT SEBUZA IS TO BE CROWNED KING OF SWAZILAND--I DECIDE TO MAKE A + PICTURE RECORD OF THE CORONATION--THE TREK TO ZOMBODE TO GET THE ROYAL + PERMISSION--SNYMAN PLAYS GHOST AND ALMOST GETS KILLED--VISIT TO + MBABANE, CAPITAL OF SWAZILAND 163 + + + CHAPTER XII + + I MEET LABOTSIBENI AGAIN--FLATTERING A SAVAGE QUEEN--EXPLAINING THE + "LITTLE BLACK MAGIC BOX"--CURING RHEUMATISM WITH TOOTH-PASTE, + VASELINE, AND HAIR OIL--WOMEN AS CURRENCY--GIN, GOLD, AND COWS PAY FOR + THE PICTURE RIGHTS--THE "FLU" STRIKES--JENNIE, THE "BLAAU APP," AND + THE PEACOCKS' TAILS 188 + + + CHAPTER XIII + + I START FOR NEW YORK--THE RELIGIOUS ATMOSPHERE ON SHIPBOARD--"FLU" + ATTACKS THE JAVANESE--THE MISSIONARIES REFUSE TO HELP--SHARKS AS + SCAVENGERS--THE LITTLE MOTHER'S END--EVILS OF LIQUOR--ASSEMBLING OUR + PARTY IN NEW YORK--PASSAGE AS FREIGHT--ST. LUCIA AND A LITTLE + EXCITEMENT--THE THIN MAGISTRATE--RELEASED ON BAIL 206 + + + CHAPTER XIV + + OBSTINATE STOWAWAYS--FREE TOWN AND A FIGHT--BAY RUM AS A + BEVERAGE--SUGDEN LETS OFF SMOKE-BOMBS--CAPE TOWN, A PARTY, AND SOME + ANZACS--OOM TUYS ADVISES HASTE--THROUGH SOUTH AFRICA--AMERICANS AND + BOERS IN ERMELO--A HURRIED VISIT TO SWAZILAND FOR INFORMATION--MYSTERY + OVER THE CORONATION--ROYAL GIN FOR LABOTSIBENI--DEBESEEMBIE DRINKS AND + TALKS 226 + + + CHAPTER XV + + OUTFITTING FOR SWAZILAND--OUR COOK BECOMES "GUNGA DIN"--LOMWAZI'S + MESSENGER--OFF FOR ZOMBODE--ROSSMAN GOES HUNTING--TOO MUCH RAIN--THE + OXEN DIE AND ARE REPLACED BY DONKEYS--SNEAKING LIQUOR THROUGH + MBABANE--EZULWENI MOSQUITOES RIVAL NEW JERSEY'S--WE ARE UNPOPULAR IN + ZOMBODE--MANAAN'S DAMAGE SUIT AND SETTLEMENT 247 + + + CHAPTER XVI + + LABOTSIBENI REFUSES TO SEE ME--SUGDEN AND MY MEN ESCAPE + ASSASSINATION--A FRUITLESS CONFERENCE--WE FLEE TO LEBOMBO--OOM TUYS + TURNS UP--WE CONFER WITH QUEEN TZANEEN AND LOCHIEN--FIVE-AND-TEN-CENT- + STORE JEWELRY HAS PERSUASIVE POWERS--SUGDEN FALLS ILL--WE BUILD HIS + COFFIN--SEBUZA RETURNS FROM HIS SANCTIFICATION 268 + + + CHAPTER XVII + + L'TUNGA'S "MUTI" CURES THE SICK WHITE MAN--SEBUZA CHOOSES HIS WIVES--I + RECEIVE A MESSAGE FROM HIS MAJESTY'S HIGH COMMISSIONER FOR + SWAZILAND--A FLYING TRIP TO MBABANE--THE GOVERNMENT REFUSES TO + SANCTION SEBUZA'S CORONATION--HOW WITCH-DOCTORS SMOKE DAGGA 292 + + + CHAPTER XVIII + + WITCH-DOCTORS OF SWAZILAND--HOW THEY BROUGHT A FAMINE--L'TUNGA'S + SCHOOL OF WITCH-DOCTORING--THE "POISON TEST" TO SETTLE OWNERSHIP--THE + PROFESSIONAL WITCH-DOCTOR'S EQUIPMENT--L'TUNGA DECIDES A MURDER + CASE--SOME GENUINE CURES 310 + + + CHAPTER XIX + + WEARISOME DELAY IN CORONATION--WAR SUGGESTIONS FROM UMZULEK--MY PLAN + TO BLUFF LABOTSIBENI--THE BLUFF IS CALLED--A TICKLISH SITUATION-- + LABOTSIBENI REFUSES TO SURRENDER THE THRONE--OUR DEMONSTRATION + FAILS--NIGHT MURDERS PROVOKE WAR 331 + + + CHAPTER XX + + LEBOMBO THREATENED WITH ATTACK--TZANEEN FLIES TO US FOR + PROTECTION--VICTORY FOR SEBUZA--LABOTSIBENI'S MYSTERIOUS + DEATH--LOMWAZI SPARED FOR EXECUTION LATER--FUNERAL SACRIFICE OF THE + OLD QUEEN--QUEEN TZANEEN IN STATE--WE ARE FORCED TO JOIN THE ROYAL + IMPI 355 + + + CHAPTER XXI + + OUR SANCTIFICATION IN EXILE--HARDSHIPS IN THE HILLS--OOM TUYS SAVES + LOMWAZI'S LIFE--THE CELEBRATION--LOMWAZI FORMALLY SURRENDERS THE + THRONE--WE ARE INDUCTED INTO THE ROYAL IMPI--MBABANE SENDS FOR + INFORMATION--WE ESCAPE THROUGH PORTUGUESE TERRITORY TO AMERICA 371 + + + + +LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + + + Swazi mother carrying her babe _Frontispiece_ + FACING PAGE + + Map of Swaziland 32 + + Map showing section of South Africa 33 + + The result of the national sport 48 + + Interior of military barracks 49 + + Princesses and maid taking a morning bath 68 + + Young princesses amiably engaged in hair-dressing 68 + + Swazi girls 69 + + Pudana, favorite to the old Queen Labotsibeni 69 + + An actual combat in which the man on the left was slain 76 + + A type of dress worn by the royal executioner 77 + + Lomwazi, son and prime minister to the old Queen 77 + + Queen Tzaneen, mother of the crown prince 112 + + Queen Tzaneen with some Zulu princesses 113 + + Umzulek, a resourceful and influential exile 113 + + Swazi warriors and women dancing 128 + + Princesses of royal birth 129 + + Queen Labotsibeni, mother of King Buno 196 + + Lomwazi and his council of Indunas, or war chiefs 197 + + The stream that divides the royal from the common ground 204 + + Type of Afrikander cattle 205 + + Swazi women at home 205 + + On the way to the royal kraal at Zombode 256 + + The second trip into Swaziland 256 + + Mother feeding her baby 257 + + Maiden singing to the Crown Prince Sebuza 257 + + Dr. O'Neil and companions are received by Queen Tzaneen 282 + + Dr. O'Neil, Queen Tzaneen, Dr. Sugden, and Mr. Crespinell 282 + + Wives of the prime minister to Sebuza 283 + + Queen Tzaneen and Lochien 283 + + Princesses at the sacred bathing pool 304 + + A scene at the royal bathing pool 305 + + Interior of the royal kraal 320 + + Chief witch-doctor of Swaziland 320 + + A school of witch-doctors 321 + + A Swazi seminary or school for young witch-doctors 321 + + Crown Prince Sebuza in festival dress 336 + + Crown Prince Sebuza 337 + + Lochien, commander-in-chief of Prince Sebuza's impis 352 + + Warriors of Prince Sebuza's impis starting out to battle 352 + + One of the royal impis 353 + + Priests building the sacred fire 360 + + A view of the kraal 361 + + Mr. Crespinell at home among his black brethren 376 + + Dr. Sugden, Prince Lomwazi, and Dr. O'Neil 376 + + Dr. O'Neil, Mr. Crespinell, and Dr. Sugden after their + induction into the royal impi 377 + + +ADVENTURES IN SWAZILAND + + + + +CHAPTER I + +How the O'Neils came to the Transvaal--Boers with Irish names--Oom +Paul's refusal to buy Delagoa Bay--The Boers break for freedom--Their +bloody battles with the savage tribes--The Great Trek--Dingaanzulu's +treachery--The Dingaan Day celebration. + + +I was born only a few days trek, or march, from the Swazi border and +even as a youth made numerous trips into Swaziland. Through my uncle, +Oom Tuys Grobler, known as "The White King of Swaziland," I was +practically adopted by the savage rulers of that country and have +always been received with the greatest honor and consideration by the +various members of its royal family. My family have always been +interested in Swaziland and there was seldom a time when one of my ten +brothers was not hunting or visiting there. As one of the O'Neils of +Rietvlei, which means "The Valley of Reeds," any of us were welcome. + +It may seem strange that Boers should bear the name O'Neil, but this +is not out of the ordinary in the Transvaal. There are many Boer +families, most of them prominent in South Africa, who have Irish +names. My father's first wife was a Madden and our homestead at +Rietvlei is only about seven miles from the town of Belfast, which our +family founded and named. The record is not clear how these Irish +names are found among the Boers, but the fact that many Boers have +Celtic names refutes the statement that most of the Irish who fought +against the British in the Boer War were renegades from the United +Kingdom. + +My father is Richard Charles O'Neil, known among our people as "Slim +Gert," or "Slick Dick" as it would be Americanized, the title being a +tribute to his astuteness and good business sense. He was for six +years minister of finance in the cabinet of the late Oom Paul Kruger, +who has come to be regarded as one of the really great South Africans, +his fame being greater to-day than at the time of his death. Father +split with Oom Paul over the Delagoa Bay question and resigned from +his cabinet. At that time the Portuguese offered to sell Delagoa Bay +to Oom Paul for twenty thousand pounds. This was shortly before the +Boer War. Father strongly advocated the purchase, since it would give +our people an outlet on the coast, the Bay being a fine harbor. Oom +Paul, however, emphatically refused to buy. + +"It would only give our enemies, the English, a chance to attack us +from the sea," he said, ending the cabinet conference. "Now they can't +get to us through Portuguese territory." + +To-day Delagoa Bay could not be bought for twenty million pounds. + +My grandfather was John James O'Neil, a direct descendant of the +O'Neil who fled from Ireland in the time of Oliver Cromwell, and it +was he who chose Rietvlei as the family farm. When I say "farm," I use +the term in the Boer sense, since Rietvlei includes more than 100,000 +acres of the most fertile land in the Transvaal and is quite large +even for South Africa, the country of vast distances. + +As one of the survivors of "The Great Trek," my grandfather had +suffered the most intense hardships and escaped dangers that are +almost unbelievable to-day. This trek was the wholesale migration of +Boers who were dissatisfied with British rule and had decided to carve +out a country for themselves in what was then wildest Africa. + +The original Boers were the descendants of the Huguenots who were +expelled from France to Holland and eventually went overseas. They +made their chief settlement in what is now Cape Town, then a port of +call for the far-flung commerce of the Dutch, who were at that time +the dominant maritime nation. The British took Cape Town from the +Dutch in 1806, but returned the colony to Holland a few years later. +Finally, in 1815, the Dutch ceded Cape Town to the British for a sum +said to be six million pounds. + +Up to that time the settlers of the Cape Colony had only branched out +as far as the Great Fish River. This was the limit of safety, since +beyond lay trackless wastes and millions of savage natives noted for +their hostility and cannibalism. Practically all these settlers were +the ancestors of the present Boers. + +As is occasionally the case in present times, it was the missionaries +who caused the trouble that led to the breaking up of the old Boer +homes in Cape Colony. A number of these religious gentlemen came out +from England and lived for a short time in the Colony. On their return +to London they misrepresented facts to the king to such an extent that +a number of restrictive laws and regulations were passed. These made +life impossible for the Boers, who have always been a freedom-loving +people. + +Finally about ten thousand of the burghers got together and commenced +their exodus from Cape Colony into the unknown territory beyond the +Great Fish River. The Zulus and Basutus met the first party, there was +a bitter fight, and every Boer man, woman and child was massacred. In +many cases, when the men realized that there was no hope, they killed +their own womenfolk so that they might not fall into the hands of the +savages. + +This bloody tragedy did not deter the determined Boers. Other parties +followed, and soon these pioneers founded various settlements. Every +foot of their advance was gained by fighting, and the Boer conquest of +the Transvaal and Orange Free State may well be said to have been won +by the blood of freemen. Some of these expeditions settled in Natal +and founded the city of Pietermaritzburg, named after their great +leader, Pieter Maritz. + +It was during the year 1830 that my grandfather joined the Great Trek +and left Cape Colony with a large expedition led by Piet Retief and +Piet Potgier. The party had much trouble with the Zulus, its progress +being a continuous fight. On reaching the Vaal River, Potgier and +Retief came to loggerheads and agreed to separate. Each had his own +opinion as to where they ought to go, and each followed his own idea. +My grandfather remained with Retief and thereby nearly lost his life. +With my grandfather was his brother, Richard Charles O'Neil, after +whom my father was named. + +Piet Retief was killed by the Zulus, and this massacre is now history, +almost sacred history, in the Transvaal. It seems that Retief led his +party into what is now Natal and there undertook to come to some basis +of peace with the savages. A truce was declared, and he went to the +Zulu royal kraal and saw their great chief, Dingaanzulu. The chief +agreed to cede certain territory to Retief if the Boer would recover +for the Zulus certain cattle stolen from them by another savage +nation. This land was to be the first of the new Republic of Natalia, +which my grandfather and Retief planned to found. + +Retief recovered the cattle and with one hundred burghers visited the +Zulu royal kraal and returned them to Dingaanzulu. After the cattle +were driven in the Zulu chief sent for the Boer leader, ostensibly to +arrange about the land grant. He insisted that the Boers were now his +friends and, as such, should leave their weapons outside the royal +kraal and enter unarmed. The ruthless Zulu chief said that this would +be "an evidence of the good hearts of the white men." + +With great foreboding Retief did as he was asked. With his hundred men +he went into the kraal and found Dingaanzulu in the most friendly +frame of mind. After fraternization the chief told the Boers that a +great celebration had been prepared in their honor, and that night +there was feasting, dancing, and much speech-making in front of the +great fires. + +I have often heard what happened next. It is history with us and +tradition with the Zulus, Swazis, and other natives of our section of +the Transvaal. The story was first told me by an old Zulu who was a +sort of farm-helper at our home when I was a little fellow. He claimed +to have been there, and from his evidence I believe he was. + +"There was a great feast and all the fires were lighted," he said. +"Many cattle had been killed and all the royal impis (regiments) were +in full costume. These were the picked men of all Zululand, and they +danced for a long time before the fires. + +"Dingaanzulu sat with the white leader, and they drank tswala (kaffir +beer) together. Often they would shake hands, and it was as though +they were brothers. All the other white men sat near the fires in +front of the king. They, too, had much tswala and plenty to eat. + +"When it was quite late and the moon shone through the flames of the +dying fires, many of the royal impi gathered behind those who were +dancing and waited for a sign from Dingaanzulu. Soon this came, and +then the killing! Dingaanzulu stood up and threw his leopard-skin +cloak about his shoulders. This was the sign. The waiting warriors +dashed through the dancers and threw themselves upon the white men. +Assegais flashed, and the Boer leader dashed to his men. These held +together and fought the impis with bare hands. Some of the white men +were very strong and tore assegais from the warriors and fought with +them, stabbing, and stabbing, and stabbing! + +"But there were hundreds, even thousands, of Zulus to each white man, +and the fight could not last long. All the white men were killed, and +some were stabbed scores of times before they died. I do not know how +their leader died, but we found him with a broken assegai in his hand +and seven dead warriors about him." + +As soon as Dingaanzulu had murdered Retief and his band, he sent his +impis to kill all the remaining members of the expedition. My +grandfather and his brother were in charge of the main encampment, or +laager, at Weenan, which means "Weeping," or "Place of Sorrow." The +wagons had been formed into a hollow square, and the Boers finally +drove off the Zulus after a fight lasting several days. Hundreds of +the savages were killed, and the Boers lost a large number of men who +could ill be spared. + +Then my grandfather and his party settled in the district surrounding +Majuba Hill. His brother founded the place known as "O'Neil's Farm" at +the foot of Majuba, while my grandfather established and named the +village of Belfast on the top of the hill. Following this he moved to +Potchefstroom, and from there north-east, where he established the +Republic of Lydenburg. These various little republics were +discontinued, or rather merged into the modern form of government, +when the Boers became sufficiently numerous and communications were +established. + +After the establishment of the Republic of Lydenburg my grandfather +discovered Rietvlei, the "Valley of Reeds," which has been the O'Neil +homestead ever since. + +The massacre of Retief and his devoted band is celebrated yearly by a +three-day holiday in the Transvaal and Orange Free State. The +celebration is in the nature of a memorial service, followed by +rejoicing. About every eighty miles throughout the Boer country a spot +is designated, and the burghers, with their families, trek to this +place. This trek is symbolic of the "Great Trek" in which their +ancestors died. On the first day of the celebration there is a sham +battle in which the fight at Weenan is acted again, and the last two +days are given over to religious services and the festivities. + +All self-respecting Boer families join in the Dingaan Day celebration, +many of them coming scores of miles to do so. The children are taught +the story of "the day" in the schools, and it is probably the most +important civic celebration of the year. + +Piet Potgier's party was entirely wiped out, none surviving attacks +made by the combined impis of the Zulus and Basutus. + + + + +CHAPTER II + + +Rietvlei, the "Valley of Reeds"--The O'Neil homestead--Pioneer +hardships--The war against Maleuw, "The Lion"--"Slim Gert" O'Neil +breaks the power of the Makateese king--Jafta, King of the Mapors--My +boyhood and "Jass"--Sibijaan, "The Skunk," becomes my pal--My first +trousers nearly cost me an eye--Our toy factory and mimic battles--Oom +Tuys Grobler tells of Swaziland and King Buno, "The Terrible." + + +Rietvlei is one of the most beautiful accidents of nature I have ever +seen. To properly appreciate this wonderful Valley of Reeds, it should +be approached across the high veldt. To reach it in this way is to +receive a thrill that is seldom felt when viewing any scene. It is set +like a jewel in the wilderness of the veldt and seems more like a +sunken oasis than anything else. Time and time again I have been +almost startled when I suddenly saw Rietvlei. + +As you ride across the high veldt you are struck by its utter +barrenness and the thousands of ant-hills on all sides. The wild +grasses, browned by the sun, are higher than your horse's belly and +far in the distance are the barren hills. The veldt, with its altitude +of about seven thousand feet, is much like the plains of Arizona, New +Mexico, and Texas. It is almost desert. Hundreds of times I have +crossed this veldt on my hairy Boer pony and always the same thing has +happened. Several times, sometimes scores of times, springbok, +blesbok, or duiker, the antelopes of the veldt, have jumped to their +feet and scampered off through the tall grass. My pony would give one +leap and then dash madly after them. If I was day-dreaming, I was +likely to find myself unhorsed and facing a chase after my active +steed. However, one gets used to such interruptions and it was seldom +that I did not enjoy the chase. It is no use to think that a Boer pony +can be prevented from pursuing these antelope; he is trained to do it +from the first time he feels a saddle, and his quickness often makes +it possible for the shot that provides fresh meat that night in camp. + +After miles and miles of veldt, with the distant hills seeming to +recede as one goes on, the fascination of space loses its grip and the +fatigue of monotony follows. About the time I would begin to feel like +a sailor adrift in mid-ocean the blessed relief would come--I would +reach Rietvlei! + +My pony would come to a sudden stop on the rim of a great precipice +and thousands of feet below I would see the Valley of Reeds with the +settlement that meant home. The high veldt breaks off abruptly, as +though cut with a giant knife, exactly like parts of the Grand Canyon +of the Colorado in America. Since the beginning of time the little +rivers of Rietvlei have worn down the veldt until they have hollowed +out thousands and thousands of acres. From the cool high veldt to the +fertile green Valley of Reeds is a wonderful change, and it takes a +full hour to climb down the winding trail. + +My grandfather, John James O'Neil, was the first white man to see +Rietvlei and he immediately decided that he need look no further for +his home. He at once settled there and went through many hardships to +found his home. The natives inhabiting the valley were the Mapors, +then a powerful and hostile tribe. My father built our present home, +which is of white limestone, iron, and wood, all of which had to be +brought some six hundred miles by ox-teams. It was many years before +the house was completed, but my father intended it as the permanent +home of the O'Neils and it will stand for centuries. + +The hardships endured by my grandfather and father were such as would +have daunted less stern men, but they were Boers and all Africa knows +them to be the greatest pioneers the world has ever seen. Jafta, king +of the Mapors, whose royal kraal was about forty-eight miles from my +home, was my family's greatest enemy. Both my grandfather and father +were constantly at war with him and were forced to maintain a large +force of fighting men to repel his attacks. There was always the +threat that Jafta would overwhelm the little band of doughty Boers in +the valley, and the white men practically lived with their guns in +their hands. + +Those were anxious days for the womenfolk. All supplies had to be +brought in from the coast, and the wagons were months on the way. +Sometimes they would be gone for nearly a year and during all this +time the women never knew but that some hostile native tribe had +overwhelmed the devoted burghers and killed all their men. Dogged, +dauntless, and determined, the men won through time after time, until +there broke out the great war fomented by Maleuw, king of the +Makateese. He was known as "The Lion" and was a very able savage, +brave, cunning, and a born leader of men. + +Maleuw became obsessed with the idea that the white men should be +driven out, and with this object provoked a war with Jafta, king of +the Mapors. It seems that Jafta, although he had been carrying on his +private feud against the white men, did not care to join Maleuw and +refused to aid him. The Makateese were the most warlike nation at that +time, probably owing to the inspiration of "The Lion," and they swept +down on the Mapors with the expressed intention of exterminating them. + +The war was most sanguinary. No prisoners were taken, and it soon +began to look as though the Mapors would be wiped out. The white men +made no effort toward peace, taking the view that the more of their +enemies were killed the safer life would be for them. Soon Jafta and +his troops were in full flight, and then the white men found +themselves facing another and more real danger. With Maleuw victorious +he could rally additional armies, and this meant he would be powerful +enough to drive the white men out and probably kill most of them. + +Under my father, Slim Gert O'Neil, a council of war was called at +Rietvlei and the leading Boers and some of the British settlers +attended. Chiefs of the Basuto and Swazi nations were sent for, and it +was decided to save the remnants of the Mapor nation and in so doing +break the power of "The Lion" and his Makateese armies. Umbandine was +king of Swaziland at that time. + +King Maleuw found himself attacked by a large army made up of Boers, +British, Basutos, Mapors, and Swazis, and there were several fierce +battles. In some manner the Makateese had obtained a number of rifles +and there was much loss of life on both sides. This war ended with the +utter crushing of Maleuw and his army, and since then the Makateese +have never threatened the peace of the Transvaal. The final battle was +the storming of Maleuw's kraal, which was a veritable fortress on the +top of a steep hill about five hundred feet high. + +The hill is now known as "Maleuwkop," in memory of the old "Lion." It +was practically impregnable to a native army using only savage +weapons. The "palace" proper was on the top of the hill and was +entirely surrounded by walls of thorn trees and prickly-pear cactus. +These thorn trees are most formidable, the thorns being about three +inches long and sharp as needles. The Boers call them "haakensteek," +which is translated into "catch-and-stick." The British call them +"wait-a-bit" thorns, and under either name they are equally dangerous. + +Outside the thorn wall there was a row of huts in which the picked +warriors of Maleuw lived. Below the huts came another thorn wall and +another row of huts. There were eight or ten such settlements, each +guarded by its own wall. I have heard many tales of the battle, which +lasted all day. Finally the white men broke through the various thorn +walls, and that was the end of the Makateese peril. My father in +telling of the fight has often said, "If we had had one +field-gun--only a little one--we could have blown 'The Lion' out of +his lair and saved many lives." + +Shortly after this war I was born at Rietvlei. I was the youngest of +ten sons and spent my entire childhood without white playmates, except +for my sister, Ellen, always my favorite. One of my earliest +recollections is of seeing King Jafta when he paid ceremonial visits +to my father. Under the conditions upon which the Boers agreed to help +him against the Makateese, Jafta had ceded certain rich territories to +Oom Paul Kruger. This land President Kruger sold to my father, who +made an agreement with Jafta whereby the savage but now +king-in-reduced-circumstances was allowed to remain in possession for +a certain length of time. It was in connection with this agreement +that Jafta would visit Rietvlei at certain intervals. + +I was only a little child then, but I can remember the fallen king +well. Owing to his lack of power he could not make much of a showing, +but it was necessary that he maintain his kingly dignity on these +visits. He would be accompanied by the last of his officers and a +small impi, or regiment, and my father would treat with him exactly as +though he were the powerful chief of former times. Jafta remembered +this later and repaid us by giving us valuable assistance during the +Boer War, at the time when the British were overrunning our lands. + +The ceremonies attending Jafta's visits were always about the same. +His courier would come ahead to announce his arrival, and my father +would send word that he was pleased to see him and that his party +should approach. Then Jafta, entirely naked except for an old silk hat +my father had given him, would stride into the garden and when my +father came out of the house would make an oration. My father would +listen most respectfully and then would reply, always addressing the +deposed king as "Nkoos," which has the same meaning to our kaffirs as +"Your Majesty the King" has to the average Britisher. + +The silk hat was very important in Jafta's eyes. It meant much more +than a mere personal adornment. My father always wears silk hats, even +when traveling about the farm, and Jafta attached much significance to +the one he wore and always guarded it most carefully. In fact, one of +the greatest honors he could confer on any of his officers was to make +one of them official guardian of the hat when he was not wearing it. +This was the savage conception of the coveted post of "Keeper of the +Crown Jewels" that is found in some present-day monarchies. + +However, Jafta finally came on more evil days. Owing to certain +outside influences which were brought to bear upon him and to which he +acceded, it became necessary to take severe measures, and he and his +small band of followers were removed from the territory my father had +loaned them. This was rather sad, because this land had been the site +of the royal kraal of the Mapors since time immemorial. + +Nevertheless, we have continued to employ Mapors on the farm and have +a number of families there now. My old nurse was a Mapor woman. She +was faithfulness personified, and I led her a merry dance. Her only +garment was a loin cloth made of a duiker skin, and on account of her +scant clothing my older brothers nick-named her "Jass," which means +"overcoat." Jass was the mother of several little Mapors, the scars on +her forehead showing their number. Like all the other savages in the +Transvaal, the Mapors practice scarification to a great extent. The +women are scarred either on the forehead or breasts, while the men are +entitled to a scar on the forehead for each enemy they have killed. + +Until I was sent to boarding-school in Grahamstown, that is, until I +was well into my teens, my only companions were little kaffir boys. My +best pal was Sibijaan, whose name means "The Skunk," and even today he +is my body servant when I am at home. How we came to possess him is +illustrative of conditions in the district surrounding Rietvlei. + +Sibijaan and two other little kaffirs were brought to our home early +one morning by a neighbor of ours who had captured them on our +property. It seems they belonged to some tribe that had recently been +wiped out by the Zulus and had been fleeing north to get away from the +death that caught their people. I have never seen so miserable a trio +as these poor little natives. They were almost starved and were +unutterably dirty. In addition, they were in a state of most pitiable +terror. They regarded the white men with bulging eyes and seemed only +to want a place to hide. + +Since they had been captured on our farm, they belonged to us. My +mother was at home at the time, and the neighbor and she had a pretty +argument as to the disposal of the captives. I listened to all of it, +keeping one eye on the little boys and wondering how I would feel if I +were in their place. + +Finally my mother agreed that the neighbor should have the largest of +the three, since he was big enough to be of some use in herding cattle +and sheep. The two little fellows were to belong to us, and subsequent +events proved that we had much the best of the bargain. The one taken +by our neighbor soon escaped, while our captives quickly became +devoted to us and are with us yet. The elder of the two was Sibijaan, +and my mother gave him to me for my own servant and playmate. Several +of my brothers happened to be spending a few days at the farm at this +time and they gave Sibijaan his name. Dick did the naming when he +said, "The little nigger would make a skunk blush with envy. Let's +call him The Skunk!" + +Sibijaan and I soon had definite tasks assigned to us. On a Boer farm +no one rests--all have their work, even to the women and children. We +were sent out to mind the sheep, of which my father had thousands, and +were given about a dozen other little kaffirs as assistants. I was +about seven years old at this time, big and strong for my age. + +During those years there was a great lack of traders in our section of +the Transvaal. This was due to the continuous wars in which the native +tribes fought one another and now and then raided a Boer farm. Traders +had been killed and their goods stolen, and none ever stopped at the +Valley of Reeds. This meant that my father had to outfit expeditions +and make the long journey to the coast and back again, if we were to +have any of the civilized necessities or luxuries. + +Our neighbors would join in these expeditions, and often there would +be a score of ox-wagons and several score Boers in the parties. I +remember these expeditions well for many reasons--my mother used to +spend anxious months during my father's absence and about this time +there was an expedition which brought me my first pair of trousers. +These, in turn, were the cause of my receiving an injury to one of my +eyes from which I never fully recovered. My father had been away for +seven months this time and we had begun to fear that hostile natives +had attacked the caravan and done him some harm. Many and many such an +outfit had been wiped out by the Zulus, Makateese, or other hostile +tribes, and there never was any assurance that the few rifles of the +Boers could stop the rush of the savage impis. + +On this occasion Sibijaan and I were minding a small herd of sheep on +the little plateau that overlooks the heart of Rietvlei. We were quite +busy trying to drive the flock to a better feeding-ground when +Sibijaan suddenly stopped and listened. + +"Strangers coming!" he shouted. "I smell oxen and wagons. White men +coming up the Rietvlei!" + +We looked in the direction he indicated and saw a cloud of dust +creeping along the rough road. A second later a man in a silk hat, +riding a familiar horse, emerged from the dust. Even at that distance +I could see the rifle across his saddle. It was Slim Gert O'Neil, my +father. + +Sibijaan and I, followed by all the other little kaffirs, raced to the +wagons, where my father swung me on his horse and greeted me most +affectionately. A few moments later occurred the first really great +event of my life--I received my first trousers! My father took me back +to one of the wagons and presented me with a stout pair of corduroys. +I was overjoyed and danced up and down, Sibijaan and the other little +savages joining me, as though at a celebration. Now, I felt, at last I +am a real white man, and the distance between my black playmates and +myself seemed to become immense. + +A little later I had slipped into the trousers and was proudly +marching at the head of my little impi. We saw the wagons into the +home kraal and then went back to our sheep. I was the hero of the hour +among my playmates, and this led to the injury that has affected my +eye ever since. + +Sibijaan, who had always shared with me the leadership of our impi, +lost caste when I donned the trousers and instinctively became the +kaffir. This hurt him, and late in the afternoon he made me the +following proposition: + +"Klein Baas (meaning 'Little Boss')," he said, in his pathetic +earnestness forgetting to address me by my native name, "Mzaan +Bakoor," "you have been wearing the trousers all day. Don't you think +it is my turn to wear them? We are both indunas (leaders) of our impi; +it is not right that one should be better than the other. Let me wear +the trousers until sundown and show our men that we are +brothers-in-arms!" + +This seemed reasonable to me. Sibijaan and I had shared our joys and +woes for several years and there was no reason for my refusing him the +honor of wearing the wonderful corduroys. We changed. I put on his +beads and he got into my corduroys. Then came a perfect exhibition of +the kaffir temperament. Sibijaan became insufferably arrogant. He gave +orders to our impi, and for a moment I thought he was going to try and +command me. The more he lorded it over the others, the more sullen and +angered they became. + +Of course the inevitable happened. Several of the little lads demanded +that they be allowed their turn at wearing the trousers, the badge of +authority, as it were. Sibijaan refused. + +"No, no, you cannot wear them!" he shouted. "Now I am a man; I am +almost white! I am a man and you are little boys! Who am I that I +should take notice of such dirt?" + +But he did. This last insult was too much. The indignant lads attacked +Sibijaan, and in a second there was a squirming mass of black legs, +arms, and bodies, with my precious trousers in danger of destruction. +We all had assegais, or short stabbing spears, and regardless of these +I dashed into the melee. Death or wounds were little things compared +to the loss of those trousers. + +When the fight was over I had been stabbed in the eye, but I had the +trousers! Practically every boy had at least one wound, and one of the +little fellows died before we got him back to the house where he could +have attention. Owing to lack of proper medical care my eye was +allowed to get well without expert attention and will always show the +effects of this trouser-fight. From then on, however, I wore the +trousers. + +I shall always remember my father's comment on this happening. He +asked me how the row had started and who had stabbed the boy to death. +It was practically impossible to determine the latter, and I explained +why. He listened in his quiet way and then gave me a talking to. + +"Yours is the guilt for the death of that boy," he said. "You forgot +you were a Boer and lowered yourself to the level of a Mapor! When you +gave Sibijaan the trousers you became as the dirt under his feet. +White men wear clothes; kaffirs go naked. Does my son, the son of Slim +Gert O'Neil, want to be a nigger?" + +Only in one other way did Sibijaan threaten my supremacy as the +undisputed leader of our impi. This was due to his extraordinary knack +in handling clay in the making of models of all kinds. + +Not far from the house, along the bank of the river, there was a large +clay-bank. I established a toy factory there and we made all sorts of +clay toys, including idols, oxen, horses, and models of everything we +handled in our daily life. To make it a contest Sibijaan and I, with +our followers, used to compete with Klaas and his in the excellency of +our models. My sister, Ellen, was the judge. Klaas, by the way, was +the other little kaffir who was captured at the same time our neighbor +brought Sibijaan to us. + +Klaas would make a number of things, and his followers would duplicate +them. Then he would challenge us to do better, and we would get to +work. Many and many a day we spent in this toy factory, and the +competition was keen. Soon, however, Sibijaan began to outstrip all of +us in the excellency of his models. He was so much better at the play +than I was that I soon found myself ashamed to place my models against +his. + +I found myself again in danger of losing caste and soon hit upon an +idea that saved my face. Now the Boers are a deeply religious people. +In our home we always had morning and evening prayers and the fact +that we were scores of miles from the nearest church was the only +reason that we did not attend one. Not long before the toy factory +began to be a sore spot with me, a minister of the Dutch church had +visited Rietvlei. He was visiting the outlying districts of the +Transvaal and performing marriages and christenings. Naturally, the +minister held services, the most interesting part being the sermon. He +spoke with great force and many gestures, all of them most emphatic. +Like all the Boers, he was bearded and had shaggy brows. I found his +sermon most entertaining, although I understood little of what he said. + +However, the sermon gave me an idea. I decided I would be a minister +and the very next day commenced preaching. There was a ruined kraal, +formerly the residence of a long-dead cannibal chief, on a little hill +near home. I summoned Sibijaan, Klaas, and all the others of our impi +to attend services there, and then proceeded to deliver a loud +harangue to them. As I spoke in Dutch, with now and then a Mapor +phrase, they did not understand much of what I said, but I made up for +this by my forceful delivery. The natives are never more happy than +when delivering an oration, the words illustrated with full-arm +gestures, and I found my audience most appreciative. Religious +services as I conducted them appealed to the savage mind, and +Sibijaan's superiority as an artist faded to nothing. + +Shortly after the minister's visit, my uncle, Oom Tuys Grobler, came +to stay with us for a time. He had come from Swaziland and brought +wondrous tales of battles there. I do not remember what war was going +on, but Oom Tuys made us believe that war was the chief occupation of +the Swazis. He used to while away the long evenings by telling me +about King Buno and his mother, Queen Labotsibeni. To my childish mind +Buno appeared as the embodiment of all things savage and ruthless, +while his mother was not much better. I was fired with the desire to +visit Swaziland and see the great King Buno, and I asked Oom Tuys to +take me with him on his next trip. He did not refuse, but tried to +discourage me by relating weird stories of how white boys were +sacrificed and eaten by the Swazi warriors. These tales did not +impress me very much, since I felt that I would be safe with my uncle, +who was known throughout the Transvaal as the only Boer King Buno +trusted. + +These tales of battle inspired Sibijaan, Klaas, and myself with +military ardor, and soon we prepared to play the game of war. This was +only the play of little black boys led by a white, but out of it came +my native name. I am called "Mzaan Bakoor" by all the natives of our +section of the Transvaal. The name means "He of the Great Ears," or +"He Who Hears Everything." How I earned the name illustrates our +method of warfare. + +Klaas would lead one force, and Sibijaan and myself the other. Our +weapons were long reeds and pellets of clay. The pellets would be +fixed on the end of the reed and thrown with a full-arm swing. They +would travel like a stone from a sling, and after a short time we +became very proficient in their use. We could hit our target more +times than not, and I well remember that one of these clay pellets +made a dangerous missile. + +The battle would start at long range, and sometimes would continue for +hours before we got to grips. When we were satisfied with the +long-range execution, we would rush together and attack one another +with our hands. Sibijaan invented the method followed in this +close-range fighting. Adversaries would pair off, each grasping the +other by the ears. Then would ensue an ear-pulling match which was +only decided when one of the warriors cried quits. Because I seemed +able to stand any amount of this torture, they called me "Mzaan +Bakoor," and the name has been mine ever since. This method of +ear-pulling was another tribute to Sibijaan's cunning, for both his +ears had been bitten off in the trouser-fight and it was practically +impossible for any one to hang on to the remains! + +In addition to herding the sheep, we boys were in charge of a herd of +about two hundred little calves. Our chief work with these was to +prevent them getting to their mothers, the milch cows of the farm. +Each morning and evening the calves were allowed to spend half an hour +with their mothers, but the rest of the time they had to go without +milk. + +Milking time was always a busy period for us. The cows were kept in +kraals, or open enclosures, and each morning we would have to catch +them for the milkers. This was done with a rope-loop on the end of a +long stick. When the cow was captured the rope would be passed around +a post, the cow being drawn in and securely tied. The suckling calf +was then brought to its mother, and this soothes the animal. As soon +as the cow was quiet, her hinds legs and tail were tied together and +she was ready for milking. + +The milker would get ready, and then we would have to drive the calf +away and keep it away with a long stick until the milking was +finished. It was all a primitive and strenuous performance, but these +Afrikander cattle are very wild and cannot be handled. + +Another busy period for us would be during the sheep-shearing season. +The sheep are divided into lots and classes, being ear-marked, and it +used to be our work to keep them together and make ourselves generally +useful. Another duty which fell to us was the leading of the ox-teams, +for, in fact, the boys of my impi could be used for every service not +requiring the strength of a man. + +During all these busy boyhood days I lived practically the outdoor +life of a savage. My early education was given me by my mother and my +father's private secretary, an Englishman with a university training. +I was quick to learn my lessons, chiefly because success meant speedy +escape to the wild pastimes of the little savages who were my +companions. Practically all our sports had to do with war and the +hunt, so that I grew up to regard death as only an incident in the +life of a warrior and not an event to be feared or worried about. + +However, on my first visit to Buno, then king of Swaziland, I saw +death in a form that shocked me by its needless brutality and utter +wastefulness. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +My desire to visit King Buno--How I won the trip on a bet--A Boer race +meet--"Black Hand Tom," the hope of Rietvlei--Klaas's ride to save his +skin--Father gives permission for my visit--Belfast celebrates the +Boer victory. + + +My absolute conviction that no one in the world owned a faster horse +than "Black Hand Tom," my father's favorite, earned me my first visit +to Swaziland. This was during the summer after the Great Drought, when +the bloody rule of King Buno had become the shame of South Africa. + +Day after day I had heard tales about Swaziland that fed my desire to +go and see some of these things, and Oom Tuys never forgot to make my +hair stand on end with his stories about his friend, Buno, and his +warriors. I was just in my teens and the desire to visit Swaziland was +the one thing I lived for. Whenever Tuys came to visit my father I +would get him aside and beg him to take me with him on his next trip. +Indeed, I kept after him until I became a nuisance. Each time he would +promise, and then find a good reason for putting me off until some +time later. His evasions only whetted my appetite for Swaziland, but +it was a kind fate, combined with a little boy's abiding faith in his +father, that finally won the day for me. + +Like all the Boers, my father was a great horse fancier and took pride +in several fast animals that he had bred at Rietvlei. Looking back, I +realize that these must have been very good horses, their forebears +being imported stock of the best European blood. + +It was in the summer of 1897 that my father arranged a race meet at +Belfast, about eight miles from our home. This was the nearest town, +and the race was to be the crowning event of a sort of festival +lasting several days. Previously my father had caused the word to get +abroad that he had several of the fastest horses in the Transvaal, but +that he was keeping them under cover, hoping for a chance to win some +races at large odds. Of course all Boers are good sportsmen and keenly +interested in racing; in addition, there were a number of sporting +Englishmen who noted the fact that Slim Gert O'Neil was training +horses in the Valley of Reeds. + +The result was what my father anticipated. Word was sent to him by the +sporting crowd in Johannesburg that they did not believe that any of +his horses were "worth the powder to blow them to hell"--as the +message was delivered by Oom Tuys. My father took this to heart and +sent back word that the Johannesburgers were invited to bring their +race horses, "if they had any worthy of the name," to the race meet at +Belfast. There was a little further correspondence, which bordered on +insult on the part of the Johannesburgers, and the arrangements were +completed for the meet. + +[Illustration: SWAZILAND + +Drawn by Dr. Owen Rowe O'Neil] + +[Illustration: SECTION OF SOUTH AFRICA + +Showing Swaziland and its relative position to other states] + +My father sent Mapor and Swazi runners to all the Boer farms within a +week's trek of Rietvlei, announcing the races and inviting his friends +to "come and see what a country-bred can do against the pick of the +Transvaal and Orange Free State." It was a great day for all us little +fellows when we moved on Belfast. All but a few old women left +Rietvlei, and we arrived in Belfast to find thousands of strangers +thronging the town. + +Boer farmers had trekked in from almost a hundred miles away, and I +have never seen so many great bearded men in my life. With their great +slouch hats and heavy boots, they could be seen swinging along the +streets in all directions. There were literally thousands of kaffirs, +Mapors, Swazis, Makateese, and Zulus, who belonged to the various +parties of Boers and who kept close to them as they wandered about +Belfast. + +Some of the native tribes were at war at that time, I remember, and +there was some fear that there might be an outbreak in the town. This +fear was quelled, however, when word was passed that the first kaffir +who raised a hand would be shot on sight by the nearest Boer. He would +have been, too, because the Boers never hesitate when dealing with the +blacks. Always our people have been firm in their dealings with the +natives, with the result that they have a wholesome respect for us. It +is the English, newly arrived in the Transvaal, who make all the +trouble with the kaffirs. Particularly do the English and American +missionaries create dissension among them. They give the kaffirs +mistaken ideas about their importance in the scheme of things and lead +them to believe that they are as good as white people. Taking it all +in all, they have created more trouble than they have done good. The +missionaries seldom change their teachings, but the Englishmen soon +wake up and after they have been in our country for about a year know +how to treat the natives. + +There was no trouble in Belfast, although it was said that there were +several combats outside the town in which about a score of blacks were +killed and wounded. + +Our arrival for the races must have been quite an impressive event. My +father on his great horse, wearing his silk hat, led the procession. +Then all his sons and several of the girls followed, on horses also, +and then came my mother in a light road-wagon. After her came our +horses, led by Mapors, and behind them came several hundred of our +retainers, all decked out in their festival costumes and carrying +their short spears and knob-kerries, or fighting clubs. + +Oom Tuys met us at the edge of the town. He was riding a great roan +horse and was accompanied by a number of father's friends. From his +gestures I knew that he was excited, and I slyly pressed my horse +forward until I could hear what he was saying. + +"The Johannesburgers have brought their best," he told father. "Slim +Gert, you will have to have all the luck in the world to beat their +horses. Never have I seen better! They have also brought much money +and are waiting for you to bet. Will you bet with them? I advise you +not to. They have the best jockeys in the Transvaal, too!" + +"We shall see; we shall see," was all father would say. + +"They are at the hotel and they wait for you," Oom Tuys went on. "I +told them that I would bring you to them." + +My father seemed to start at this, and I saw him look sharply at Tuys. +Then the color mounted in his cheek. + +"Who are they that I should go to them?" he asked indignantly. "Why +should an O'Neil of Rietvlei wait on these common gamblers from +Johannesburg? If they want to see me, let them come to my house!" + +My father had a house in Belfast where he transacted business and +often spent the night when it was too late or too rainy to return to +the Valley of Reeds. + +Soon we reached the center of the town and found thousands waiting to +welcome us. All the Boers knew Slim Gert O'Neil and his sons, and we +received an ovation. We passed through the town to father's house, and +the horses were placed in the small kraal at the rear. He looked them +over, Oom Tuys also being a keenly interested observer, and then went +into the house. We boys remained outside, and it was one of the +proudest moments of my life. So proud was I that I felt impelled to +tell all the town boys what I really thought about father's horses and +in particular about the speed of "Black Hand Tom." + +"He is so fast," I assured them, "that he outruns bullets. Only the +lightning can catch him, and I am not any too sure about that!" + +Some of the boys jeered at my claim, and thereupon ensued a small +battle. My impi backed me up, and it began to look as though some one +would be badly hurt when Oom Tuys dashed out of the house and +scattered us. + +"Mzaan Bakoor, you little devil!" he shouted, catching me by the ears. +"Why do you make so much fight? Why do you tell such lies? 'Black Hand +Tom' will only eat the dust of these Johannesburg horses. They are +race horses!" + +Now this was sacrilege. To hear my uncle, the great "White King of +Swaziland," say such a thing gave me such a shock that I forgot to +kick his shins for tweaking my ears. Then came my inspiration! Brought +up among sportsmen, I seized my chance. + +"If 'Black Hand Tom' is so slow, then you bet against him. I dare +you!" I said. + +"Of course I will. I am no fool!" Tuys assured me. + +"All right, Oom Tuys, then you bet with me first," I said. "If 'Black +Hand Tom' wins his race, you must take me with you to see King Buno +the next time you go. I dare you to make your promise good. If +father's horse loses, I'll never ask you to take me to Swaziland again!" + +Tuys let me go and hesitated a moment. I taunted him and dared him to +take my bet, and he finally agreed. + +"If 'Black Hand Tom' wins, you leave for Swaziland with me in two +weeks," he promised. + +We went into the house and found several of the Johannesburg gamblers +there, waiting to talk to my father. They were drinking gin and +whiskey, and I remember marveling at their wonderful clothes. Never +before had I seen such waistcoats or such cravats, and their great, +soft, light-colored hats were a revelation to me. I particularly +noticed that they all smoked long black cigars, wore huge diamonds, +and talked in loud coarse voices. + +Soon father's secretary came into the room. In his quiet English way +he told them that his master did not care to see them that night and +would talk to them in the morning. The races were to be next day and +the gamblers left the house quite disgruntled. As they went out of the +door I heard one of them say, "Never mind, we'll get his money +to-morrow!" + +Shortly before prayers that night I told my father what this man had +said, but he only smiled in his dry way. + +"Don't worry, Owen, my lad," he said. "Your father is not always such +a fool as he might look. To-morrow night may have another tale to tell!" + +However, I went to bed much troubled that night. We seemed such +country people compared to these flashy horsemen from the great city +of Johannesburg. I tried to sleep though quite unhappy at the thought +that father might be mistaken, but his quiet confidence somehow +reassured me to a certain extent. My father was a very great man to +me--the greatest in the world--great even when compared to Oom Paul +Kruger, our idol. It seemed impossible that his horse should not be +the best and, comforted by my faith, I finally fell asleep. + +Oh, the glories of the next day, the day of the races! Even before +breakfast we boys trudged to the race track and watched several horses +working out. Two of them were from Johannesburg, and even their +blankets failed to hide the fact that they were fast. In addition to +their white trainers, each horse seemed to have almost a dozen kaffirs +in attendance, and all about the track were hundreds of black and +white men watching the trials. + +On all sides of the track, also, could be seen the wagons of the Boer +farmers who had trekked in to the meet. Slender spirals of smoke were +rising from each group, showing that breakfast was being prepared. +There must have been hundreds of wagons, and the whole territory about +the race track was one great camping-ground. + +We returned to the house to find father and Oom Tuys out in the kraal +carefully examining our horses. I remember how father ran his hands +lovingly over the sleek body of "Black Hand Tom." The horse would +allow few to approach him, but he nuzzled my father's hand, as though +to say, "I'm fit for the race of my life. I will not fail Slim Gert!" + +After breakfast, instead of taking our horses to the track, my father +had them worked out along the road which ran by the house. Later I +learned that this was a disappointment to the gamblers from +Johannesburg. They had hoped to see "Black Hand Tom" on the track +before the race, so as to get a line on him. + +Shortly afterward my father and Oom Tuys rode over to the track, and +we all trooped after. Early as it was, crowds were beginning to gather +and I never saw so many people in my life. I was surprised at the +number of white men there. I knew that there were millions of blacks +in our country, but was greatly astonished to see so many of our color. + +Father rode among the wagons surrounding the track, greeting his +friends and everywhere receiving a joyful welcome. Each one asked him +about his great horse, and his answer invariably was, "He is ready to +do the very best he can. The rest is with God!" This seemed to satisfy +the Boers, and I know it was all I wanted to hear. I immediately +announced to all the lads with me that the race was as good as won. + +Oom Tuys took occasion to remind me of our bet and chaffed me, saying, +"Now you will never see King Buno!" This made me wrathy. It was +unspeakable that he should doubt that father's horse could do anything +but win! + +While at the track I remembered a little talk I had planned to have +with Klaas. Owing to an uncanny knack with horses, the little beggar +had been trained as our jockey and was to ride "Black Hand Tom" in the +great race. Sibijaan and I returned to the house and looked him up. We +found him chumming with the horse, and called him out of the stable. + +Now Klaas was smaller and lighter than either Sibijaan or myself and +stood no chance with us in combat of any sort. We took firm hold of +him--Sibijaan by his arms and I by his ears--and then I delivered my +ultimatum: + +"You see all these white men, Klaas," I said. "They are thieves. They +have come here to steal all the Ou Baas's (Old Boss's) money. You've +got to ride your best to-day. 'Black Hand Tom' is the best horse. +He'll win if you ride him right. If you lose, Sibijaan and I will kill +you! Won't we, Sibijaan?" + +My fellow conspirator most emphatically agreed. He made motions that +illustrated a neat and expeditious way of cutting Klaas's throat and +of visiting other unpleasant deaths upon him. Klaas was properly +impressed. + +"If I don't win the race I am willing to die!" he said, and with this +understanding we returned to the track. I found my father surrounded +by the Johannesburg gamblers, and squeezed my way into the group to +find much betting going on. With Boer shrewdness, father was demanding +and getting good odds. He took the stand that "Black Hand Tom" had +never been raced and had never won a race, while the horses of the +others were tried campaigners of great reputation. The gamblers +grumbled, but finally gave odds, until father stood to win or lose +thousands of pounds. + +Finally race time came. I suppose there never was such a crowd as +swarmed about that track. It was about three quarters of a mile +around, and the entire circumference was lined with people. The whites +were all grouped about the start and finish line, while all the +remaining space was one deep belt of black men. There were literally +tens of thousands, among them many women. + +The distance of the race was four times around the track. Excitement +was intense when the horses came out on the track. It was a perfect +day, the sky cloudless and the air like diamonds in its sparkling +clearness. "Black Hand Tom" was the last horse out, but the minute he +appeared, with Klaas perched on his back and all decked out in the +O'Neil colors, there was a roar from the crowd. + +I was at the starting-line, Sibijaan at my side, and we were fairly +dancing with excitement. A moment later the horses--nine of them--were +strung out along the line and the starting began. Three attempts were +made, our horse always being the last over the line. This was criminal +in my eyes, and both Sibijaan and I shouted threats of sudden death to +Klaas. + +On the fourth try they were off and the race was on. If I live to be +as old as Queen Labotisibeni, I shall never forget the agony of that +race! Round and round the horses went, first one and then another in +front. At the end of the first lap "Black Hand Tom" was last. We +shouted ourselves hoarse, hurling imprecations at Klaas. At the end of +the second lap our horse was next to last, and then Sibijaan and I +knew exactly how we would despatch Klaas as soon as we could get hold +of him. + +Then came the sensation of the day, of the age! At the first turn of +the third lap "Black Hand Tom" swung wide and began to pass the other +horses. One by one he caught them and went by. Each time he passed one +the crowd fairly roared its head off. As they swept by on the +beginning of the last lap there were only two horses ahead of ours, +and they seemed tiring. At the first turn "Black Hand Tom" passed one +and then, on the back stretch, went by the other! The crowd fairly +split the heavens. A moment later "Black Hand Tom," the greatest horse +in the world, tore over the winning line a good three lengths in the +lead! Absolute pandemonium broke loose. I remember catching hold of +Sibijaan and dancing up and down like a lunatic. Every one seemed to +be doing the same thing. + +We tore through the mob to where our horse stood entirely surrounded +by crazy Boers and as many natives as could get close. There was +father, quiet and self-contained, with his silk hat on his head at the +usual angle. He was as undisturbed as though nothing had happened and +seemed more anxious to get out of the crowd than anything else. From +all sides his friends crowded in on him, shaking his hand and patting +the great horse. Klaas, still in the saddle, wore the air of a +conquering hero, and some enthusiastic Boer had presented him with a +lot of money which he held closely clutched to his thin stomach. + +Father spied me and smiled the ghost of a smile. He reached out his +hand, and when I took it said, "Well, you have won your trip to Buno's +kraal!" This was the first inkling I had that he knew about the bet, +and later I learned that he had agreed to my going because he felt my +faith in him and "Black Hand Tom" deserved the trip. + +That night there was a glorious celebration in Belfast. Great fires +were lighted in the streets and much gin and whiskey was consumed. The +kaffirs danced until the small hours and their chants filled the air. +We boys were part of it all, and Klaas was the hero of the hour. In +fact, so great a hero was he that Sibijaan and I were glad to bask in +his reflected glory. The little beggar fully enjoyed his hour of +triumph and it was well he did, for we soon took him down a few pegs +when we got him back to Rietvlei. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +I leave for my first visit to Swaziland--Mother warns me about Oom +Tuys--Why the Boers paid tribute to King Buno--Queen Labotsibeni, the +brains of Swaziland--Buno's visit to Oom Paul Kruger--Our reception in +Swaziland--Ezulweni, the "Valley of Heaven"--Buno's rifle--Sibijaan +and I explore by night. + + +About a fortnight later Oom Tuys and I left for Swaziland. I shall +always remember getting ready for the trip. For days and days I added +to my little outfit, until by the time Oom Tuys was ready to start I +had accumulated enough dunnage to fill a wagon. When the bluff old man +looked it over he turned to my mother and said, "Well, you are going +to lose your son. Owen is going to spend the rest of his life in +Swaziland; he is taking enough things to last him for the next hundred +years!" + +Then he calmly sorted out my kit, leaving me about one tenth of what I +had intended taking along. + +"We travel light, my boy," he said. "We travel fast and take but one +wagon, and that a little one." + +A day later we were off. Our caravan consisted of Tuys and me on +horses, a light cart drawn by six mules, and half a dozen kaffir +servants. Of course Sibijaan went with us, and was elected to the job +of driving the mules. The other boys were foot-passengers, their job +being to keep the mules moving and do the camp work. + +My mother knew Oom Tuys of old and gave me a serious talking to the +night before we left. + +"My son," she said, putting her arms about me, "you must not follow +Oom Tuys too closely. He is wild and sometimes as bad as King Buno +himself. You will see many things that we Boers would not permit here, +and you must not take these things too much to heart. Remember that +you are an O'Neil, and take good care of yourself!" Then she kissed me +good-by with a fervor that was quite unusual. We Boers are an +unemotional people--that is, on the surface. + +Oom Tuys's periodical visits to King Buno had always been a mystery to +me. I had heard that they concerned some sort of a tribute to the +savage king, but my father never encouraged my requests for details. +"That is Oom Tuys's business," he would say. "Ask him why he is the +servant of Buno!" + +I did, just as soon as we were well on our way. However, I did not use +father's words. Even big men hesitated to take liberties with Tuys, +and I was only a boy. It was a wonderful day, and as we rode across +the veldt into Swaziland Tuys told me the whole story of how he became +known as "The White King of Swaziland." + +"Mzaan Bakoor, for I shall call you that while we are in Swaziland, +just as you shall call me 'Nkoos'," he said, "I go each moon to pay +King Buno the tribute. Oom Paul sends me, and I always take two +thousand gold sovereigns and quantities of gin and champagne." + +This explained the mysterious cases in the wagon, the contents of +which I had not yet dared to ask about. + +"Buno is a very great man," Tuys went on. "He is a great king and has +as many warriors as the blades of veldt grass. His impis are +countless, and just recently he has married Tzaneen, a princess of the +Zulus. + +"Here is how it happened that we Boers must pay him tribute. His +father, Umbandine, built up the Swazi power until he had enough +warriors to be dangerous to us and to all the surrounding tribes. Even +the Zulus feared him. Now Buno, guided and advised by his mother, +Queen Labotisibeni, has kept the Swazi impis up to the greatest +possible fighting strength, and he is the one savage chief we Boers +have to reckon with. He is my friend, and Oom Paul depends upon me to +keep him satisfied and prevent him from making war on our people. +According to the agreement between Oom Paul and Buno, we pay Buno the +gold and gin each month, and I am the one who brings it to him. +Lately, however, he has objected to so much gold and wants more gin. +Buno says he can only look at the gold, but he can drink the gin. This +time I am taking an extra supply of gin." + +Tuys explained to me the politics of Swaziland and seemed to think +that Queen Labotisibeni was the brains behind King Buno's +administration. The wanton cruelties of which Buno was guilty were +contrary to the wishes of his mother, but she only mildly protested +against them, since they helped to maintain the king's authority. +According to Tuys, death was the punishment for all offences, and Buno +often butchered his people for no reason at all. + +A short time before our visit to Swaziland, King Buno had gone to +Pretoria to see Oom Paul. For some time Buno had been sending +complaints and objections about various matters to the President, and +Tuys would carry these to Pretoria. Finally Oom Paul became +exasperated and commanded Tuys to bring Buno to him. + +"Bring Buno here," said Oom Paul, "and I will talk to him like a Dutch +uncle. We pay too much now, and if he does not soon behave himself, I +shall send a commando or two into his country and make a new king in +Swaziland!" + +Buno's visit to Pretoria is a classic in the Transvaal and shows the +kind of man our old President was. Tuys told Buno that Oom Paul was +too ill to come to visit him and that he begged that the king of +Swaziland honor him by coming to Pretoria. It took much persuasion on +the part of Tuys, for Buno thought he was too important a person to +visit Oom Paul. Finally Tuys soothed his royal dignity and they +started out for Pretoria. + +It was a remarkable party. Buno took with him ten thousand of the +picked fighting men of the household troops, and these wore all their +savage finery. Being of the royal impis, they wore the great white +headdresses and carried shields with the king's mark emblazoned +thereon. Their costumes were the last word in savage gorgeousness. +Each man was armed with the knob-kerrie, assegai, knife, and shield. + +At this time the railway from Pretoria to Delagoa Bay was under +construction and had already reached Middleburg. The party found a +special train waiting for them at this place and Buno had his own +private car. None of the Swazis had ever seen a train before and their +astonishment at the great "iron horse," as they immediately called the +engine, was almost pathetic. When they first saw the engine, seemingly +breathing smoke and fire, they were terrified, and Tuys had to +reassure them to prevent a panic. Then a number wanted to prostrate +themselves before the engine and worship it, so that it was a most +difficult thing to prevent their being run over. According to the +various accounts of these incidents Tuys had his hands full. Buno, +however, refused to be much impressed with the engine or train and +complained bitterly because he was not given enough gin. + +It was a wonderful sight when the train pulled out of Middleburg. +Buno, with Tuys and the royal party, was in the private coach behind +the engine, and the ten thousand warriors were packed in a score of +open trucks behind. Naturally they all stood, and it was extraordinary +to see the thousands of savages in full dress, with wonderment and +fear written on their faces, as the train swept by. The trip lasted +all night, and when morning came the train pulled into Pretoria. At +the station a coach and pair of fine horses waited for King Buno and +Tuys. They got in, and then Tuys's natural deviltry asserted itself. +He slyly poked the driver in the ribs with his revolver and commanded +him to drive as fast as he could. A second later they were off at a +gallop. + +[Illustration: THE RESULT OF THE NATIONAL SPORT + +Two bulls have been killed by a warrior armed only with a short +stabbing spear. The bulls are surrounded by a regiment of Swazis with +spears pointing inward. The bulls become infuriated, and when made as +angry as possible, the chosen warrior dashes into the arena and +fights them. He has but one choice--either to kill the bulls or be +killed by the spears of his comrades-in-arms. Sometimes more than two +bulls are used, thus making the sport more exciting and the measure of +the warrior's prowess greater--if he wins. Following the contest, the +bulls are eaten at a great feast] + +[Illustration: INTERIOR OF MILITARY BARRACKS + +A warrior making war decorations. Through a peculiar process, hides +are treated and worked into shape as braid, which they wear cross-wise +around the waist] + +Now the doors of the trucks were not yet opened and the warriors were +gazing in awe at the station, the largest building they had ever seen. +Suddenly the cry was raised that their king was being stolen! They +began throwing themselves out of the trucks, shouting battle-cries and +brandishing their knob-kerries and assegais. There was a wild rush to +catch up with the galloping carriage and more than a score of white +railway employees and officials were killed in the melee. + +Mad with fear that they were losing their king, the whole ten thousand +of them raced down the streets, and Pretoria thought it was being +captured by the savages. Soon, however, they caught up with the +carriage, and shortly after fell into orderly array and marched on to +Oom Paul's house. + +The old President had risen early, as he always did, and was sitting +on the stoop of his simple, flat-roofed home, drinking coffee and +smoking his pipe. The carriage drove up and the warriors fell into +regimental formation as Buno and Tuys got out. As they started for the +little gate the ten thousand men gave the royal salute, their feet +coming down on the roadway with the sound of thunder, their shrill +whistle echoing from the low eaves of the house. + +Oom Paul did not move from his low chair. Pipe in mouth, he looked +beyond Tuys and Buno, just as though they had been ordinary kaffirs. +There was an embarrassing moment--that is, it was embarrassing to the +visitors--and then the old man slowly took his pipe out of his mouth +and spoke. I have never heard what he said, but according to accounts +he made good his threat to talk to Buno "like a Dutch uncle". + +"He gave us the very devil," is the way Tuys tells about it. "Oom Paul +told us both that we were children, and bad children at that! He said +that he was minded to soundly spank us both, and he was so fierce +about it that I thought he was going to do it." + +The outcome of the interview was that King Buno went home a chastened +and contrite monarch and there were no more complaints from Swaziland. +This shows the extraordinary character of Oom Paul and explains why he +was so highly regarded by all, Boers and English alike. + +Trekking with Oom Tuys was a thoroughly delightful adventure. He had +planned the trip into Swaziland so that at night we made camp at some +Boer farm, and everywhere he was received with open arms. Each night +there was a little jollification in which Tuys was the center of +interest. He always pushed me forward, and the simple Boers made much +of me, all of them knowing my father and having the highest regard for +him. Although we traveled fast there was little hardship. It was after +the rains and the whole veldt was a bright green, with the little +thorn trees in bloom. + +We found the Vaal River fordable and the going was easy. Whenever we +were unable to reach a farm-house for meals, we fared well on our own +biltong and rusks. The biltong, so much eaten in the Transvaal, is +dried beef which is usually cut into strips and chunks and eaten +without cooking. Rusks are the biscuits all Boers make, and we ate +well, having enough of both. + +Shortly before reaching the Swaziland border we were met by several +fine looking Swazi warriors. I immediately noted their superiority to +the kaffirs I had known. They were about six feet tall, perfectly +proportioned, and carried themselves with a swinging dignity quite +unusual among the Mapors and other natives. + +Oom Tuys introduced me to them and they met me as man to man, giving +me the same salute they had accorded my uncle. They told Tuys that +their king was waiting for him and that he had planned a celebration +in our honor. + +"You hear that, Mzaan Bakoor?" Tuys asked. "We are going to be royal +guests and you will see the real Swaziland. Watch me and do as I do in +all things, and you shall have much to tell when we get back to +Rietvlei." + +As we came up the wide trail to the border of Swaziland, I saw several +hundred warriors at the top of the hill. As soon as we came close to +them they began to wave their knob-kerries and shields. Down the slope +came the deep bass of their voices as they chanted a welcome, the +sound being suddenly cut off short as they brought their feet down in +the heavy stamp they use when dancing. They were our escort--all +picked men of the household impi--and their leader was a noted warrior +who was an old friend of Tuys. + +After a short halt for this officer to deliver a brief address of +welcome, Tuys ordered our party to proceed. I noted that he treated +the officer with scant courtesy, and he explained this by saying, +"Here I am a king; he is lucky if I even look at him!" + +A little later we dropped into the Valley of Heaven. This is really +the most delightful valley in Swaziland. It is well watered, and +thousands of the natives have their kraals there. Swaziland is a +broken country, alternating between veldt of from two to five, and +even six thousand feet, and there are small rivers everywhere, flowing +from west to east. Each of these rivers has cut out its own valley, +but the Valley of Heaven is the most fertile and beautiful of all. +Trees, sometimes in clumps but more often singly, are found along the +banks of the rivers and each kraal is practically surrounded by big +and little ones. + +Our progress down the Valley of Heaven was practically a parade. At +each kraal or village, a village being a collection of kraals, we +would be greeted by hundreds of warriors and children. The women would +usually remain in the background, but were quite in evidence. Young as +I was, I could not help noting that they were the finest looking +savages I had ever seen. These women have perfectly proportioned +bodies and stand erect, with their heads thrown back. They are the +women of a proud nation, and they show it. I particularly noticed +their splendid shoulders, these and their erect carriage being due to +carrying all burdens on their heads. + +At each village the local chief would offer us tswala, or kaffir beer, +and we were lucky to be important enough to be able to refuse to +drink. If we had taken all that was offered, we would have been +drowned long before the end of the first day in the Valley of Heaven. +The fact that our escort consisted of picked warriors from the royal +troops and that Oom Tuys was known to be the intimate of their king +made it permissible for us to refuse to associate with the little +chiefs along the line of march. + +Camp on the last night before reaching the royal kraal at Zombode was +pitched in the valley, and we saw the sun set over the plateau on +which King Buno made his headquarters. After supper that night Oom +Tuys confided to me a great secret. + +"Buno has asked me a thousand times to bring him a rifle," he said, +"but always I have refused. As you know, the Swazis, like other +kaffirs, are not allowed to have guns. Death is the punishment we deal +out to those who sell rifles to these savages. Now Buno has his heart +set on owning a rifle, and the last time I saw him I promised that I +would get him one. + +"In the cart I have a Mauser with about five thousand cartridges, and +the outfit is for Buno. You will want to come to Swaziland many times +in the future, so I am going to make Buno your friend for life. I am +going to allow you to present the Mauser to him! + +"No one will know how he got it and you will be as big a man in +Swaziland as I am, once you have given the rifle to Buno. Now what do +you think of your Uncle Tuys?" + +Naturally, I was very grateful, since I had already begun to feel the +lure of Swaziland and dearly wanted to be a little king there myself. + +That night was memorable for several reasons. Soon after dark Sibijaan +and I climbed up the trail a little way and looked up the valley. Here +and there we could see fires burning at the various kraals and quite +often the wind brought us the pungent smell of wood-smoke. The sky was +clear as it only is in South Africa and the stars glittered with all +the hard brilliance of diamonds. However, we did not remain long +admiring the beauties of the Valley of Heaven. + +Down below us we suddenly saw what seemed to be a dark cloud of men +coming up the road. Discreetly we hid in the brush along the trail and +watched them go by. They were warriors in full costume, their faces +hard and set in the dim light. There was only the sound of their feet +on the road and their silence was unnerving. The Swazi warrior +chanting and dancing in the sunlight is awesome enough, but when he +becomes a silent swift-moving shadow of the night, he is terrifying. +Particularly is this true when you are only a small boy and know that +the shadow is fully armed and is deplorably careless with his weapons! + +Sibijaan was shaking with terror, and as soon as the shadows passed on +we started back to camp. Neither of us spoke. We didn't need to. We +knew that we wanted Oom Tuys and without a word started for him. + +A moment later we saw another band of warriors coming swiftly up the +trail, so again we hid. As we dived into our little camp a third band +passed. I was very glad to find Oom Tuys smoking by the fire, and for +the first time in my life I realized that a fire is a friendly thing. + +Tuys noted that we had been hurrying and asked the reason. I told him +about the shadows on the trail. + +"It is well that you hid," he said. "It would have been better yet if +you had not been so foolish as to wander about at night. Don't you +know that sudden death is always walking abroad at night in Swaziland? +Have I not told you?" + +Then he explained that practically all Swazis travel at night, +whenever possible, so as to avoid the heat. He said that those we had +met were going to Zombode, as the king had issued a call for his +warriors to attend the celebration in our honor. That night I waked +several times, cold with an unnamed fear, and was comforted by seeing +the massive bulk of Tuys sleeping nearby. His steady breathing seemed +a guarantee of safety and I would drift back to sleep feeling that the +shadows on the trail were far removed from me. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +Sheba's Breasts and the Place of Execution--Zombode and the royal +kraal of Queen Labotsibeni--Common and royal ground--We reach King +Buno's kraal at Lebombo--Gin for the king--Buno, the regal savage--I +present a rifle to the king--Lomwazi takes me to Labotsibeni--The old +queen is worried over Tuys's activities--The shooting match with the +king--Tuys and I manage to miss a few human targets. + + +Next morning we waked to find several hundred more warriors +surrounding our camp. A more important chief was in command, and when +Tuys had made a brief but leisurely toilet, he talked to him. Again +Tuys was given kingly honors, which he accepted with marked +condescension. This chief informed him that King Buno was waiting for +him and had sent greetings to "his white brother." Many dramatic +gestures accompanied this announcement, and I was quite impressed with +the manner of the chief. He was a fine figure of a savage and had a +great number of scars on his forehead, showing that he had killed many +enemies. + +We broke camp shortly after and started on the short climb to the top +of the plateau. With our escort we made a party of about five hundred, +and I felt very proud to be riding with Oom Tuys at the head of so +imposing a procession. + +When we reached the top, Tuys reined in and pointed across the Valley +of Heaven to where two rounded peaks rose about a thousand feet above +the river. + +"You see those?" he asked. "Those mountains are Sheba's Breasts and +are known everywhere in Swaziland. Beyond them is the Place of +Execution. If you look closely, you can see that sharp cliff to their +left." + +The rounded peaks looked exactly like a woman's breasts and were very +striking. There are many tales about them and they are supposed to be +the home of spirits of all kinds. I could see the cliff Tuys spoke of. +It appeared to be a sheer drop of many feet. + +The plateau was much like the high veldt in our country. Except for +the tall grass and a few rocks raising their rugged tops here and +there, it was absolutely barren. These rocks look like little black +islands in a vast rolling sea of dull brown. Back of this are the bare +mountains, rugged and naked in their rocky barrenness. + +We came to a little stream, which appeared to head up in these hills; +then suddenly a great collection of huts seemed to spring up out of +the plain. Hundreds of poles projected above them, and soon we saw a +number of kraals. There were a few patches of trees, their green being +the only relief from the dull brown of the scene. We seemed to come +suddenly on the settlement because its huts and kraals were of the +same color as the grass, which gave them a fine camouflage. + +This was Zombode, formerly the royal kraal of King Umbadine. + +"Queen Labotsibeni, his royal widow, lives there now," Tuys told me. +"All Umbadine's other widows live there, too. I think there are about +twenty of them. When we get close you will find that the big mountain +behind is already throwing its shadow over the place. It will be +cooler then." + +Soon we came to the shadow and it was very pleasant to get out of the +scorching sun. This mountain was a sort of natural fort and protected +Zombode from attacks from the west. East of Zombode was a rolling +grass-covered plain. + +Close to the outlying kraal was a small stream. We did not cross this. + +"That marks the line between the common and royal ground," Tuys +explained. "We will follow it and push on to Lebombo, Buno's kraal. If +we wished to call on Labotsibeni, we would wait here until we received +permission to cross this water. Then we would camp on the royal ground +and she would send for us." + +By this time I could see scores of Swazis running out of their kraals +to inspect us. A chief, accompanied by a score or so of warriors, came +to meet us. We kept on, and he caught up to us by running. Tuys paid +no attention to him and advised me to do the same. One of our servants +told him that "The White King" was going to visit his brother, King +Buno, and I looked back to see the chief and his men watching us as we +went on. + +About three or four miles farther on, over the same barren brown +country, we came to another stream. This is about midway between +Zombode and Lebombo. Lebombo came out of the ground exactly like +Zombode and was situated in exactly the same way at the foot of a high +mountain, facing the East. It was simply another Zombode. + +"That's where Buno lives," said Tuys. "The big kraal in the center is +his, and all the little ones belong to his indunas. Each of the +indunas has a number of wives and is the leader of an impi of about a +thousand men. King Buno has twenty-six wives and I don't know how many +children." + +As we went on I could see the people coming out to meet us, the small +boys running swiftly and shouting as they ran. Here also there was a +little stream separating the common from the royal ground. By the time +we reached this dividing line several indunas had come to meet us, and +we forded the water and pitched camp on the royal ground. + +Tuys went to the wagon and soon appeared with a quart of gin. This he +gave to the most imposing of the chiefs, who seemed to be a sort of +special representative of the king. + +"Tell the great king that his white brother comes with presents and +the tribute," he said. "Tell him that our king, Oom Paul, sends +greetings and prays that his health is good and that he will live +forever!" + +"Nkoos, it shall be done!" the induna answered, saluting with his +shield and knob-kerrie. + +Then he retired swiftly to the royal kraal. + +Less than ten minutes later he came back and said, "The great King +Buno, ruler of Swaziland and leader of countless warriors, bids you +approach!" + +Oom Tuys stepped into our tent and called me inside. He gave me the +rifle and handed Sibijaan a heavy bag of cartridges. Then he loaded a +dozen of our escort with more cartridges and bottles of gin. Thus +loaded down, we set out to call on the most powerful and savage king +in South Africa. + +After passing the triple walls of the kraal we found King Buno +standing in front of the royal palace, or rather, hut. He shook hands +warmly with Tuys, who handed him the gold. I noted how easily Buno +handled it. He was a strong man. While he talked with Oom Tuys I had +an opportunity to look him over. + +King Buno was well over six feet and must have weighed at least two +hundred and thirty or forty pounds. He was very deep chested and had a +body like an ox. His legs were well shaped and very muscular. Of +course he was too fat, but this was explained by the fact that the +Swazis consider corpulence a sign of aristocracy and are proud to +"carry weight." + +Without doubt, Buno was the most powerful savage I had ever seen. He +was every inch a king, and he knew it. While I was admiring him he +suddenly turned and looked at me. His eyes were the cruelest I have +ever looked into, and it came over me with a rush that he must be +quite as black as he was painted. I was only a boy, but I could feel +the cruel brutality of this savage the minute he looked at me. + +Tuys motioned me to come forward. + +"O King, this is Mzaan Bakoor, my nephew, who has come all the way +from Rietvlei to bring you the rifle you desire!" Such was his +introduction. + +Buno shook hands with a grip like a vise and took the Mauser from me. +He seemed to gloat over the weapon for a moment, and then spoke: + +"The king thanks you, Mzaan Bakoor, little white chief," he said, and +his voice was deep and melodious. "You are the near relation of my +friend; you shall be the friend of the king. All my subjects shall be +your slaves!" + +Then he fondled the rifle a moment, throwing it to his shoulder and +going through the motions of shooting. + +"It is a good rifle," he said, using the native term of "mroer," "and +to-day we shall try it. Already I know how to shoot, and this +afternoon we shall have a shooting match. I shall show you how the +king can shoot!" + +There was a little more conversation about the rifle and Buno was much +pleased at the quantity of cartridges we had brought. He was as +delighted with the Mauser as a child with a new toy. Later that day I +found myself regretting that the weapon was not a toy. + +At length Buno said something to Tuys that I did not hear. The latter +turned to me and said, "I have some business to transact with the +king. You go back to our camp and wait for me." + +I would have given much to know what this business was. Tuys and Buno +had been in some queer deals together and I felt that they were +planning another. Both were reckless and lawless, and, backed by the +thousands of Buno's impis, they were able to do anything they had a +mind to, at least in Swaziland. + +Tuys and Buno dropped to their knees and crawled into the royal hut, +and I returned to our camp. Sibijaan was as curious as I was and made +an attempt to pass in the rear of the king's hut with the intention of +hearing something. He did not get far and came back with speed, for he +had run into a six-foot Swazi warrior with an evil eye who appeared to +be on guard. + +Boylike, I was hungry when we reached camp and was glad to see that we +were to have fresh-killed beef for dinner. I was munching a rusk when +Sibijaan hopped into the tent, his eyes flashing with excitement. + +"O Mzaan Bakoor, there is an induna asking for you!" he said. "He says +he comes from Queen Labotsibeni and must see you!" + +Outside I found a young chief who looked very much like Buno. He had +the same great body and hard eyes and carried himself with the same +"swank" affected by the king. + +"Mzaan Bakoor, little white induna," he said in the same rumbling +melodious bass so common among the Swazis, "I am Lomwazi, brother of +the king and son of Queen Labotsibeni. My mother would see you and has +asked that I beg you to visit her. She waits for you!" + +Realizing that it was not fitting that an O'Neil should run at the +command of a kaffir queen, I told Lomwazi that I would go when "the +shadow of that tree strikes the tent." I estimated this would be in +about half an hour, and I was right. Lomwazi, great induna that he +was, squatted outside the tent until I was ready. He evidently +expected that I might offer him gin or some present, but I decided it +would be poor policy to do so, since I intended giving gin to +Labotsibeni. + +As soon as Sibijaan told me that the time was up I went out and found +Lomwazi with an escort of half a dozen warriors waiting for me. Sure +that Buno's friendship would protect us, I followed Lomwazi without +hesitation. As we went along I noticed the deference paid us and +realized that Lomwazi must be a power in the land. + +We found Queen Labotsibeni in a nearby kraal, which she used when +visiting Lebombo. It was a sort of guest kraal placed at her disposal +by King Buno. There were huts sufficient for all her retinue, among +which were some of the other widows, whom she ruled with a heavy hand. + +Labotsibeni was very stout and tall, even when sitting down, as she +was when I first saw her. She had an intelligent face, with the same +eyes, though not so cruel, as Buno and Lomwazi. Her beautifully shaped +hands were much in evidence, and I don't recall having ever seen +cleaner or better manicured fingers. Like the other women in +Swaziland, she was practically naked, except for a covering draped +from the waist. Her hair was piled high on the top of her head and was +bound so that it looked like a melon. When she spoke I noted that her +teeth were perfect. This, of course, is the rule in Swaziland, since +these people take care of their teeth from earliest childhood. They +never finish eating without carefully rubbing their teeth with charcoal +or some fine sand. If the Swazis have no fixed religious observances, +they certainly are religious in the care of their teeth. + +Labotsibeni had not lost her sight this first time I saw her, and she +looked me over for a full minute before speaking. Then she motioned to +me to be seated and addressed me: + +"Nkoos, little white induna," she said, "you come to Pungwane (the +native name for Swaziland) as the friend of our great white leader. +Oom Tuys is the trusted friend of my son, the king, and you shall be +trusted likewise. Our friend always brings presents; thus do we know +that his heart is true to us!" + +I accepted the hint and produced the quart bottle of gin I had brought +for her. She grasped it greedily, and the interview was interrupted +until she had gulped down what I estimated to be nearly a pint. Her +capacity for gin was extraordinary, I learned later, although all the +Swazis will drink alcoholic liquors without restraint. They have +absolutely no sense with gin or whiskey, and only stop guzzling when +the supply runs out or they are completely paralyzed. + +After taking her drink, Labotsibeni wiped her lips on a leaf--one of a +pile she had at her side--and then spoke: + +"Oom Tuys comes to pay the tribute," she observed, "but my son and he +have other plans they will carry out. You are close to the great white +man. What are these plans?" + +I then realized what she was after. Of course I knew nothing about +what new deviltry Buno and Tuys were hatching, but I realized that it +would not do for me to appear to be on the outside. I would lose +prestige. + +"Oom Tuys and the king plan great things for the people of Swaziland," +I solemnly assured her. "It is not for me to say what they will do. +When we have left Swaziland the king will tell you everything. Until +then I must remain silent." + +This cryptic statement did not seem to satisfy the old queen and she +several times reverted to her question in our subsequent conversation. +Lomwazi was also present at the interview, but only spoke to agree +with his mother. Behind her in the shadow of the hut sat several of +her maids. They watched their mistress keenly and hastened to assist +her when she rose as a signal that the interview was over. + +The impression Labotsibeni gave me was that she was very cunning and +intelligent. I could readily understand the common belief that she was +the "brains behind the throne" in Swaziland. + +Tuys was waiting for me at our camp and was much interested to learn +that I had been to see the queen mother. He was amused to hear that +she was anxious to know what business he and Buno were planning. + +"So she is worried, eh?" he observed. "Well, that's good for her! She +has kept Buno tied to her apron-strings too long, and I suspect she is +playing into the hands of the Britishers. We must keep Buno as a +friend of our people. If we don't, we shall find the English behind +the Swazis in the next war." + +After dinner, during which Tuys told me more stories about Buno and +his cruelty, we attended the shooting match. I don't suppose there was +ever another like it. It was a most terrible exhibition of savage +beastiality and ought to have been called the "murder match," instead +of a shooting contest. + +When we arrived at Buno's kraal we found him walking excitedly up and +down, the rifle in his hands. Standing near him were a score or more +of his indunas, and we were struck at once by their look of +apprehension. Lined up on either side of the wide roadway leading to +the royal kraal were thousands of warriors. More than a dozen impis +were in line, every man in his full war costume. Their knob-kerries +were held at the ready, their shields across their bodies, and each +had shifted his assegai to the position used in battle. + +The lines of savage warriors stretched away from the kraal for +hundreds of yards. It was the first time I had ever seen the impis of +the king on parade and it was a most impressive sight. There was a +slight breeze and the white plumes on their heads danced in the +sunlight. What struck me most was the splendid build and stature of +these men. They were all six feet or more and their black skins fairly +shone. Most of them wore leopard-skins caught about the waist and on +one shoulder. + +My rapid inspection was broken by the king. He greeted us +vociferously, and I immediately saw that he was on fire with the gin +he had drunk. No sooner did he raise his hand in salutation than the +impis gave the royal salute. Their deep shout ended with the crash of +twenty thousand feet brought down together. The earth fairly shook. + +I realize now that this salute was a tribute to the cruelty of the +ages. In just such a manner did the gladiators salute Nero with their +"Morituri te salutamus!" A few moments after the salute I realized +that these men were also about to die. + +"Come on, Oom Tuys, come and let the king see how well you can shoot!" +Buno shouted. "I have provided the only targets worthy of your +skill--you who are noted for your shooting among a race of white men +who have conquered all with their rifles! I will shoot first, and then +you shall beat me!" + +Then he turned suddenly to me. + +"And you, too, Mzaan Bakoor, little induna! You, too, shall shoot +against the king! First I will shoot, then Oom Tuys, and then you. +Each will shoot this many shots," and he held out four clips of five +cartridges each. + +[Illustration: PRINCESSES AND THEIR MAID TAKING A MORNING BATH] + +[Illustration: YOUNG PRINCESSES AMIABLY ENGAGED IN HAIR-DRESSING + +These are of exceptionally high birth and of remarkable beauty. Either +would probably be worth fifty head of cattle and could only be bought +for that number. Women are the standard of currency among the Swazis, +the average low-caste woman, if young and sound in limb, being worth +five head of cattle. The price of women increases according to their +birth and beauty] + +[Illustration: SWAZI GIRLS + +This picture shows the large navel which is common to most women, +particularly to those of aristocratic birth] + +[Illustration: PUDANA, FAVORITE TO THE OLD QUEEN LABOTSIBENI + +He is a charming little fellow and the most privileged personality in +all Swaziland, being the only male allowed to attend all interviews +and conferences] + +The indunas gathered about and I could see the horror in their faces. +They knew what was coming, but even then I did not suspect. Tuys +looked startled and gazed at Buno as though he could not understand. +Down the lines the plumed heads still nodded and after a moment there +was silence. + +The savage king slipped a clip into his Mauser, the metallic click +intensified by the silence. He raised the rifle, sighting down first +one line of warriors and then the other. The next instant a shot rang +out and a plumed Swazi pitched forward and lay writhing in the +sunlight. As Buno threw another cartridge into place, two warriors +stepped out and stabbed the fallen warrior. + +Four more shots rang out, and at each a plumed head came down, with +shield and assegai crashing as they struck the ground. Each warrior +was stabbed as he lay, the killers quietly stepping back into the ranks. + +It was the most ghastly spectacle I had ever attended. We Boers have +always had to fight for our lives and farms, so that sudden death was +no novelty to me. But such a slaughter as this! + +Buno completed his twenty shots and made three misses. These angered +him and he shouted out the equivalent of "I'll get you next time!" + +Then came Tuys's turn. He had been thinking rapidly and I had a faint +hope that he would find some way out. + +"O King, it is not fitting that your warriors should die by my rifle," +he said hurriedly. "You are king and their lives are yours; I am but +your guest and it is not right that brave men should be killed by one +who loves only peace. Let us shoot at other targets. Let us kill +cattle so that there may be a feast to-night." + +Buno's face darkened. His bloodshot eyes flashed and for a second I +thought he would strike Tuys. + +"The king commands! Buno, king of the Swazis, commands!" he shouted in +a hoarse voice. "Shoot! Shoot and kill more than I did, if you can!" + +I was holding Tuys's rifle and he came over to where I was standing. I +was so sick with it all that I hardly heard him when he spoke to me +hurriedly in Dutch. + +"We must go through with it," he whispered. "Kill as few as you can. +Shoot them in the head and they'll die quickly!" + +A second later Tuys raised his rifle. Each shot that hit meant death; +there was no need of stabbing when he shot. Buno taunted him at each +shot, and in spite of being the best shot in the Transvaal Tuys was +able to miss as many as possible without arousing the suspicions of +the bloody king. + +When he had finished my turn came. I could hardly hold the heavy +rifle. Buno fairly abused me, for he was raging by this time. One +taunt I well remember. + +"O Mzaan Bakoor, you of the great ears!" he shouted, his voice now a +hoarse growl. "Show the king that you can shoot as well as you hear. +Oom Tuys cannot shoot. You beat him!" + +So unsteady was I that I could not have held the rifle firmly if I had +wanted to. I shot, and never were twenty shot so many. My score was +much worse than Tuys's, but the memory of that murder match will never +die! + +Buno was jubilant over his victory. He seemed to think that he had +shamed the white men before his people and his indunas also gloried in +his victory. I think they were rather glad that they had not been +asked to serve as targets. + +I thought we were done with killing for the time being and wanted to +return to camp and rest. I was suffering from shock and felt that I +must lie down. But this was not the end. Buno was not yet satisfied. +He challenged Tuys to shoot at running targets! Tuys tried to talk him +out of the idea and suggested that they had better go and get some +gin. But Buno would not be put off. + +He led the way to a point a short distance from the kraal, where there +were clumps of bushes and long grass. Warriors were made to dodge in +and out of these bushes while their king potted them. This required +much better shooting, and the men turned and twisted in and out of the +brush like mad things. Buno found that he could not kill enough to +satisfy his brutish desire and soon tired of the "sport." Tuys, +however, had to take his turn, and he was able to miss even more +frequently than before. Sick as I felt, I was rather amused at Tuys +missing these poor savages. I have often seen him stop an antelope in +full flight, and we have a saying that "only a bullet travels faster +than a springbok." + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +Tuys orders me to remain in camp during the celebration--I visit the +royal kraal--Feasting, dancing, and combats to the death--Butchery of +young women--Buno and Tuys wrestle for gold--How Tuys became rich--A +"legal execution" in Swaziland--The unfaithful wife expiates her +sin--How Tuys shoots--Father gathers information by mental suggestion. + + +I finally returned to our camp much upset by the orgy of slaughter and +sorry that I had forced Tuys to take me with him on this trip. He +remained with Buno until time for supper and then came into camp to +eat. I noticed that, although he was ordinarily a big eater, Tuys had +little appetite that night. However, he drank quite heavily and left +soon after dusk with a number of bottles of gin. As he went he advised +me to remain in camp. + +"You are not used to this country, lad," he said, roughly but kindly. +"To-night there will be a big celebration and much drunkenness. When +the king is drinking he is likely to be careless and things may happen +that you would not like to remember. You stay in camp and I'll be back +before long." + +I promised Tuys to do as he asked, in spite of the fact that I was +very curious to see what might take place. As night came on hundreds +of fires were lighted and I could hear the Swazis beginning to sing. +Every now and then shouts reached us, and there seemed to be every +indication that it would be a wild night. Curiosity impelled me to +send Sibijaan out on a scouting expedition. He was also eaten up with +curiosity, but wanted me to come along. However, I still remembered my +promise to Tuys and would not go. + +After a little Sibijaan returned, his eyes wide with excitement. + +"Thousands and thousands of warriors are at the royal kraal," he +announced. "There are great fires everywhere and every one is drinking +tswala. The warriors are dancing and the king's fire is the biggest of +all. The witch-doctors are there, too, and are going to make magic +to-night!" + +I was intensely interested in all this. It seemed a shame that I was +going to miss it. On second thoughts I decided that I was foolish to +have made the long trek into Zombode if I did not see the whole +celebration. I wanted to be able to tell those at home all about it, +so I decided to sneak out of camp and watch a while. + +Playing at war had taught me to hide as much as possible, and soon I +slipped out of the tent and started for the royal kraal. There seemed +to be thousands of natives all about me, each band gathered around a +fire. They were dancing and singing and eating, particularly eating. +The Swazi always eats whenever possible, and a number of cattle had +been slaughtered to provide a feast in honor of Oom Tuys. + +I crept closer to the royal kraal and soon could see the glow from the +king's fire. It was surrounded by hundreds of huts and many kraals, +but I managed to get close enough to see the flames. A dense mass of +warriors were on three sides of the fire, and on the other I could +discern Buno and Tuys. All the warriors were dancing and chanting, and +it was an awe-inspiring sight. In a little while the dancing stopped +and two warriors sprang before the king and began to fight. I was +close enough to see their actions and hear the blows when knob-kerrie +struck shield with a hollow thump. + +The fight was short. One suddenly fell, struck down with a cunning +blow from his opponent's knob-kerrie, and a second later I saw the +winner stab the prostrate figure again and again with his assegai. A +moment later another pair fought, and this battle ended as did the +other with the death of the loser. There were several more fights, +each ending fatally. At each victory wild shouts would go up from the +bloodthirsty audience. For a small boy it was a thrilling show. + +After the last combat there was a pause. Soon the murmuring of the +expectant thousands died down and I felt that they were waiting for +more excitement. A moment later a number of girls, all naked, were led +out from behind the royal hut. They were lined up in front of Buno and +Tuys, and I could see the witch-doctor talking to the king. This +lasted a few minutes and then the former began to dance, doing what +might be called the "Dance of Death." + +Suddenly he halted, then dived at one of the girls and threw her +roughly to her knees. The others fell back hurriedly and several +warriors caught hold of the girl and stretched her on the ground. +Another man joined the group and the girl began to shriek, her voice +seeming to echo from hut to hut. It was a shriek of utter despair, and +I could feel myself tremble. + +The man stood high above the girl and raised his right hand above his +head. I could see the flash of steel, for he held a great curved +knife. A moment he stood thus, the girl shrieking all the while. The +crowd seemed to catch its breath and I felt as though I should choke. +Down flashed the knife, and the victim shrieked louder and more +shrilly than ever. It was enough! I turned and fled blindly. I don't +know how I got there, but I blundered into camp shaking like a leaf +and threw myself on my blankets. + +Next morning Tuys told me, quite casually, that Buno had entertained +him by having some girls cut open while they still lived. I then knew +that I had not been dreaming. Despite Tuys's advice, I had seen +something I "would not like to remember." Tuys told me of other things +that happened at the celebration, and I am thankful I did not see +them. They cannot be told, but for utter cruelty, cruelty of the most +depraved and bestial kind, they are without equal. + +That day only the women were about until nearly noon. The king and his +warriors were sleeping off the debauch of the night before. Shortly +after midday Tuys took me with him to the royal kraal, where we found +Buno showing little evil effects of the orgy. I noticed that Tuys wore +his great leather hunting-coat with wide pockets, and I was surprised +at this because it was a warm day. However, I soon learned the reason. + +[Illustration: AN ACTUAL COMBAT IN WHICH THE MAN ON THE LEFT WAS SLAIN + +In war the Swazis fight after a method all their own. The opposing +impis, or regiments, draw up on either side of the battlefield and +after much dancing, yelling of battle-cries, and other excitement, +individual warriors dash into the middle-ground challenging individual +opponents from the other side. These meet and fight it out to the +death. The combats are divided into three phases. The first consists +of fighting with the long knob-kerrie; the second, with the short +knob-kerrie; and the final, which is the death blow, with the short +spear] + +[Illustration: A TYPE OF DRESS WORN BY THE ROYAL EXECUTIONER] + +[Illustration: LOMWAZI, SON AND PRIME MINISTER TO THE OLD QUEEN + +He acted as Regent to the Swazi nation] + +Buno was very agreeable and even joked with me about my poor shooting +of the day before. He little knew how proud I was that I had shot +badly. Tuys and he were on the best of terms and joked with one +another, each boasting of his strength. Finally Buno ended the +pleasantries with a challenge. + +"Let us go to the rock, Oom Tuys," he said, "and we'll soon see who is +the strongest man in Swaziland. This time I know I can throw you, and +you will make small profit out of this trip." + +"That remains to be seen, O King," Tuys warned him. "I feel stronger +than ever to-day, but it seems to me that you are quite shaky. Don't +you think you'd better wait a day or two before tackling me?" + +"No, no! Now is the time!" declared Buno most emphatically. "If you +cannot wrestle any better than you shot yesterday, I shall have little +trouble in throwing you." + +This was all very interesting to me. I felt that I would like to be +big enough to wrestle Buno and break his neck. However, he and Tuys +seemed to be very joyful over the coming match and there was no ill +feeling between them. + +After Tuys and Buno had had several drinks, we all started out for the +rock. I had heard of this rock before. It was a great flat-topped slab +on which Buno was accustomed to sleep during the hottest hours of the +day. The Swazis call it "The King's Couch," and Buno would bask on it +while the sun blazed down on his naked body with all the fire of +mid-summer. + +Tuys had several of his servants with him, each one carrying a small +but very heavy canvas sack. I asked him what these were, but he told +me to wait and I would see. The rock was about a quarter of a mile +from the royal kraal, and we soon reached it. + +Then came the unexpected, which invariably happened where Tuys was +concerned. We climbed upon the rock and while Buno and the rest of us +looked on, Oom Tuys slit the canvas sacks and poured two thousand +sovereigns on the rock! + +The gold made quite a large pile and shone brightly in the warm sun. +Tuys counted it, with Buno seeming to keep careful check on him. +Finally the count was finished and they agreed that it was all +there--two thousand glittering gold pieces! + +"Now we shall wrestle for it," said Buno, pointing to the gold. "We'll +soon see who is the better man, who is the strongest man in Swaziland. +Come on, Oom Tuys!" + +Tuys waved to me to get off the rock, and we jumped down to the +ground. It was, perhaps, the strangest sight I had yet seen. There +stood those two great men, waiting for an opportunity to get a +favorable grip. Presently they began to circle round and round, each +trying to catch hold of the other. The pile of gold lay between them. + +Suddenly Buno rushed at Tuys. Tuys stepped to one side and jostled him +as he went by. Without changing position, Tuys reached down and +grabbed up two handfuls of gold. He was shoving it into the pockets of +his leather coat when Buno was upon him. Buno forced him back and +grabbed up some of the gold, which he shoved into his loin-cloth. + +They were very strong men and the wrestling was the roughest +imaginable. Each time one gained an advantage he would grab for the +gold. I soon saw that Tuys was getting the better of it. His pockets +were sagging with gold, while Buno, being practically naked, had no +place to store what he was able to seize. The contest finally ended +with both flat on the rock, locked in each other's arms. They tussled +for a time and, as neither could gain the advantage, decided to quit. +Both were exhausted and hardly able to get to their feet. However, +they were the best of friends, although Tuys had most of the gold. + +Then I understood the saying among the Boers that Tuys would soon be a +rich man if Oom Paul continued to send him with the monthly payments +to King Buno. + +There was only a small celebration that night, although Tuys spent the +evening with the king and much gin was drunk. Tuys returned early to +camp and told me that we would visit the Place of Execution the next +day and then return to Rietvlei. I went to sleep full of anticipation. + +We broke camp early next morning. I had expected that we would +accompany Buno to the cliff beyond Sheba's Breasts, but Tuys told me +that the king and his impi had left during the night. All Swazis walk +whenever they travel, keeping up a steady pace that covers much +ground. When we started for the Place of Execution, Buno and his +warriors were at least fifteen or twenty miles ahead of us. + +Tuys gave orders that our party should camp in the Valley of Heaven +while he and I pushed on and caught up with the king. It was nearly +noon before we saw them climbing the slopes of Sheba's Breasts. There +seemed to be several thousand in the king's party. In a little while, +by hard riding, we caught up with them. There were two full impis, in +their midst a number of naked savages without arms or headdresses. I +asked Tuys about these men. + +"They are prisoners," he informed me. "We are going to see them die. +That is why we are climbing these infernal hills. Beyond Sheba's +Breasts we have another mountain to climb and then we shall reach the +Place of Execution. Let's hurry and catch Buno!" + +We found the king at the head of his impis, accompanied by several of +the indunas, striding along over ground that gave even our horses +trouble. He greeted Tuys affectionately as usual and had a pleasant +word for me. + +Tuys asked him why the prisoners were going to be executed. + +"They have had their trial," he said, "and they are all guilty. They +must die! I have said it!" + +That seemed to settle the matter, and I asked Tuys about the trial and +how it had taken place. From his long and intimate acquaintance with +Swaziland and its customs he was able to tell me all I needed to know. + +"Every moon there is a court at Zombode," he informed me. "The indunas +are the jury and decide whether the prisoner is guilty or not. +Prisoners are brought before them charged with stealing, non-payment +of debts, disloyalty to the king, and countless other things, +including witchcraft. When the indunas have heard a case they bring in +a verdict of guilty or innocent, and then the king passes sentence. My +friend, Buno, always decides that death is the proper punishment, and +allows the person bringing the charge to take the possessions of the +prisoner after he has had first pick. Many of those who will be +executed to-day would only receive a whipping if they were in our +country, instead of Swaziland. But Buno has no sympathy with +law-breakers and I think he rather enjoys the executions." + +After passing Sheba's Breasts we went down a steep trail to a little +valley, and then climbed the sharp ascent to the Place of Execution. +From the Breasts to the top of the cliff is almost a two-hour trek. On +the top is a small plateau. From this to the bottom is a sheer drop of +more than five hundred feet. At the bottom is a short slope of broken +rock. + +The impis were drawn up in column facing the edge, with Buno and his +indunas in front. We had left our horses at the top of the trail and +now joined the king's party. After pacing up and down for a few +moments Buno turned and addressed his warriors. He told them that the +prisoners had forfeited their lives on account of their wickedness and +it was only just that they should die. He ended in this fashion: + +"But the king is merciful. These jackals ought to be killed by +torture. Instead, I, Buno the King, have decreed that they shall die +after the time-honored custom of our people!" + +While he spoke I watched the prisoners. There were about forty of +them, and every one held his head high, as though not afraid to die. +Each bore himself proudly, more like a victor than one about to die a +fearful death. + +When Buno had finished there was a slight stir among them and one was +left standing alone. With his eyes straight in front of him, his body +erect, he walked swiftly forward. In a second he had reached the edge. +Throwing up his arms, he leaped forward and was gone! + +One after another the others followed. There was no hesitation, no +drawing back. It was terrible, yet glorious! These savages, with no +promise of a here-after which included a Valhalla or Heaven, went to +their death like heroes. + +When the last one had gone the silent tension was broken by the +rustling of shields and shuffling of feet. The king then felt impelled +to make another address. He had got as far as, "Thus do I, the king, +destroy the enemies of my people--" when there came a violent +commotion and a woman's cry. + +Through the warriors dashed a young and handsome woman. She wore +nothing, and in that brief moment I could see from the lines in her +face that she had suffered much. + +Tuys and the king leaped forward to intercept her, but were too late. +She threw up her hands with a shriek and went over the edge! + +Tuys and I were much excited by this, but Buno and his indunas seemed +to be rather annoyed. Buno explained that women had done this before +and seemed to regard their action as a desecration of the Place of +Execution. After many questions Tuys found out all about it and +explained to me. + +"This was new to me," he said, as we climbed down from the cliff, "and +I thought I knew all there was to know about the Swazis. But I never +before heard about women throwing themselves off the Place of Execution. + +"Mzaan Bakoor, this is how it is. You know the Swazis are very strict +with their women. If a wife, no matter if she be one of thirty or +forty wives, has anything to do with any man but her husband, her life +is forfeited. Also the child, if there be one, must die. If there is +no child, she dies alone. It is the husband's right to kill the +unfaithful wife. If he does so, no one has anything to say and he is +not held for murder. But he can do worse than kill his wife. He can +refuse to kill her, and then she becomes an outcast and the prey of +any one. She may even be killed by her people, for there have been +cases where Swazi women have killed an unfaithful wife when the +husband refused to slay her. + +"Always, if she can escape, the woman will take to the hills. There +her condition is as bad as it can be. She has to live on berries and +what game she can catch, and her life is miserable. She is an outcast, +and men who are caught going to her in the hills share her degradation. + +"This woman who died to-day was the youngest wife of a little chief +who refused to kill her when he found that she was faithless. She +escaped to the hills some weeks ago and lived the life of a hunted +beast. Finally she must have made up her mind to end it all. It is +fortunate for her that she had not been taught by the missionaries +that she had a soul!" + +That is the moral code of Swaziland. In all the years I have known the +Swazis I have never heard of its being broken without the death +penalty. However, civilization will some day reach into Swaziland and +then this code will disappear. That will be the end of the Swazis. + +We reached camp to find the long shadows of the setting sun dropping +across the Valley of Heaven. Buno bade Tuys an affectionate farewell +and the impis gave us the royal salute as they started up the hill for +Lebombo. + +This was the first time I saw King Buno, and he left me memories that +nothing can ever efface. I saw him again next year and was in Lebombo +when he died and Queen Labotsibeni was appointed regent. + +Nothing much happened on our return journey to the Valley of Reeds, +except that Oom Tuys showed me how he could shoot. During the second +day's trek we ran up on the high veldt for a space and jumped some +springbok. They sprang up suddenly out of the brown grass, as they +always do, and went off like a streak of light. + +After one or two had escaped, Tuys told me to kill the next. + +"Let's see if you can shoot like a Boer," he said, bantering me. +"Let's see if you would starve to death if you were lost on the veldt!" + +A few moments later I had my chance. My Mauser rested across my saddle +when the antelope jumped, and a second later I blazed away. I made +three perfectly clean misses. Looking back, I realize that the heavy +military rifle was too much for me--it was too weighty. + +Tuys said: "Poor Mzaan Bakoor, you will die hungry. Now watch me get +the next!" + +And he did. His rifle was in its sheath, barrel under his leg and +stock alongside the pommel of the saddle. I never saw quicker action. +The unlucky springbok seemed to rise with the motion of Tuys's arm as +he snapped his Mauser out of its case to his shoulder, all in one +motion. On its fourth or fifth jump the antelope met the dum-dum +bullet and dropped. Its back was broken and the knife did the rest. + +"That is the way a Boer shoots!" Tuys boasted. "If you miss your meat, +you go hungry. Your rifle must follow the springbok when he jumps, and +you get him at the top of his leap. He cannot change direction in the +air and you pull your trigger softly so that your aim is not broken. +If you jerk, as you did a minute ago, you miss. Remember that, lad!" + +As we rode into Rietvlei on the last day Tuys gave me a serious +talking to. He was worried over what I had seen at Lebombo. + +"You know that we have seen some things at Buno's kraal that must not +be told," he cautioned me. "The British, and even our own people, +would be much excited if they heard that you had given a rifle to +Buno. They would hold you and me accountable for the men he killed in +the shooting match. Also, they would ask many questions about the +women who were killed that night I made you stay in camp. They would +think that the gin we gave Buno made him do these things, and we would +have much trouble. + +"You must not know anything about these things. When you tell about +your trip, you must only tell things that will not make trouble. If +you don't, I will never take you with me again. What's more, I'll tell +Buno, and he will kill you if you ever go to Swaziland again! + +"Slim Gert will ask you questions, and your mother, too. If any of +your brothers are at home, they will want to know about your trip. Now +remember, you must only tell the things that are safe to tell." + +He also advised me to threaten Sibijaan with everything under the sun +if he talked too much. His own servants he was not afraid of--they had +been with him before and knew what would happen to them if they +talked. I told Sibijaan what to expect if he talked, and he promised +to tell nothing. He kept his promise about as well as might have been +expected of a kaffir. + +Mother and father were at home when we reached Rietvlei, and were very +glad to see me back. I was glad to again look out on the peaceful +green fields of our wonderful farm, but keenly disappointed that I +dared not give a true account of our adventures. It was some story for +a small boy to have to bottle up! + +After supper my father sent for me, and I went to his office in the +wing of the house which he used for administrative work. I had my +doubts about the interview that I knew was about to take place, +because my father has a way of getting the truth when he wants it. He +is not known as "Slim Gert" for nothing. + +On the top of his desk lay a sjambok, or rawhide whip. It caught my +eye and he saw me look at it. + +"Now, son, tell me about your trip," he said. "What did you see? What +happened? Yesterday a Swazi came here and said that Buno had made a +celebration for Tuys and you." As he asked the question his keen eyes +searched my soul. + +I was in an awful pickle. If I told the truth, Tuys would be my enemy +for life. If I lied to my father, he would never forgive me and I'd +hate myself forever! The cruel whip did not enter into my +calculations, because my father never struck us. It could not concern +me. + +I hesitated for a moment only and then sacrificed my further chances +of going with Oom Tuys to Swaziland. I told the truth. Father listened +and seemed to be checking up what I said. He asked one or two +questions which refreshed my memory, and I told him everything. + +"Thank you for so accurate an account, son," he said, when I had +finished. "I wanted to be sure that what I had heard was so. Sibijaan +was here a little while ago and--" He picked up the whip and tossed it +into a drawer. + +Next day I saw Sibijaan. I asked him why he had told father about the +killings at Lebombo. + +"Ou Baas holds the sjambok in his hand when he talks to me," he said +quite simply. "He knew lots about Lebombo already. I'd sooner be +killed by Oom Tuys some day than by your father now. I could not lie +to Ou Baas." + +Neither could I, but nevertheless I upbraided Sibijaan for breaking +the promise he had made to me that he would not tell about our trip. +In fact, I consoled myself for losing my further chances of visiting +Swaziland with Oom Tuys by giving Sibijaan a good beating. + +He could fight, but was not as strong as I, and the thrashing made no +difference in our friendship. Of course the fight took place in +private; it would never have done to let our impi know that we had +fallen out for even a moment. + +Later I found out that father had received some pointed enquiries from +the government in regard to Oom Tuys's activities in Swaziland. He +wanted to know first hand, if possible, what the "White King of +Swaziland" really did when he made his periodical trips to Buno's +kraal. The information, however, was only for his own benefit, since +he would not betray one of our people. + +A month later Oom Tuys stopped at Rietvlei as usual before making his +regular trip to Lebombo. That night I was with father when he sat +talking with him. I feared that father would ask questions about our +trip, but he approached the subject in quite another way. + +"I have heard from various kaffirs that your last trip to Swaziland +was a bad business," he said to Tuys. "The government also has asked +me about it. Of course I know nothing, since you have told me +nothing," and he eyed Tuys keenly. + +"They say it was a bad business?" Tuys remarked in a blustering way. +"Well, they don't know what they're talking about! Buno was only happy +to receive the tribute and he may have taken a little too much gin. +That's about all there was to it. Who the devil are those busybodies +who don't mind their own business?" + +Then he looked at me, but I met him eye to eye. I had expected the +encounter and was ready for him. Father, however, realizing the +situation, began talking again. + +"Kaffirs will lie," he said, "and there have been a number of Swazis +here during the last month. Of course I don't believe them, but some +of the officials who have to create work to hold their jobs have been +asking questions." + +"Tell them to go to Swaziland and find out," said Tuys, laughing +heartily. "They daren't go. If they did, they'd never come back. Buno +would answer them, and they wouldn't worry about making any +long-winded reports when he had done with them!" + +Tuys knew that he was the only white man who dared enter Swaziland +then. He also knew that the stories told by kaffirs did not carry much +weight and would never be accepted for action by the government. + +"It would be well, Tuys," father said at the end of the talk, "if you +would induce Buno not to make so much noise when he gives his next +party in your honor. His hospitality is too bloody to be healthy for +either you or him." + +Tuys did not question me about the matter when he saw me alone next +morning. He evidently refused to entertain the thought that I might +have betrayed him. If I had not met his eye the night before, however, +he would have been sure I was guilty. He did not comment on the +matter, and I know now that, in his daredevil way, he did not lose any +sleep over it. In those days, too, it must be remembered that it did +not cause much stir when a native chief killed a few of his followers. +It was much more serious if he killed the men of another chief, since +this might mean war and wars were always disturbing. + +Tuys had nothing to say on his return from Swaziland, but it must have +been a successful trip for I saw him hand my father a heavy canvas +sack to put in his safe until morning. He must have done well in the +royal wrestling match. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +I visit Swaziland again--Buno's illness--An appeal from the king--The +race against death--Umzulek meets us--The dying king--Buno makes Tuys +guardian of his people--The last royal salute of the impis--The +death-dealing puff-adder--Buno dies like a true savage king--Tzaneen, +the royal widow, suspects murder--The queens meet--Tuys escapes the +funeral sacrifice. + + +It was about a year later that I made my second trip into Swaziland. +Father was away in Pretoria on business when Tuys arrived at Rietvlei. +Very recently we had heard a rumor that Buno was ill, and I was very +keen to go with Tuys on this trip. I felt sure that my father would +not allow me to, but I knew that my mother could be persuaded to let +me go. I therefore asked Tuys to take me. + +"I am almost a man now, Oom Tuys," I said, standing as erect as I +could, "and I want to go with you on your visit to Lebombo. They say +that Buno is sick, but that ought not to make any difference, ought it?" + +"Yes, Owen, it makes all the difference in the world," he answered. +"You know what the custom is; if Buno dies, his ten nearest friends +will be sacrificed. I am regarded as his friend and they will want me +to die. Much as I would appreciate the honor, I don't want to die just +yet. If they killed me, they would kill you, too. Do you want to die?" + +I frankly confessed that I did not. This explanation of the situation +placed a very different light on it and I was curious to know what +Tuys intended to do. He told me he would wait a day or two before +making up his mind, and I had hopes that some way would be found out +of the difficulty. + +Now Buno knew that Oom Tuys would be at Rietvlei about this time. He +nearly always was, as he seldom started his trip from any other place. + +Just at sunset, two days later, one of our Mapors ran in and reported +that a small impi of Swazis was coming down the valley. + +"I'll wager that is a message from Buno," Tuys said, and we went +indoors to await their arrival. It would not have done for us to be +caught waiting for them. In a little while, when dusk was falling over +the valley, we heard many feet come to a stop on the smooth roadway. +Sibijaan ran in to say that the impi had arrived, and while he spoke +we heard the cries and the thud of feet that marked the royal salute. + +Tuys sent one of his bodyguard out to see what was wanted. + +"It is a great induna from King Buno," the man reported a moment +later. "He says he comes bearing a royal message to his white brother." + +"Tell him that 'The White King' of his country will see him in a +little while," Tuys ordered. + +It was almost dark before Tuys decided the "great induna" had waited +long enough to humble his pride. Then he went out; and, of course, I +followed him. No sooner was he framed in the light of the doorway than +the royal salute was repeated. He walked slowly to the gate. There was +the chief patiently waiting for him, his men drawn up behind him, like +so many shapes of darkness barely visible in the night. + +"Nkoos, White King of Swaziland," the induna began, "I am the +messenger of King Buno. He sends a message to you." + +Then he stopped, awaiting permission to go on. + +"Speak!" ordered Tuys. + +"Buno, our king, is sick unto death," the chief said, with dramatic +gestures, "He desires that his white brother come to him. By me he +sends word that your life is safe and that he must see you before he +dies!" + +Tuys knew that Buno's word was the word of a king and could be relied +upon. He waited only a moment, therefore, and then said tersely: + +"I will come. To-morrow's sun will see us on our way." With that he +made the gesture of dismissal. The impi again gave the royal salute +and a second later had departed, swallowed up by the night. + +"Get ready, lad," Tuys directed as soon as we entered the house. "At +sunrise to-morrow we start. We travel fast and light, for I must reach +Lebombo before Buno dies!" + +I was overjoyed, but immediately my joy was tempered by the thought +that my mother would have to know and might object. Tuys, however, +settled that question for me. He went to her and told her that he +would be responsible for my return safe and sound. Tuys always had a +way with him, and my mother sent for me to tell me that I had her +permission to go. + +"However, you must obey Oom Tuys better this time," she warned me. "I +know that you were disobedient on the trip last year and ran the risk +of being killed. You may go only if you promise me that you will obey +Tuys." + +Naturally, I promised. I would have done more than that if it had been +necessary, for I was wild to accompany Tuys this time. With Buno +possibly dying there would be wonderful things to see, I felt sure. I +was not disappointed, as it turned out. + +At dawn the next morning we were on our way. We had about the same +equipment as before, except that I rode a bigger and faster horse and +four speedy mules were harnessed to our light wagon, instead of six. +Sibijaan drove the mules and swung his sjambok without mercy. For once +he was not called down for beating the mules. + +As Tuys predicted, we traveled fast. The induna and his impi had left +Rietvlei during the night and started back toward Lebombo. We caught +up with them during the afternoon. They were hitting a smart pace, +with the induna in the lead. His plumes appeared to mark the cadence +of their steps and they must have been making better than six miles an +hour. + +"Is the way prepared for us?" Tuys asked the chief. "Does the king +expect me? Are his men waiting for me?" + +"Nkoos, the king waits!" the induna replied most impressively. "He +bade me to tell you to hurry. The king dies, and must see you before +he goes to the caves." + +This seemed to satisfy Oom Tuys, so that he sent home the spurs and we +all broke into a new burst of speed. The road was rough, and I would +look back now and then to see Sibijaan swaying to and fro as he jerked +up the mules and cut them with his sjambok. Tuys's boys, or servants, +with the exception of his bodyguard, ran beside the wagon, holding to +it to help them over the ground. + +Tuys seemed possessed with the idea that Buno was really dying, and +our trip became a race with death. It was very exciting. Down through +the Valley of Heaven we ran, past kraals from which the Swazis tumbled +out to gaze in wonder at us. Several indunas, knowing that Tuys was +due on his monthly trip, tried to halt us to offer tswala or food, but +Tuys would throw them a word and press on. This was on our second +day's trek. On the first night we had stopped shortly before midnight, +and then only to give our horses and mules some much needed rest. + +By the end of the second day both animals and men were pretty well +exhausted, so we camped a little earlier. We were up at dawn, and Tuys +estimated that we would reach Lebombo by noon. During that last +night's camp a small band of witch-doctors stopped to talk to Tuys. It +seemed that they had received word that Buno was dying and were going +to Lebombo to be in at his death, so to speak. + +"Vultures! Carrion-eaters! That's what they are," Tuys remarked to me +with disgust. "They are going to Lebombo so that they will be there to +bury the king, if he dies. I wish Buno would fool them!" + +As before, we passed Queen Labotsibeni's kraal at Zombode. This time +there were only women and children there. All the indunas and warriors +had gone on to Lebombo. Tuys asked a curious woman how this was. + +"Yesterday, O Nkoos, the command came from the king that all warriors +should go to Lebombo," she explained. "None but messengers remain, and +these are now going on to tell that you are near." While she spoke we +saw a small band of warriors swiftly running up the trail ahead. In a +moment they had passed the turn of the road and were gone. In the +brief glimpse I had of them I saw that they wore the broad white band +that denotes a "king's messenger" in Swaziland. + +We pushed on. Tired as our animals were, we made good time, though not +good enough to catch up with the messengers. + +As our party came round the bend into sight of Lebombo, we found three +indunas and more than a thousand warriors of the king's own impis +waiting for us. They were lined up on either side of the road and gave +us the royal salute as we passed between them. We did not halt, and +these splendid warriors formed behind us and trotted along as our +escort. It was a wonderful sight. Their nodding plumes and bizarre +shields, with here and there the flash of sunlight from an assegai, +made a stirring picture. + +While yet some distance away I could see that there was an army +gathered about the royal kraal. There seemed to be tens of thousands +of warriors, all more or less in formation. When we came closer, a +number of indunas ran forward to meet us and Umzulek, a brother of +Buno, led us to the king. On each side of the roadway where the +infamous shooting match had taken place the year before were solid +lines of warriors, three and even four deep. As we passed up the line, +impi after impi gave the royal salute. + +Except for the exclamations of the warriors and the stamp of their +feet, there was a strange silence. There seemed to be an air of +foreboding, as though all were waiting for something they dreaded. + +We dismounted at the king's hut. Tuys motioned me to come with him, +and we stooped and went in. For a moment we could see nothing in the +dim light. My first impression was that the hut was filled with people +and was stifling hot. + +Then I saw the king stretched out on some mats, with his head propped +up on a small block of wood. He was very changed. His great body was +gaunt, his face haggard, and his eyes shone with the fire of fever. + +Buno gazed fixedly at Tuys for a moment and then weakly raised his +hands in salute. + +"Welcome, Nkoos, white brother of the king," he said in a thin old +voice. "Welcome, white king of my people! I knew you would come. You +are a true friend!" + +Even in the dim light I could see that Tuys was moved. He fumbled his +great beard and finally began to speak. + +"Come closer, Nkoos," came the royal command. "Send my indunas away. I +would speak with you alone." + +Tuys motioned to the indunas to go, and they filed out. Then Buno saw +me: + +"Welcome, little induna," he said, his voice seeming even fainter. +"Welcome, Mzaan Bakoor! You are my friend, too. You must remain with +Oom Tuys and me, for I have a request to make that you shall inherit +from him when he is gone." + +Tuys and I sat close to Buno, and then I saw how little life was left +in his once powerful body. + +"Gin! Give me gin," Buno pleaded. "I must have strength to talk. Give +me gin!" + +Tuys poured out a large drink of the fiery liquid and the king choked +it down. He gasped for a moment, and then went on in a stronger voice. + +"Nkoos, my white brother," Buno said. "You are not of our people and +therefore cannot die with me. You cannot have the joy and honor of +joining the king in death. For I know now that I am dying. Perhaps I +shall not live to see another sunrise." + +I felt that he was right. One so weak and emaciated could not live +long. Undoubtedly Buno was dying. + +"But you can serve my people when I am dead," he continued, "by +continuing to be their true friend, just as you have been mine. I +would have you make a paper which would tell all the world that you +are the guardian of the people of Swaziland. When you die you can make +Mzaan Bakoor the guardian. He will be a man then and will care for my +poor people. Swaziland has many enemies--the Boers, the English, the +Zulus, and others. All desire our land. You can prevent them from +taking it. Will you be their guardian when I am gone?" + +Tuys met the feverish eyes of the dying monarch and then his deep +voice rumbled. I remember noting how different it was from that of Buno. + +"O King, you have spoken!" he answered. "Your word is my command. So +long as I live I shall guard your people and shall protect them from +their enemies!" + +"It is well, Nkoos," Buno said, his voice scarce above a whisper. Then +he closed his eyes for a moment and rested. In a little while he asked +for more gin, and then asked Tuys to call the indunas. They filed it +and stood on each side of the recumbent king. There were ten or twelve +of them, all the greatest chiefs in Swaziland. Umzulek, I remember, +stood at Buno's feet. + +After a brief silence Buno spoke. + +"Indunas, I am dying," he said, his voice again quite clear. "Soon I +shall leave you, never to return. I go to the caves from which none +come back. Until now I have feared to die. I feared that enemies might +bring evil days to Swaziland. Now, however, I go in peace. Oom Tuys, +my friend, has promised to be the friend and guardian of our country +when I am no longer here. He shall protect Swaziland from the whites +and Zulus so long as he lives, and when he is gone, Mzaan Bakoor, who +will be a man then and powerful, will act in his place. O indunas, you +must look to my white brother for help when Swaziland needs it. This +is my command!" + +Then he stopped. When Buno said "This is my command!" his illness +seemed to drop away from him and he became the great king again. The +indunas raised their hands in token of acceptance of Buno's command +and then all together said, "The king's word is law!" + +For some reason or other I glanced at Umzulek. He made the same motion +as the others, but there was an intangible suggestion of revolt in his +acceptance. I had a sudden feeling that he would make trouble after +Buno was gone. + +"Once again I shall see my impis," said Buno, his voice again +weakening. "Each day may be the last, but each day my warriors must +salute their king once more!" + +Next came an extraordinary exhibition. All but four of the indunas +went out. Those remaining lifted Buno up--and I noted that they did it +with ease--and half-carried, half-dragged him through the low opening +of the hut to the clean air outside. There they laid him on a couch, +facing the thousands of warriors. + +The whole affair seemed rehearsed. No sooner was the king settled, his +eyes sweeping the serried ranks of the impis, than an imposing induna +stepped out and led them in the royal salute. Three times they gave +it, with the sound of thunder in the mountains, and at each crash I +could see a faint smile soften Buno's harsh features. He had lived a +king and like a king would die! + +Then followed a sort of march past. It seemed to me that untold +thousands of these great warriors went by, each raising his arms above +his head in salute as he passed. Before long Buno became faint again, +and Tuys gave him a little more gin. How he was able to stick out this +review was beyond me. I could not see where he got the strength. + +Down in my heart I had a fear that something would go wrong and that +Buno would show his savagery by having some poor warrior killed, +partly to satisfy his blood-craving and partly to impress us. However, +luck was with us. No one blundered, and when the impis had passed by +they re-formed along the roadway and gave the triple royal salute. +That was the end, and the indunas carried Buno back to his hut. He +told Tuys that he wanted to sleep and would send for him when he +awaked. This was our dismissal, and we went to our wagon, which was at +the usual place. + +I was very hungry and was glad to find that Tuys's servants had +prepared food. Tuys was eating and remarking on the condition of the +king when suddenly an induna came running in to us. He did not wait +for any of the usual formalities, but dashed right up to where we sat +on the ground, chewing our rusks and biltong. + +"Come quick, come quick, Nkoos!" he gasped. "The king is dying! A +puff-adder has bitten him. Come quick! He calls you!" + +We dropped our food and followed the chief at a run. In a few seconds +we threw ourselves into Buno's hut. A number of indunas were about +him, all very excited. He was breathing heavily, his eyes fixed on the +smoke-hole in the roof. + +Tuys stood by his head and said, "I am here, O King!" This he repeated +three or four times, the last time in a fair shout, before Buno looked +at him. For a moment the king licked his lips and made as though to +speak. Finally the words came: + +"I am going now, Nkoos! I am as good as dead!" he cried, his voice +shrill in its weakness. "The snake has done what the fever failed to +do--the snake has given me release!" + +Then he shook as though with a violent chill. His hands opened and +shut convulsively and his head rolled from side to side. After a +moment he became still and began speaking again. I could see that his +body had begun to swell; he looked bloated. + +"It is the end!" he croaked. "I die! I die!... The king dies! But the +king will die like a man! The king will die on his feet, like a +warrior!" + +With superhuman strength he heaved himself up and sat bolt upright. +Tuys and several of the indunas sprang to his aid, and in a moment +they had him on his feet. His legs seemed perfectly stiff. + +"Let go! Let go!" he cried. "I am a man and will meet death face to +face!" + +They took their hands off him, and he stood swaying back and forth, +his mouth working as he tried to speak. The light from the smoke-hole +struck him on the head and deepened the lines of his face, throwing +heavy shadows under the eyes and chin. These shadows intensified the +cruelty of his face, and I felt a cold shudder. Buno dying was even +more terrible than Buno killing! + +He must have stood for a moment only, but it seemed an age to me. His +rolling eyes passed from chief to chief and his shaking right hand +tore an assegai from the nearest. Then the end! + +Raising himself on his toes, his body straight and head thrown back, +he threw both hands up and brought the spear down with a vicious +stabbing motion. + +"Soukbulala! Soukbulala!" he shouted, and pitched forward dead. Tuys, +I remember, almost caught him as he fell. Later I learned that his +last cry was the war-shout of the Swazis. It means "I'll kill you!" + +"He died as he lived," Tuys said to me in Dutch out of the corner of +his mouth, while he leaned down and turned Buno over. Then he assisted +the indunas in laying him out with his head on the block and a +wonderful fur robe over his wasted body. + +When this was completed the indunas stepped back and gave their dead +king the royal salute. A moment later one of them stepped out of the +hut and raised his deep voice in a solemn shout. + +"Nkoos ou pelela! E' Buno impela e baba amaswazi ou pelela guti!" he +cried. This he repeated over and over until it became a sort of chant. +It was the announcement of Buno's death and, translated, was about as +follows, "The king is dead! Buno the Great, the father of his people, +is dead!" + +We got out of the hut as soon as we could, and found the natives +running from all directions. Soon there was a great mob. They were +quiet, but each seemed apprehensive. Their voices rose in a subdued +murmur. As I watched, it occurred to me that I did not see Umzulek +anywhere. It seemed queer that the king's brother should not be there. + +Then came cries of "The queen! The queen! Tzaneen! Tzaneen!" and I +could see the crowd split, leaving a wide passageway. Down the alley +came a score of splendid warriors, in their midst the finest looking +woman I had yet seen. She walked with head erect and steady tread, +exactly as a queen should carry herself. + +"It's Tzaneen, the queen," Tuys said, catching me by the arm. "She is +the queen, and her unborn child will be the ruler of Swaziland. Watch +closely now." + +She stopped short in front of us and saluted Tuys. She was about six +feet tall and was a most imposing figure. + +"Nkoos, is it true that Buno is dead?" she asked in a level voice. + +"Nkosikaas, the king is dead," Tuys replied. "His body lies within. A +snake killed him." + +"How did the snake come to his kraal?" Tzaneen asked, eyeing Tuys +keenly. "Did that snake come on two feet?" + +This was a new idea. It had not occurred to me to question the manner +in which the snake had reached the hut. With all the warriors about, +even though they may have been taking their midday sleep, it seemed +very peculiar that the puff-adder should have been able to reach Buno +without being seen and killed. Again I found myself asking for Umzulek. + +"I cannot tell how the snake came to the king," Tuys said, in answer +to Tzaneen's questions. "I was at my camp when word was brought that +Buno was dying." + +Tzaneen then stooped and entered the hut, followed by several other +women whom I took to be her personal attendants or maids. We remained +outside. It was not fitting that white men should see the Zulu +princess, queen of Swaziland, with her dead king. + +No sooner had she entered the hut than the voices of the crowd rose in +expectancy. I looked around to see another party coming up the rapidly +formed passageway. There were more warriors in this party than the +other, and again I could see a woman at the head of several others. As +she passed, the people saluted. They had not done so before, and this +struck me as queer. + +When the party came closer I could see that it was Queen Labotsibeni, +the mother of the dead king. At her right hand was the missing +Umzulek. She seemed much agitated, but he strode along quite cheerfully. + +Tuys stepped forward to meet the old queen. There was the usual +salutation, and she asked, "My son, the king, is dead?" + +"Yes, Nkosikaas, it is so," Tuys assured her. + +They stood silent for a moment, and then quite suddenly Queen Tzaneen +joined the group. I had been watching Labotsibeni so intently that I +did not see her come out of the hut. + +The two queens stood looking at one another, each waiting for the +other to salute. Umzulek, behind the old queen, was watching Tzaneen, +and I had a feeling that something was about to happen. I could see +that Tuys was interested and saw him shift his feet, his right hand +carelessly resting on the butt of his revolver. He, too, was watching +Umzulek. Finally Tzaneen spoke. + +"Queen Mother," she said, addressing Labotsibeni, "Our king is dead! +You have lost your son and I my husband, the father of my unborn +child, who is to be king of Swaziland." + +"What if your child be a woman?" snapped back the old queen, who had +evidently been thinking along practical lines. "Who is to rule +Swaziland until your child is born?" + +"I am the queen!" said Tzaneen, drawing herself up until she looked it +and gazing fixedly at the old queen. + +Labotsibeni met her eyes without flinching, and then without another +word pushed by her and entered the hut where her son's body lay. +Tzaneen, calling her people to her, strode through the crowd. As she +went, they gave her the royal salute. It looked as though the people +were acknowledging her as their ruler. + +Tuys and I stood back during the brief exchange between the queens. It +was none of our business, of course, but he was keenly interested and +did not miss a word. We decided that we were not wanted at the royal +kraal about this time and went back to our camp. The day was dying, +anyway, and Tuys said he thought it would be dangerous to be abroad +that night. + +"When the fires are lighted to-night," Tuys told me as soon as we +reached camp, "the witch-doctors will kill the ten indunas chosen to +die with the king. We shall not go and see this. When the council +chose these men, I was to be the first man killed, because I was a +friend of Buno. Umzulek was one of his council and I don't trust him. +Buno ordered that I was not to be killed because I was white, but +accidents happen in Swaziland, as you know, and I don't care to take +any chances." + +This seemed good sense to me. Now that Buno, our protector, was dead, +I had begun to worry about our safety. The fact that Buno had +appointed Tuys as "guardian" of his people might not carry as much +weight as he thought. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +The royal funeral--The "thunder of the shields"--Not afraid to +die--The witch-doctor's bloody work--What Labotsibeni wanted--The +burial of the indunas--Rain-making and the "rain stone"--Buno's burial +in the caves--Witch-doctors prevent our entering the caves--Labotsibeni +sends for gin. + + +We had not been in camp more than a few minutes when an induna came to +see Tuys. He said he came from Queen Labotsibeni and that she wanted +him to go and see her. Tuys did not like the idea. + +"Tell Queen Labotsibeni that I am here," he said. "If she wants to see +me, let her come to me here!" + +As the fires were beginning to glow in the dusk, the old queen came. +She was accompanied by only two or three warriors and several women. +Tuys gave her a bottle of gin, and she took a very large drink before +they started talking. Like all the Swazis, she was inordinately fond +of spirits. + +I sat close to Tuys, feeling sure that I would hear something +interesting. Labotsibeni did not want to talk while I was there and +suggested that I go and see the sacrifice. She said she would send her +warriors with me and thus I could see the ten indunas killed. This did +not appeal strongly to me, but Tuys seemed to think I ought not to +miss it. + +"Mzaan Bakoor, you won't get another chance soon to see a Swazi king's +burial ceremonies," he said. "You had better go." Then he added in +Dutch, "Don't be afraid, boy. You are perfectly safe with her men. No +one dare touch them." + +So I reluctantly went. It was dark by this time, and it seemed as +though all Swaziland was going to attend the sacrifice. We soon found +ourselves in a great crowd, every one armed and in full war costume. +There were no women, these being left behind to mind the fires. + +The two warriors who acted as my escort were great grim-faced savages, +both of them a head taller than me. They must have been well over six +feet, and I had to almost trot to keep up with them. Both were +indunas, and from what they said I gathered that a brother of one of +them was to be killed at the sacrifice. Both spoke of his impending +death as though it were a great honor. It was not until the actual +ceremony that I was sure whose brother it was. + +The fire in front of Buno's hut was a great blaze. It lighted up the +scores of huts nearby and revealed thousands of warriors drawn up in +rows, more than twenty deep, about it. By using Queen Labotsibeni's +name, my escort forced our way through until we stood on the very edge +of the fire. All about me I could hear the deep-throated voices of the +warriors. + +For fully fifteen minutes nothing happened, except that those behind +seemed to press closer. Then suddenly a number of men dashed into the +open space, each bearing a huge bundle of faggots. They waited, +bundles on head, and an expectant hush succeeded the hum of voices. +The only sound was the crackle of the fire. + +From where we stood we could see the entrance to Buno's hut, standing +out like a black spot in the illumination. While we watched a strange +figure came out. He was wearing furs and feathers and wore a hideous +mask. It was the head witch-doctor! Behind him came six or seven +lesser witch-doctors bearing the body of the king. They straightened +up, and a second later lifted their burden above their heads. At this +the head witch-doctor threw up his hands and the entire multitude of +warriors gave the triple royal salute. The earth fairly trembled when +their feet came down. Then the faggot-men threw their loads into the +fire and the flames leaped a score of feet into the air. The king's +body was placed on the mats in front of his hut, the witch-doctors +forming a guard on either side. This was the beginning of the real +ceremony. Led by the chief witch-doctor, the dancing began. + +Now the Swaziland idea of dancing consists of leaps into the air and +incessant stamping of the feet. Soon thousands were dancing and the +dust became a haze before the bright flames of the fire. I was +probably the only person within sight of Buno's body who was not +dancing. My two bodyguards were leaping wildly, and I noted that they +were most earnest in their exercise. + +The dance must have lasted five minutes. It was brought to a sudden +stop by the chief witch-doctor, who threw up his arms and called a +halt. In just as short a time as they had gone dance mad, the entire +assemblage quieted down. The stirring ceased and I could feel the air +of dread expectancy that showed the end of the drama was in sight. + +[Illustration: QUEEN TZANEEN, MOTHER OF THE CROWN PRINCE + +She is wearing a silk wrap presented to her by Dr. O'Neil. Note the +hair, which is worked up into this peculiar shape upon marriage] + +[Illustration: QUEEN TZANEEN WITH SOME ZULU PRINCESSES + +They had arrived to present themselves in marriage to the prince. They +are cousins of the queen, as she is a Zulu by birth] + +[Illustration: UMZULEK, A RESOURCEFUL AND INFLUENTIAL EXILE + +He is living in a territory set aside for him. On his right is Prince +Bilakzi, who is soliciting his assistance for Sebuza in obtaining his +throne] + +The witch-doctor gave some sort of a command, and from behind Buno's +hut came ten of the most splendid savages I have ever seen. They were +all indunas and wore the full costume of their rank. On their heads +were great plumes and each carried his shield, knob-kerrie, and +assegai. With steady tramp they passed by their dead king and lined +up, facing his body, in front of the fire. + +No sooner were they in place than they gave the royal salute. Then +they did something I had not seen before. With steady rythmic strokes +they beat on their great shields with their knob-kerries. This lasted +for only a moment, but it was like the throbbing of a heart--the heart +of Swaziland, it seemed to me. + +When the hollow roar died, the chief witch-doctor stepped out and made +an oration. We could not hear him very plainly. However, I caught a +few phrases. + +"Indunas, great heroes of Swaziland," he shouted, illustrating his +words with extravagant gestures and contortions, "You have been chosen +of all our people to die with our king. There is not one present who +does not envy you! Tens of thousands are here, and all covet the honor +that is yours. + +"Buno, our great king, the saviour of Swaziland, has gone! Great +indunas, you would not want to live without your peerless leader--life +would mean nothing!" + +There was a lot more, but I did not get it. The oration must have +lasted a good half hour, the condemned men standing like statues all +the while. I did not understand the last remarks of the witch-doctor, +but the instant he stopped the royal salute, repeated once, crashed out. + +Then the first of the ten indunas stepped out. He raised his shield +and knob-kerrie above his head and saluted the dead king. Immediately +came the "thunder of the shields." Every warrior in the entire crowd +began striking his shield with his knob-kerrie. There was no staccato +to the blows--rather a rubbing, pulling stroke that brought each blow +out with repeated vibrations. In a few moments a cadence was set up +and the strokes came all together at equal intervals. The effect was +terrific; the air seemed to pulsate with the vibrations and it seemed +to catch me right in the pit of the stomach. + +The steady drumming slowly rose in a crescendo, and then the induna +turned from the king's body and with one far-flung motion threw his +shield and arms into the fire. Next he turned, threw his head back, +and faced the body. Slowly and firmly he stepped forward until he +stood beside his dead king. + +The chief witch-doctor stood a pace or two from him, his right hand +holding a great curved knife which gleamed and shimmered in the bright +light of the fire. There was a tense moment, made doubly painful by +the steady roar of the beaten shields. I was fascinated. I knew what +was coming and dreaded to see it. Yet I found myself powerless to look +away; my eyes were riveted on that murderous knife! + +Slowly the witch-doctor raised the knife above his head. Then one step +forward, a lightning thrust, and the induna came down like a falling +tree! He did not stir; there was no convulsive death struggle. The +doctor was an efficient butcher. + +Each of the others went to his death in exactly the same way. There +was no flinching, no hesitation; open-eyed and unafraid these savages +went like stoics to their death. The witch-doctor did not bungle; each +stroke brought death and there was no need for the services of his +assistants who stood ready with stabbing spears. + +The next to the last man to die was the brother of the fiercest of my +two bodyguards. This was evident from the new energy with which my man +beat his shield. If I had not noticed this, his remark after the knife +went home would have enlightened me. + +"A man! A brave man! A warrior!" he said to his companion in a hoarse, +dust-choked voice. "My brother is a brave induna. He is a true son of +my mother!" + +When the last man was sacrificed, the witch-doctor made another +speech. It was about what heroes the ten indunas had been and what a +great king they had lost. One sentence I remember. + +"So long as warriors are willing to die for Swaziland," he shouted, +"our country is safe! So long as our best face death without fear, we +need not fear the Zulus, Boers, or British. The white men fear death. +They can never stand against our impis if our warriors are led by such +men as those who died to-night!" + +The thought came to me that it was rather foolish to kill indunas, +leaders of warriors, in this fashion, but it was the ancient custom +and their brave death made for heroism among those who lived. Each +kraal to which one of the sacrificed indunas belonged gloried in his +death and it became a tradition for the younger warriors to live up to. + +The doctor ceased speaking after a little and the crowd began to move +away. The king's body was taken back to his hut and the fire allowed +to burn low. When we left, which we did as soon as we could, the chief +witch-doctor was marching up and down outside the hut and accompanying +his steps with a sort of chant. + +My most distinct memory of the sacrifice is the sensation I suffered +when the drumming of the shields reached its height. I shall never +forget this. Every time I hear the bass drum stroked, bringing out all +its bass vibrations, memory jerks me back to the unerring slash of the +sacrificial knife at Buno's kraal in Lebombo. I know that for months +afterward I used to hear those shields in that brief moment between +wakefulness and sleep. + +Labotsibeni had gone when I reached camp. Oom Tuys was pacing up and +down, smoking his great pipe and waiting for me. He gave me a hug when +I reached the firelight and seemed quite relieved at seeing me. + +"I was worried, you were so long," he said. "Buno's death means +trouble in Swaziland, and I was afraid you might have been captured as +a hostage or even killed. Tell me, what did you see?" + +Then I told him all about the sacrifice. I found myself strangely +tired and lay down while I talked. Tuys listened without interruption +until I had finished. Then he asked, "Are you sure there were ten +indunas sacrificed?" + +I told him I was sure, because I had mechanically counted them when +they stood before the fire. + +"Then I am safe," he replied. "If ten have been killed, there will be +no more. Ten is the royal number, and there must not be one more or +less. Good!" + +Then he told me about Queen Labotsibeni's visit. It seems she had +called on "The White King of Swaziland" for his help in a matter of +importance to the state. Buno's death had left the throne vacant. +Queen Tzaneen could not reign because she was not a native-born Swazi. +Her child, if a man, could not become king until he became of age. +Hence the throne was vacant, and Labotsibeni wanted Tuys to use his +influence to have her recognized as queen by the British and Boers. + +"The old lady is right," he said. "She is the only one able to rule +Swaziland. Every one knows that she practically ruled as the royal +queen of King Umbandine and during Buno's reign she was always the +power behind the throne. Most of the time she was not very far behind, +either! + +"She is very keen. She demanded that I pay the tribute to her in place +of Buno! I told her that she could have the gin, but that I could not +give her the gold without permission from Oom Paul. She didn't like +that very much, but I was able to make her see that I was right. +To-morrow I shall take her the gin and she'll have to be satisfied +with that. + +"I shall recommend that Labotsibeni be appointed regent until the +right king is found. Umzulek, I hear, thinks that he ought to succeed +Buno, and there is talk that he will take the throne by force. I shall +have to prevent that." + +Exhausted as I was, I found sleep difficult that night. For some time +I lay there listening to Tuys's regular breathing and afraid that he +might snore, as he did sometimes. If he had, I know I could not have +stood it--each deep note would have started the shields drumming again. + +We were up at dawn next morning and never did that first cup of coffee +taste so good. Buno was to be buried that day and I hoped to see a +ceremony. Before we had breakfasted a score of Labotsibeni's warriors, +led by a lesser induna, arrived as our escort for the day. They +brought word that Buno would be "taken to the caves when the shadows +were least," or at noon. The indunas who had been sacrificed, however, +were being buried during the morning. So we decided to attend the +funerals. + +I was much disappointed. There were no ceremonials. In fact, the most +exciting thing that happened was that one of the junior witch-doctors +was bitten by a snake and speedily died. The indunas were buried in a +tangled patch of brush and tall grass, with a few trees breaking its +monotony. This was set apart for indunas only, the plain people being +buried anywhere they happened to die. All the important chiefs of +Swaziland had been buried there ever since the days of King Umbandine, +yet the place was absolutely unkempt and full of snakes. + +When we arrived at Buno's kraal, the bodies of the indunas were laid +out in a row. Near each stood witch-doctors and warriors. Not far away +were a number of women and children. These were the wives of the dead +men. + +As we came up an order was given and the warriors lifted up the +bodies. Each band of pall-bearers was led by a witch-doctor, while the +widows and children of each induna fell in behind. There was no +wailing or mourning--the women seemed as stoical as their departed +husbands had been when they faced the knife on the night before. + +All the women had their heads shaved as a sign that their husbands +were dead. This is their custom. From her earliest girlhood the Swazi +woman trains her hair to grow in a sort of cone or pyramid. When her +husband dies the hair is shaved right up to this mound, leaving much +of the head bare. The daughters of these widows had their heads +entirely shaved. This also is the custom, so it is quite possible to +tell for whom the Swazi women mourn and also how recent is their loss. + +Tuys and I followed the procession to the burial ground--"The Place of +Indunas," they call it--and saw the simple ceremonies. These only +consisted of placing the body in a shallow hole, scratching the dirt +over it, and then piling rocks on top. + +Beside each grave was placed a pot of corn-meal and some uncooked +meat, so that the induna might have food if he should come back. This +was the only suggestion of future life. The Swazi is a very primitive +savage; he has no hell or heaven and, under normal circumstances, no +god. Their only supernatural belief is in a sort of evil spirit or +devil. This devil, however, is under the control of the ruler and +usually is most active in sending or holding back the rain so +necessary to the scanty crops grown by the Swazis. + +In connection with this devil it is important to know that Queen +Labotsibeni was the "rain-maker" of Swaziland. This gave her great +power, since the natives fully believed in her supernatural powers. +How she gained this control over the devil is an interesting chapter +in Swazi history. + +In the old days the Zulu chiefs possessed this rain-making gift, which +was supposed to be vested in a small round stone called the "rain +stone." When Ama-Swazi led the rebellion against the Zulus and broke +away from them, he captured this stone and took it with him. Much of +his ascendancy was based on its possession. + +Umbandine, his son, inherited the stone, and Queen Labotsibeni +promptly annexed it on his death. King Buno never owned it, and during +his entire reign his mother provided the rain for Swaziland. + +Labotsibeni was wise in her way and made the "rain stone" a source of +revenue. Now and then dry spells strike Swaziland, and the hot sun +burns up the crops and causes much suffering. At such a time the +indunas came to the old queen and begged her to make rain. She always +went through some incantation before assenting, and then announced her +price. It was usually a portion of corn from each kraal, the total +amounting to many bushels. When this was paid, she agreed to make +rain. It is peculiar that she was often successful and that rain +followed shortly after her promise. + +If, however, the rain did not come, she would announce that one of her +chiefs was plotting against her and that she had surrendered the rule +of the weather to the devil so that he might punish her people. On +such occasions her wrath was terrible, and this is probably one of the +reasons why she was so feared. Tuys told me that Labotsibeni in a rage +was a "perfect she-devil" and that even her indunas would run to avoid +her. She was a wise old queen; no matter how the weather acted, she +had it arranged so that she could not lose! + +On the way out of the indunas' burying-ground, the witch-doctor +stepped on a snake. We came up to him as he sat waiting for death, the +body of the adder beside him with its head crushed. He rocked slowly +back and forth, looking straight ahead and making no sound. I wanted +to do something for him. + +"What's the use, lad?" Tuys said. "There is no cure for the +puff-adder's bite, unless you have a drug-shop along. He must die, and +die soon, and he knows it. Come on, unless you want to see him go?" + +I most certainly did not, so we went along, keeping our eyes on the +ground lest we run afoul of a snake. I looked back a moment later and +saw that the stricken man had laid down, and then I knew that his +suffering would soon be over. None of the other natives seemed to give +a second thought to him; under Buno's rule they had grown more callous +than ever. + +It was almost noon when we reached Buno's kraal, and there was a large +gathering of witch-doctors about his hut. The witch-doctors of our +burial-party joined them, and Tuys informed me that practically all +the witch-doctors in Swaziland were there. + +"Now would be a good time for some target practice," he said grimly. +"In about five minutes a few quick shots could remove most of the +sources of trouble in this country. If those witch-doctors were all +killed, Swaziland would be a happier land." + +Soon the head witch-doctor--the one who did the butchering so well the +night before--detached himself from the group and began to look at the +sun. He stood his wand on the ground and studied its shadow. After a +time this seemed to satisfy him, and he sent two of the others out of +the kraal on the run. Shortly after came the sound of many feet, and +soon the royal impi filed into the enclosure. The warriors ranged +themselves on either side of the pathway, just as I had so often seen +them do before. + +When they were in place the chief doctor went into Buno's hut. Out he +came a few minutes later, with six others carrying the body of the +king. As they swung it to their shoulders the impi saluted. After the +third thud of stamping feet the chief doctor started down the lane of +warriors. Behind him came those bearing the body, with the other +doctors following them. Last of all came a number of unarmed men +carrying fresh-killed beef, corn, and pots of tswala. + +This was the king's funeral cortege proper. When it reached the end of +the impi, the warriors turned and followed in marching order, acting +as escort. Tuys and I dropped in behind. I was very curious to see +"the caves" where Buno was to be buried. As we followed the slow +procession, Tuys told me about them. + +"No white man has ever entered these caves," he said. "They are a +little distance up the mountain and are said to be immense. The +witch-doctors are the only natives who ever enter them, and they tell +queer tales about what goes on. They say that there are rivers and +smoke and bright lights in some of the caves. I don't believe this, of +course, but they say it. I think that the mystery of the caves is part +of the foolishness practiced by these witch-doctors and is only +trumped up to keep the people away. Not long ago when I asked a +witch-doctor if he would show me King Umbandine's grave in the caves, +he pretended to be much frightened and told me that the devil lived in +the caves and would be angry if a white man entered them. + +"Only the kings of Swaziland are buried in the caves. Ama-Swazi was +the first. His body was brought up from his kraal in the low country. +Umbandine is there, and now Buno is going to join them. I suppose +Labotsibeni will have the honor when she dies, although it is quite +likely that the witch-doctors will refuse to allow a woman to be +buried there." + +The caves were about four miles from the royal kraal at Lebombo and +much of the trail was uphill. We reached them in about an hour, and I +saw that there were a number of entrances, all fissures in the rocks. + +The procession stopped and the bearers were relieved by six others. +The change was made without laying the king's body on the ground. This +was in accordance with the ancient customs--a king's body must not +touch the ground from the time it starts on its last trek until it is +laid at rest in the caves. + +The new bearers faced about and raised the body high above their +heads. While they held it there the royal impi gave their dead king +his last salute. Then the witch-doctors took the food from the unarmed +men and a moment later the entire band of "priests" disappeared among +the rocks. That was the last of Buno, rightly called "The Terrible," +the most powerful and cruel king Swaziland has ever had. The impi +turned and started down the trail at a smart pace, leaving Tuys and me +behind. These great warriors seemed glad that the funeral was over. +They swung by us with light steps, many of them grinning at the white +men as they went by. + +Now I was very curious to know what was inside the caves. There was so +much mystery about them that it fired my youthful imagination. I spoke +of this to Tuys and was pleased to find that he also was curious. + +"Yes, I'd like to have a look at them," he said. "Buno and Labotsibeni +have told me some queer yarns about them, and they are the one thing +in Swaziland that I am not familiar with. Let's see if we can't get +into them." + +The witch-doctors had not come out yet, and we decided to wait until +they did. I suggested that they were engaged in some ceremony, but +Tuys, knowing the native, would not agree with me. + +"Those humbugs are probably eating the food and drinking the good +beer," he said, with a snort of disgust. "I'd hate to believe that +they'd let it go to waste. I'll bet that Buno will go hungry if he +comes back!" + +Expecting that they would soon come out, we hid behind some rocks, +feeling sure that they would think we had gone back with the impi. Our +guess was good. In a little while we saw them tramping down the trail. +As soon as they passed the bend from beyond which the entrances to the +caves could not be seen, we started on our exploration. + +There seemed to be any number of ways into these mysterious caves. +However, Tuys's training led him to follow the footprints of the +witch-doctors. They must have come out by another route, for all the +prints faced inward. + +Tuys led, and I noticed that he was carrying his revolver in his hand, +ready for instant use. We passed between a number of great rocks, all +of which seemed to be split by some terrific force. But we did not go +far. There came a sharp turn to the right, and straight in front of us +was the entrance to the caves. In front of it stood six witch-doctors +with assegais drawn back, ready to strike! + +Tuys did not hesitate long enough to take one breath. He wheeled in +his tracks and we turned back. We did not run or make unseemly haste, +but we certainly moved faster than we had come in. When we reached the +outside, Tuys made but one remark. + +"Serves us right!" he exclaimed. "I ought to have had sense enough to +count those witch-doctors." + +I remember that it was a hot walk back to our camp. Probably our +chagrin added to the temperature. + +To this day no white man has penetrated the caves. I hope to do so the +next time I visit Swaziland. I never had a chance on my subsequent +visits, but I shall certainly find a way the next time. The thought is +fascinating, but I suppose I shall be disappointed if I ever do +explore this royal burial-place. Like most things in life, it will +fail to come up to expectations. + +Not long after we reached our camp several indunas and a small band of +warriors called on Tuys. They were part of the bodyguard of +Labotsibeni and had come on a special errand. + +"Nkoos, White King," the chief induna began with much ceremony, "the +great Queen Labotsibeni sends me to you with a message. Even now she, +the mother of Buno, waits your answer." + +I was interested to see that he spoke of Buno as though that cruel +ruler still lived. The thought came to me that his infamy would keep +him alive for some time, at least in the memories of those who had +witnessed any of his bloody pastimes. + +Tuys did not seem to understand what the induna was driving at, and he +asked several questions. The chief said that the old queen had +instructed him to ask Tuys if her "white brother" did not remember his +promise. She was waiting for him to fulfil what he had said he would +do. There was some more palaver, and then Tuys suddenly woke up. + +"Why, the old girl wants her gin!" he said, laughing. Then he got out +four small cases of it and presented them to the induna. + +"I'd go along with him," Tuys said to me in Dutch, "if I was not +afraid that I'd have to lie to the old queen. She wants the job of +ruling Swaziland until the question of the new king is decided, and +she expects me to get the British to acknowledge her as regent. I +don't know what I'll be able to do, and if I promise that she will get +the job, and she doesn't get it, I'll be in a fine pickle! I think +I'll avoid her, and we'd better get going to-night and make a break +for Rietvlei." + +[Illustration: SWAZI WARRIORS AND WOMEN DANCING + +The ceremonies were held when Dr. O'Neil and his companions were +inducted into the royal impi] + +[Illustration: PRINCESSES OF ROYAL BIRTH + +The fourth from the left is a sister to Crown Prince Sebuza. They are +all dressed up in gaudy colors--clothes which we had presented them] + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +Sibijaan's sportiveness almost costs his life--How Tuys became the +friend of Buno--Labotsibeni endorsed as regent of Swaziland--Umzulek +plots to seize the throne--The Boers invade Swaziland--Tuys dictates +peace between the queens--Umzulek gets his lesson. + + +The midday siesta period was about over and the kraals were beginning +to show signs of life again. The native women were going about their +domestic duties and the men, as usual, were resting in the shade and +furbishing their weapons. Our activity in breaking camp did not +attract much attention, except on the part of the usual number of +small boys, and before long we were on the trail to the Valley of +Heaven. We only traveled about half as fast as we had come in and were +constantly being held up by crowds going in the same direction. +Thousands upon thousands had come to see the sacrifice of the ten +indunas and were now returning to their homes. + +Sibijaan nearly got us into a pretty row shortly before we struck the +valley. He was driving the wagon with its four mules, and began to get +impatient over the crowded roadway. He got careless with his sjambok +and flicked a tall Swazi warrior on a naked but important part of his +anatomy. Now the sjambok cuts like a knife, and the savage gave a +tremendous jump. In fact, he seemed to me to jump twice--once straight +up in the air and the second time toward the wagon, brandishing his +assegai and shouting. + +Sibijaan dived into the wagon under the cover, and the enraged induna +dashed round to the rear of the vehicle in the hope that its driver +was trying to escape that way. Then ensued a sort of merry-go-round, +the induna dashing madly from front to back of the wagon and Sibijaan +trying to keep one guess ahead of him. Both were yelling, and Tuys and +I hurried to stop the trouble. However, we were too late! The induna +suddenly stopped at the side of the wagon where he could watch the +front, his spear poised for murder. He was the cat watching the +rat-hole, the hunter awaiting his prey. + +Tuys snatched his revolver from its holster and was just aiming at the +savage when we saw the flap of the wagon-cover lifted just a little +and a thin arm come out. In the hand was a short knob-kerrie, and it +caught the irate chief on the back of the head with one fell sweep. +Down he came with a crash, his shield thudding as it hit the ground. + +A second later Sibijaan hopped out of the wagon, knife in hand, +evidently intending to finish the job. Tuys reached down from his +horse and swung the little beggar up before him, where he gave him a +good spanking. That was the end of the incident, since the induna +found himself looking into the business end of Tuys's revolver when he +woke up from his trance. + +Late that evening we camped in the Valley of Heaven. We passed several +kraals in our leisurely progress and talked with some of the indunas. +None of them seemed very sorry that Buno was gone, but there was a +general expression of anxiety concerning the next ruler. Most of them +thought that Labotsibeni should get the job, but not a few favored +Umzulek--in fact, there seemed to be quite a strong Umzulek sentiment. + +During our next day's trek I asked Oom Tuys how it happened that he +and Buno were such good friends. Tuys explained that he had originally +befriended Buno and the Swazis because the Boers wanted the Swazis as +a sort of bulwark against the British. On several occasions Tuys had +been able to save land for Buno when certain of the English had tried +to get it away from him, and this had made the savage his good friend +for life. Incidentally, it helped the Boer cause. + +"The one great thing I did for Buno," Tuys went on, "was about two +years ago when Oom Paul decided to discipline him. One of my bodyguard +had talked too much in Pretoria and the President had learned about +the bloody atrocities Buno was committing. It seems the story that +really outraged Oom Paul's feelings was one about Buno having some +young girls cut open. + +"Oom Paul sent for me and asked me about this. Naturally, I knew +nothing about it. How could I? If I'd seen it, it was my duty to +report it, wasn't it? If I hadn't seen it, how could I know anything +about it? Of course I couldn't tell Oom Paul that Buno and I had an +important business deal on at that time, could I? + +"Somehow or other I don't think Oom Paul believed me. He sent word to +Buno that he must behave and stop killing people, and Buno sent word +back that Paul had better mind his own business, or words to that +general effect. The fool thought that I would protect him and that he +could get cheeky with Oom Paul! + +"Well, the old man had had enough of Buno's nonsense and he sent a +command of about five thousand men into Swaziland to smash him. +Instead of leaving me out of it, our cunning President sent me along +as second-in-command. I was the guide and all that sort of thing, and +had to practically assure Buno's getting jolly well licked, if not +killed. After some days we got to within twenty miles of Lebombo and +planned to attack the royal kraal at dawn next morning. + +"I did not like the idea of Buno being captured, because I knew that +would be the end of him. Oom Paul was not in the mood to stand further +nonsense. That night I was in command of the sentries, and shortly +after dark I placed my sergeant in charge and sneaked off to the kraal +of a chief who lived near where we were camped. He knew me, and from +him I got a good horse. Then I rode like the devil to Lebombo and +warned Buno what was going to happen. + +"I got back to our camp just as the commando was saddling up to move +to the attack. We rode hard and reached the kraal about four +o'clock--to find the entire place empty. There wasn't a single Swazi +there! The king and all his warriors had flown. So we were ordered to +pursue him, and I led the way. Later I learned that we had gone in +exactly the wrong direction, so Buno escaped. + +"Oom Paul decided that Buno had learned his lesson and would behave +thereafter, since he had been shown that the Boers would come and get +him if he did not. However, Buno felt that I would always pull him out +of any hole he might get into, so the lesson was lost on him. One +thing Oom Paul did accomplish, however, and that was to make Buno +realize what a good friend I was!" + +My mother was very glad to see us when we reached Rietvlei. Father had +returned, and he spoke sharply to Tuys for taking me with him on so +dangerous a trip. Tuys told him that he had Buno's word for our +safety, but that did not much impress my father. + +"The word of a kaffir is good so long as he remembers," he said, "but +you know that the best of them are children, and children forget. It +was lucky you came out as soon as you did. From what you have told me +and from what I've heard conditions are likely to be bad in Swaziland +until the government selects a ruler." + +Tuys and he then began discussing what should be done about this. +Father, I found, knew all about the politics of Swaziland, and he +agreed with Tuys that the old queen was the right person to rule until +a king was set up. Their talk ended with my father writing a letter +for Tuys to take to Oom Paul. He recommended that Labotsibeni be +recognized as regent for the time being, or until Queen Tzaneen's +child was born. If the child was a boy, he would be the next king of +Swaziland; if a girl, arrangements would have to be made for one of +Buno's brothers to take the throne. + +Buno had a number of brothers, among whom were Lomwazi, Umzulek, +Debeseembie, and one other whose name I have forgotten but who was +known as a drunkard and a generally disreputable character. + +Oom Tuys left next morning to report conditions to Oom Paul, and we +heard nothing for several months. Finally, on the new moon, about +three months later, messengers came to Rietvlei from Queen +Labotsibeni. Tuys was with us, having arrived several days before. + +After the usual salutes and other ceremonial the head induna spoke: + +"Nkoos, the queen mother sends to you in her trouble. Her son, the +late King Buno, gave you guardianship over Swaziland and Queen +Labotsibeni wants your counsel. Even now Queen Tzaneen, the royal +widow, gives birth. We do not yet know whether it will be a man-child +or not. Umzulek plots to take the throne by force and is mustering his +impis. Thousands are flocking to his support and the impis of the +queens are gathering at Zombode. If you do not come quickly, there +will be war in our country. Queen Labotsibeni prays that you come and +prevent war." + +This was the situation that father and Tuys had feared. Tuys had his +orders from Oom Paul and knew what he was to do. He told the induna +what to expect. + +"Tell your queen," he said, "that I am coming within three days with a +great army of white men. Tell her that I shall see that the throne is +preserved to the dynasty and that none except the one to whom it +rightfully belongs shall become king of Swaziland." + +With this message the induna withdrew, and we saw him and his men +leaving at top speed to carry these words of cheer to Labotsibeni. +Then came a hurried mobilization of all the fighting Boers within a +day's ride of Rietvlei. Word was sent far and wide over the veldt--to +the outlying farms, to the small towns, to Belfast, and to every place +where men might be found. + +Within three days the Valley of Reeds became an armed camp. There were +more than a thousand well armed, hard-riding Boers waiting for the +word to trek into Swaziland. These people of ours were a hardy lot. +There were men of sixty and even seventy years, and mixed in with them +were their sons and grandsons, many of the latter being boys of +sixteen and seventeen. All, however, were well armed and serious. They +were on a serious business and stood ready to die in the service of +their great leader, Oom Paul. + +At dawn on the fourth day we started. From the very beginning it was a +hard ride. The burghers rode in what was practically military +formation, two by two, with Tuys leading. I went along as his aide and +rode as close to him as the trails would permit. I have often thought +of that trek. The feeling between Boers and British was getting more +bitter every day, and these Boer farmers were really taking a training +march for the dark days that were to come so soon. It was a heartening +sight to look back on our cavalcade and see the great hats bobbing up +and down, the lean, wiry ponies, the ready rifles, and the grim faces, +most of them bearded. + +We took no natives with us. Our food was biltong and rusks, and each +man carried enough to last him for two weeks. Every Boer took care of +his own horse and did everything for himself. It was felt that there +might be trouble, and Tuys never trusted the kaffirs in a tight place. + +During the morning of the second day's trek, not long after we had +passed the Vaal River, we were met by several indunas and a small +impi. They stood in the middle of the roadway making peace signs, and +Tuys brought our little army to a halt. Then he and I rode forward and +waited. + +The chief induna came to meet us. I recognized him as one of those +whom I had seen in Queen Tzaneen's train and knew that he came from her. + +"Nkoos, Queen Tzaneen sent me to you," he said to Tuys, with all +humility. "Yesterday she gave birth to a prince, the rightful heir to +the throne! She sends you the message that she is afraid that Umzulek +will kill her son. Even now she is afraid to leave Lebombo. Also, +Queen Tzaneen asks that you protect her from Queen Labotsibeni and +prevent the queen mother from seizing the throne." + +Tuys listened to his message and then asked what was really going on +in Swaziland. The induna told him that Umzulek had gathered his impis +together and it was rumored that he would take the throne by force. +Queen Labotsibeni had gathered all her warriors, and it was understood +that she would fight to keep Umzulek from becoming ruler. Queen +Tzaneen, on her side, had mustered all the men who remained faithful +to the memory of King Buno, and it was said that she would take the +throne if she could muster enough force to do it. Taking it all in +all, the stage was set for a bloody civil strife in Swaziland. + +"It looks as though we had work ahead," Tuys said to me in Dutch, +after the induna had related these events. "Well, we have our job to +do and the sooner we get it over the better." + +Then he turned to the induna. + +"Tell your queen that we have heard the story and will take care of +her," he directed him. Tuys then gave the word to continue our march. + +Unlike all other armies, our little force was truly democratic and +every man was entitled to know what out task was to be. Tuys sent for +several of the leaders, men who headed the commandos of their +districts, and told them about the political situation in Swaziland. + +"Oom Paul's orders are that we must secure the throne for the rightful +heir," he said. "Labotsibeni must be appointed regent until the new +prince comes of age, and it is our job to pacify the people and +prevent war. If, however, war there must be, we shall strike first and +strike hard! We must remember that death is the only argument that a +kaffir understands and must make a clean job of it." + +I understood what a "clean job" meant--that every native, chief or +plain warrior, who did not like the conditions Tuys laid down was to +be killed. It began to look as though we should have some hard +fighting and our devoted band of about a thousand would find +themselves pitted against great odds. + +We pushed our horses to their limit and made splendid time. The Boer +pony or veldt-bred horse is almost tireless, and our mounts were +extended to the utmost. The result was that we reached Zombode early +next morning. + +When we came in sight of the kraals our cavalry was deployed in a +double rank about five hundred horses wide. We trotted to the kraals +in this formation, every man with his rifle on his hip, ready for +anything. When we had halted, Tuys acknowledged the indunas that had +come out to meet him. There was no formality about Tuys this time. He +represented the Boer Government and was there as conqueror to lay down +the law. The indunas noted the difference, and I could see the sullen +glint in their eyes as they took their orders from him. + +"Tell Queen Labotsibeni that I am here," Tuys directed. "I shall wait +for her only a short time and she had better come as quickly as she +can." + +Without a word the indunas hastened into the royal kraal, while we +loosened up a bit and let our horses breathe. The Boer knows how to +take care of his mount, and here and there could be seen men arranging +their girths and making their ponies more comfortable. + +In the very shortest time Queen Labotsibeni came out of her kraal, +attended by Lomwazi, her indunas, and a number of warriors. The second +they came in sight every man of our force was back again in his +saddle, his rifle at the ready. The old queen walked slowly and +seemingly with difficulty. She was very tall and quite fat, but +carried herself with pride. As always, she was scrupulously clean, her +black face shining in the early morning sun. + +Labotsibeni came to a halt about twenty feet in front of Tuys and me, +and her bodyguard ranged themselves on either side of her. They were +picked men and as fine figures of savages as was their old queen. Tuys +let her wait for a moment and then got off his horse, motioning to me +to join him. We stepped forward, and this time Tuys did not shake +hands when greeting her. + +"Nkosikaas, I have heard what is going on in Swaziland," he said, +simply but very severely, "and I have come with my army to see that +justice is done. I come from Oom Paul, our great king, and he has +authorized me to do as I see fit. + +"My order to you is that to-morrow you meet me at the little river +which lies between Zombode and Lebombo. You will be there as soon as +the sun shines on the water. There will be a conference and the peace +of Swaziland will be assured. I have spoken!" + +Labotsibeni was a proud old woman and did not seem to like to have to +take orders in this fashion. She looked at Tuys for a moment in a very +indignant way, but dropped her eyes when they met his. She started to +speak, and I could see that she had a lot to say, too. Tuys's glance +cowed her, however, and after a moment of ground-searching her eyes +ran up and down the ranks of our determined army. + +A moment later she gave in. + +"Nkoos, I shall be there," she said, quite humbly. Then she gave a +sign to her indunas and warriors, and all together they gave Tuys the +royal salute. This ended the interview. Without another word Tuys +shouted the command for us to march, and we started for Lebombo. + +Our only stop was to water the horses at the little river Tuys had +mentioned, and then we pressed on to Lebombo, arriving at the kraals +in the same formation as before. Evidently the word had gone ahead +that we were coming, for three full impis, or about three thousand +warriors, were lined up waiting for us. + +As soon as we came close they gave us the salute, showing that they +were not arrayed for hostile purposes. Had they been, they would have +stood a poor chance, for our little army would have wiped them out in +short order. As before, a number of indunas came out to meet us and +Tuys repeated his program. + +"I am the law and this is my order," he said. "Tell Queen Tzaneen I am +here and wait for her to come to me." + +There was no hesitation on the part of the indunas. The natives have +an extraordinary method of getting word to one another, and they knew +that Tuys came on a far different mission than usual. The indunas +bowed their heads submissively, and a short time after accompanied +Tzaneen to our presence. + +However, she was inclined to be a little haughty and carried herself +proudly. Tuys hardly looked at her. She, like Labotsibeni, was a +finely-built savage, but not so fat as the old queen. Her hair had +grown out to quite a length, showing that Buno had been dead for some +months. + +Tuys gave her the same orders as he had given Labotsibeni, and she +agreed to meet him at the river. Then Tuys asked for Umzulek. + +"Umzulek is at his kraal half a day's trek from here," she informed +him. "He has gathered his impis there and threatens to make war unless +he is made king. Also, word has come that he will kill my child, the +infant Prince Sebuza, so that none shall stand in his way." + +"Your son, Nkosikaas, widow of Buno, shall be safe," Tuys assured her. +"You will send a messenger to Umzulek bidding him to attend our +conference at the little river. That is my order!" + +And so Tuys arranged the conference at which the future peace of +Swaziland was to be secured. We rode easily back to the little stream +and there made our camp. It was the middle of the day when we +unsaddled and, except for those on guard, we all went to sleep. + +Late that afternoon Tuys called a council of the commando leaders and +prepared for next morning. That night we doubled our guards and I +stood watch for several hours. It was the first time I had ever done +this and it was a wonderful experience. The bright moon picked out +every object on the little plateau and the stream seemed to be a +streak of rippling silver. Our camp was on a small kopje, or hill, +with the river at its base, and with the first streaks of dawn we +awoke our men. + +It was none too soon. By the time it was fully light we could see +thousands of warriors coming from either direction. These were the +impis of the two queens. Our men, mounted and ready, formed a double +line around the top of the hill and waited. The impis came closer and +stopped on either side of the stream. They were only about a hundred +yards apart, and the thought came to me that here was the setting for +a fine battle. This, however, it was our duty to prevent. + +Soon Tuys sent me, with a bodyguard, to give his orders to the indunas +who stood resting on their shields in front of each army. These orders +were simple. I told them that their queen was to come to the +conference immediately and that each should bring only her bodyguard +with her. In a short time Tzaneen and Labotsibeni arrived and were +seated facing Tuys and a number of the commando leaders. + +There was no formality about the business whatever. The first question +Tuys asked was as to the whereabouts of Umzulek. + +"He sent my messengers back in haste," Tzaneen reported, "to say that +he was very sick and could not come. When my induna said to him that +it was an order, he threatened to kill him, and so he came back +without further delay." + +I could see that this annoyed Tuys. He ran his hand through his beard +in an aggravated fashion and then spoke: + +"Umzulek lies," he said decisively, "but he also prophesies! He will +be very sick. Perhaps he will be so sick that he will die, if I go to +see him. He will find that I am a bad witch-doctor and will know that +it is not good to refuse an order!" + +Then Tuys delivered his ultimatum, and it was the arrangement by which +peace was preserved in Swaziland for nearly a score of years. It was a +striking scene. Each of the queens sat in front of her bodyguard, +while behind Tuys stood the keen-eyed Boer leaders. Except for their +plumes and colored trappings, the armies of the two queens almost +blended into the barren brown veldt. Over all was the crystal-clear +sky of South Africa, with the bright sun throwing clean-cut shadows. +The rocky hills that surrounded the little plateau seemed to form the +irregular walls of an amphitheater, with our council hill in the center. + +Tuys first addressed Queen Tzaneen. + +"Nkosikaas, your son, the Prince Sebuza," he said, "is the son of +Buno, the grandson of Umbandine and the lineal descendant of +Ama-Swazi. Sebuza is the rightful heir to the throne and shall be king +of Swaziland." + +Tzaneen threw her head back and glanced triumphantly at the old queen, +who was watching Tuys with deep concern. + +"And you, Queen Labotsibeni, mother of Buno and grandmother of the +infant Prince Sebuza," Tuys said, turning to her, "shall govern as +queen regent until Sebuza is a man and fit to become king." + +Labotsibeni straightened up and a smile lighted up her hard, old face. +However, I noticed that she did not even look at Tzaneen. + +"Those are the orders of him who Buno made guardian of Swaziland," +Tuys said, talking to both, "and Oom Paul, the great induna of the +Boers, has placed thousands of white warriors at his command to see +that these orders are obeyed." + +Tuys then asked each queen if she would obey, and both promised they +would. He told them that he would come with a great army and take +their country away from them if he heard that they had broken their +promises in the slightest degree. This was the end of the conference. + +In this way the Boer Government recognized Labotsibeni as the regent +of Swaziland until the proper time for Sebuza to become king and thus +showed the way for a peace which lasted nearly twenty years. Shortly +afterward the British also agreed to this arrangement, and it is said +that they did so after talking the matter over with Oom Paul and Tuys. + +However, this was not the end of our job. Umzulek had to be reckoned +with. If he was not taught his lesson, it was quite likely that he +would continue making trouble and sooner or later bring on a civil +war. When the two queens had gone, Tuys called into conference the +commando leaders and arranged a plan for Umzulek's benefit. + +Because he knew that some of Umzulek's men were undoubtedly watching +us, we made a feint of starting for home late that afternoon. We +camped in the Valley of Heaven, as though intending to return to +Rietvlei. The kaffirs at the kraal near which we camped were told that +we expected to reach the Valley of Reeds in about three days, and they +undoubtedly passed the information on to Umzulek's scouts. + +Not long after midnight we were in the saddle and on our way to +Umzulek's kraal. Tuys knows Swaziland as well as he knows the +Transvaal, and we went by a route that did not take us near either +Zombode or Lebombo. + +When Umzulek's warriors came out of their kraals at Stegla shortly +after dawn they rubbed their eyes in amazement to see us drawn up in +battle array on two sides of their village. Our men were so posted +that they could rake the kraals with rifle fire and not one kaffir +would be able to escape. + +There was great activity in the kraals when Umzulek's men found out +what had happened. In a little while several made attempts to get away +in the direction of the hills, sneaking out from the unguarded sides +of the kraals. They did not get far. Burghers on fleet ponies turned +them back, and there were no further attempts to escape. + +Tuys knows how to handle natives. He knows that they are more +terrified when they do not know what is going to happen than they are +of an actual calamity. For that reason he made no move to declare +himself. All that Umzulek's warriors knew was that they were +surrounded by a band of determined white horsemen with rifles ready +for action. I saw hundreds watching us with apprehension, and there +was almost a panic in the village. + +Finally some indunas came forward, waving their shields and making all +sorts of peaceful overtures. Tuys was rough with them. He commanded +that Umzulek be brought before him without delay and said that his men +would open fire within a few minutes if he did not come. The indunas +fled into the main kraal with the orders, and Umzulek came out with +almost unseemly haste. + +He was a masterful-looking savage. Much like Buno in the face, he was +not so tall, but seemed stouter. His body was huge, his legs massive, +and his fine head and bulging forehead showed the cunning and brains +for which he was noted. Except for a short assegai, Umzulek was +unarmed and wore nothing, not even a loin-cloth or plumes. + +He came directly to Tuys and threw up his hands in salute. There was +nothing cringing about him, in spite of the fact that he was trapped. + +"Nkoos, you have sent for me?" he asked, his voice sonorous and heavy. +I noticed that he looked into Tuys's eyes without flinching. He was +not even nervous. + +"I sent for you yesterday," Tuys answered slowly and severely, "and +you sent back the foolish word that you were sick. You disobeyed my +orders. For that your life is forfeited! Shall I give the word that +means death, or will you listen and obey the order I now give?" + +Umzulek showed no fear. He met Tuys's eyes without a tremor. + +"Nkoos, white brother of my brother, Buno," he replied after a moment, +"do your will! I am not afraid of death. If I live, however, I shall +obey your orders." + +Tuys then became very angry and talked to Umzulek as roughly as he +could. In spite of this, the savage chief never lowered his eyes, +although he promised obedience. Tuys ended by telling him what he must +do to avoid trouble in the future. Previously he had informed him of +the arrangement by which Swaziland was to be governed. + +"You will remain here at your kraal from now on," Tuys told him, "and +shall never go to Lebombo or Zombode without my permission. You must +not concern yourself with the government of your country and must keep +peace here in your own district. If I hear that you have broken your +promise in the slightest degree, I shall come with a great army and +kill you and all your people!" + +Umzulek admitted that he understood this plain speaking, and the +interview ended with his curt dismissal. Even then, beaten as he was, +he returned to his kraal with his head up and dignity unruffled. I had +a feeling that he would keep his word, and he did until years later, +when Tuys sent for him to assist in saving the throne for Sebuza, who, +by the way, was his nephew. + +The return trip to Rietvlei was made by easy stages. Our horses were +pretty tired and they were allowed to rest as much as possible. There +was a general feeling of relief among the burghers, although some of +the younger ones did not hesitate to regret that there had been no +fighting. They expressed the opinion that it would have taught the +Swazis a lesson they would long remember if an impi or two had been +wiped out. Tuys made one significant remark to me as we came in sight +of Rietvlei. + +"With Labotsibeni on the throne for the next twenty years," he said, +"I'm afraid that the tribute will cease. Oom Paul will save two +thousand pounds a month and I expect that I won't make so many visits +to Lebombo. Labotsibeni must behave herself, and it looks to me as +though I won't have so much business in Swaziland as I have had." + +He was thinking of the wrestling matches with Buno and mentally +regretting the fact that his big pockets would no longer bulge with +gold. However, Tuys had done rather well; public report had it that +these tussles gave him the start toward his fortune. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +War with England--Siege of Belfast--Our boyish impi attacks the +British--Ghosts defeat us--Jafta's friendship--English troopers do the +"sporting thing"--Umzulek still planning deviltry--Death of Klaas, our +jockey--Father sends me away to get an education. + + +As soon as we reached Rietvlei my father and Tuys closeted themselves +in his office. Mother told me that there was trouble between the +British and Boers and that my father had received certain orders from +Oom Paul Kruger. None of our little army had left Rietvlei when Tuys +came out of the house and summoned its leaders. + +"You are all to go to your homes," he said, "and there wait for +orders. There is serious trouble with the English and Oom Paul +commands that all stand ready for whatever may come. God grant that +this is not war." + +There seemed to be a divided sentiment about this. Some of the +leaders, particularly the younger ones, did not appear to dislike the +thought of war, but the old men drew long faces and looked very grave. +However, they all mounted and before long the last had left. I did not +realize then that I would never see them all again. The shadow of war +was over the land and many of our troop were later killed. + +A short time after our return from Swaziland word reached my father +from President Kruger that he was to visit the leading Boers of our +district and get their opinion regarding the suggested war with +England. War was practically inevitable at that time and my father +found the sentiment almost overwhelmingly in favor of it. He +counselled against fighting England, because he knew of the unlimited +resources of the empire and how impossible it would be for us to win. +Knowing my father's astuteness, the old Boers listened to him and were +almost won over to peace, but just then word came that war had been +declared. + +Immediately the whole country blazed up. Every farm and settlement +sent its men, all mounted and armed with the best Mausers and hunting +rifles, and in a trice the Transvaal and Orange Free State were on the +war-path. + +It was our misfortune that the British broke into our part of the +Transvaal first. When we heard they were coming, we took everything of +value and moved to Belfast, which had been fortified and where we were +prepared to stand a siege. I shall never forget the excitement of +those days. My mother was in delicate condition and the whole thing +was a terrible hardship for her. For me, and for the rest of us boys, +it was a great and glorious lark! + +The air was filled with stories of battles, and before long streams of +wounded men were sent from our field forces to the improvised +hospitals in Belfast. We boys used to watch these caravans with +intense interest and would run errands for the wounded and bring them +presents. These farmer-soldiers were our heroes, and we were proud of +the saying, "For each Boer, five Englishmen," this being the ratio our +fighters claimed was about right. + +However, it was not long before we began to find the British could not +be stopped and one morning, late in 1899, Belfast was besieged by +forces under General Paul Carew. We suffered many hardships and I soon +realized that war was a grim and earnest business. My mother would +pray continually that our peril in Belfast be ended either by victory +of our troops or their speedy surrender to the British. She made the +vow that her unborn child should bear the name of the victorious +general, and when, on the eve of the triumphant entry of the British +into Belfast, a little daughter was born, she was given the name of +Paul Carew, with the prefix "Impi," which, in addition to meaning a +regiment, is also the Zulu word for war. + +My sister, Impi, certainly lives up to her name. Determination and +fighting spirit are her chief characteristics, and she is equally at +home in handling wild horses or obstinate kaffirs. In addition, she is +one of the best rifle shots in the Transvaal and can beat any one of +her sex when it comes to a race on foot. + +General Carew constituted Belfast a British base, and the countryside +was raided and ravaged by the troops making it their headquarters. +Hardly a farm escaped, and even to-day there are ruins that recall +those dark days. But two rooms of our home in Belfast were habitable +and it was in these that we lived. The main British camp was directly +in front of our house, and the situation galled me. I hated the +British for driving us out of Rietvlei and for ruining our home, and +before long I declared war on them on my own account. What happened is +a good example of the way the English treated us. + +I gathered all the boys of the town, that is, the dozen white boys, +and drilled them as my impi. Sibijaan, being black, was not allowed to +take part in our war. I considered it beneath me to let him fight with +me against other whites. We armed ourselves with stones and sticks and +late at night made a concerted attack on the British headquarters, +which had been established in the ruins of the local hotel. + +We smashed all the windows, and the officers and orderlies came +tumbling out in great haste. The sentries did not fire on us, but +there was a general rush in our direction which resulted in our +capture. When we were brought before General Carew, he asked what we +thought we were doing. None of us could talk English and the +questioning was done through an interpreter. I informed him that we +were loyal Boers and had declared war on the English. + +General Carew looked at me very severely and asked me if I was ready +to be shot for a treacherous attack after the town had surrendered. +This was a new thought for me, but I stood to my guns and defied him. +However, I did not like the idea of being buried in the local cemetery +where we boys had seen so many British and Boer soldiers already put +away. + +After a few more questions, all of them with the most serious face and +a gravity that could mean nothing but evil for us, the general +delivered sentence. It was that we were to be taken to the improvised +mess-room and fed all the jam, biscuits, tea, and sugar we could eat! +I remember that I was very proud to be given a tin of jam for myself +alone. My sister, Ellen, had been one of our attacking party and she +shared equally in the spoils of our captivity. + +But this treatment did not pacify us. Next night we made another +attack, and this time we were really punished. We were captured and +tied to the veranda posts of some houses nearby. Now this would not +have been bad, if we had not been superstitious. + +During the days following the victorious entry of General Carew into +Belfast, we boys had been intensely interested in a number of wagons +loaded with the bodies of British soldiers. These wagons were driven +down the main street and the bodies buried in huge graves, oftentimes +eight and twelve to a grave, in the local cemetery. The tale was soon +started that the ghosts of these soldiers walked about the main street +at night. + +After we had been tied to the veranda posts it suddenly occurred to me +that we would most likely see these ghosts, and I mentioned this +pleasant thought to my fellow-prisoners. Immediately there arose a +wailing and weeping; our brave little army cried to be allowed to turn +tail and depart to its beds. + +Of course the British did not know what was the matter. Ellen, instead +of being tied up like the rest of us, had been taken into the +mess-room and given more crackers and jam. She came out in a hurry to +see what was the matter with us. I told her between gasps of horror, +and she ran in to the mess and through the interpreter told the +colonel. She said later that he regarded it as a huge joke for a +little while, but then, when she became anxious for us, gave orders +that we were to be freed. We scurried home with all speed as soon as +the hated "Tommies" turned us loose. This was the end of our little +war against the British. We might fight _them_, but when it came to +ghosts we lost our nerve. + +In spite of stories that have been spread about the Boer War, there +was always a fine sporting spirit between our people and the British. +A good example of this was what happened to one of my older brothers. +Jafta, the Mapor king, was concerned in this. + +My father had prospered greatly in the Valley of Reeds, and when the +war broke out owned immense herds of cattle, sheep, and horses. Soon +after Belfast was taken he decided that it would be a good thing to +move his stock into the northern and more remote parts of the +Transvaal. One of my older brothers, two uncles, and a neighbor +undertook the trek with the stock. + +Such a trek is slow and tedious work, and shortly after they started +out a galloping outpost of about thirty Britishers came upon them. The +Boers fled. Their horses were tired and trail-weary and they had to +leave the stock without a chance to obtain a remount from the horses +they were driving. They broke for the mountains, and zigzagged about +until they came to the kraal of Jafta, the Mapor king. + +They hoped to get fresh horses from him, but Jafta had already been +terrified by the British and feared he would be shot if he helped or +sheltered any Boers. He explained his position to my brother and +begged that the party leave immediately. His horses had already been +confiscated and he could give them no remounts. + +But the Boers decided to rest awhile and off-saddled their worn +horses, who soon found their way to the river bank where they could +drink and graze on the tender grass. Jafta was very nervous and urged +the party to saddle and get away. + +His anxiety proved justified, for while they were arguing they saw the +squadron of British horse coming at a gallop less than a quarter of a +mile away. It seems that kaffirs had seen the Boers and betrayed them. + +Jafta was in a quandary. The safe thing for him to do was to order his +impi to seize the Boers and then turn them over to the English. While +he was making up his mind one of my uncles ordered his companions to +pick up their saddles, bridles, and rifles, and duck into Jafta's +royal hut. As they were doing this he shouted some instructions to +Jafta. + +A moment later the Britishers reached the entrance to the kraal. +Jafta, escorted by his indunas, went to meet them. Their officer was +impressed with his regal air and recognized him as king of the Mapors. +They shook hands, and then, through his interpreter, the officer asked +about the four Boer fugitives. + +"Yes, Nkoos, they were here," Jafta admitted, "but I was afraid to +give them any food or help. They were very tired and their horses were +tired also. But they went on." + +"How long ago was that?" the Englishman asked. + +"When the sun was over there," said Jafta, pointing. He indicated a +space of about an hour. + +"Well, we must pursue them," said the officer. + +"But you look tired," suggested the wily Jafta, "and your horses are +over-taxed. Won't you rest a while and have some tswala and refresh +yourselves? Already it is the hour when there are no shadows (midday) +and it is time to sleep." + +The Britisher let himself be lured from the stern path of warlike duty +and accepted. The horses were turned loose to graze and drink, and the +Englishmen partook heartily of tswala and soon dozed off to sleep. The +Boers, inside the hot hut, could do nothing, so they too went to +sleep. It was a funny situation, had it not been so serious. These +enemies were peacefully asleep within a few feet of one another. + +About three o'clock there was a general stirring and every one waked +up. The British troopers had never seen the inside of a royal kraal +before, and they asked Jafta if they might be shown about. The king +immediately assented and appointed some of his indunas to act as +guides. It was all new and interesting to the Englishmen and they were +soon about fifty yards away from Jafta's hut. + +This was the chance the Boers were waiting for. They slipped out and +gathered up the Britishers' equipment, including firearms, and stowed +it in the hut. A pistol was poked into Jafta's belly and he was also +put in his "palace." A few moments later the Englishmen returned and +found themselves facing the Boer rifles. They surrendered. + +Everything was well with our party and they could have made their +escape, taking as many of the British as they wanted as prisoners. But +they knew that the Mapor king would have to pay for his duplicity, and +thus decided that he must be protected. + +Whereupon they opened a discussion with the commander of the British +party. They informed him that they would take all the Britishers as +prisoners to their own headquarters unless he agreed to the +proposition that they made. It was this: First, the English must swear +not to give evidence against Jafta at their headquarters; second, they +must allow the Boers to have four fresh horses; third, they must give +the Boers a certain start before again taking up their pursuit. If the +British would agree to these conditions, the Boers would call +everything square and each party would forget that it had ever met the +other. + +This proposal struck the British as a good sporting chance, so they +accepted it. Everything was agreed to as demanded. Since there was no +reason for further hostility for the time being, the Boers returned +their arms and equipment to the British and both had a merry feast +that night, during which they consumed all of Jafta's tswala. + +Next morning the Boers left at dawn and did not see these Britishers +for some time. Strange as it may appear, these same parties later met +in a battle not far from Jafta's kraal and one of my uncles was shot. +The same British officer was in command of the troops who captured him +and saw that he was treated with every consideration, making him feel +more like an honored guest than a wounded prisoner-of-war. This +officer, by the way, remained in South Africa after the war, and he +usually visits Rietvlei every Christmas and is regarded as one of the +best friends the O'Neil family has. + +During the Boer War, Oom Tuys was held accountable for the peace of +Swaziland by both our people and the British. It was contrary to +agreements to use kaffirs in the war, and Tuys made several trips to +Zombode, the seat of Labotsibeni, to make sure that the Swazis were +keeping out of the conflict. Later I heard him tell my father that he +kept both Labotsibeni and Tzaneen quiet by pointing out to them that a +word from him would bring the war to their country. + +On one of his trips Tuys dropped in to see our old friend Umzulek and +came back with the report that the kaffir chief was minding his own +business and obeying orders. However, he made Tuys a proposition that +showed him to be still willing to make trouble, if it were profitable. + +"The old rascal suggested that he make a demonstration with all his +impis against our borders," my uncle reported. "If he made a great +enough showing, he thought, and news of it reached Oom Paul, our +President would be willing to pay him tribute to keep the peace. It +seems he has been thinking about Buno's monthly gift of two thousand +pounds and the gin that went with it. He has a sort of feeling that it +is a shame to let this money get out of the family! The crafty beggar +only hinted at his scheme at first, but I finally smoked him out and +he admitted what was in his mind." + +"What did you tell him?" my father asked, glancing at Tuys keenly. +Father remembered the days of Buno, when ugly rumors used to float out +concerning Tuys's activities in Swaziland. + +"I told him to go to hell," Tuys exclaimed, "or I would come with many +rifles and send him there!" + +Inasmuch as Umzulek could have no conception of what my uncle meant by +"hell", since the Swazis have no such place in their daily thought, it +is safe to assume that Tuys was using a figure of speech. +Nevertheless, he gave Umzulek to understand that it would be unhealthy +for him to start a row along the border. + +We were still living in Belfast when the war came to an end. Our home +at Rietvlei was in ruins and it was almost a year before my father was +able to get a portion of it rebuilt. However, before returning there +we lived for a time in Potchefstroom, where my father had interested +himself in some gold properties. Prospecting was always fascinating to +him and he was usually successful in these ventures. + +His English secretary remained in Belfast, safe-guarding his interests +there and making frequent visits to the homestead in the Valley of +Reeds. Our kaffir farmers and servants had been widely scattered by +the war, but soon began to drift back. Each told a different tale of +his wanderings, and many of these were quite harrowing. A number of +our people had escaped to Jafta's kraal and not a few had gone into +Swaziland until the war ended. + +Klaas, our old jockey and one of my dearest playmates, had disappeared +during the second year of the war, but one day my father told me that +he had returned to Rietvlei. Father was about to make one of his +periodical trips to Belfast and the Valley of Reeds, and he promised +to bring Klaas back with him to Potchefstroom. + +He drove out to Rietvlei from Belfast and found Klaas very glad to see +him. The little fellow was thin and worn-looking, but scrupulously +clean. Father installed him again as his driver and next day started +back for Potchefstroom. A mile or so from the old house father got out +of the wagon to inspect a plantation. He was about seventy-five yards +from the wagon when a threatening thunder-storm broke and a single +bolt of lightning killed Klaas and both horses! This was a great blow +to all of us, because we had come to regard the little black boy with +genuine affection. + +Not long after we returned to Rietvlei--such a happy homecoming as it +was!--my father decided the time had come for me to get an education. +Many of the old Boers frowned upon the thought of sending their sons +abroad to be educated, feeling that they would never care to return to +the farms their ancestors had founded in the wilderness with such +bravery and determination. My father, however, was different. He +believed that his sons should be abreast of the times, and he sent me +to boarding-school and later to universities in Scotland and America, +where I received my training as a physician. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +Back to Rietvlei from Harvard--I locate in Ermelo--Tuys brings news +that Sebuza is to be crowned king of Swaziland--I decide to make a +picture record of the coronation--The trek to Zombode to get the royal +permission--Snyman plays ghost and almost gets killed--Visit to +Mbabane, capital of Swaziland. + + +Soon after my graduation from Harvard University I returned to the +Transvaal. I had been away for years and it was good to get back to +the Valley of Reeds. Years in Scotland and the United States had left +their stamp on me, and my family and old friends chaffed me about +being an "outlander," telling me that now I was an American. I may +have had some of the externals, such as the clothing I had had made in +Cambridge, but my heart was still the heart of a Boer and I was glad +to get back to my own people. + +Father was proud to have a son who was a physician and arranged a +reception at Rietvlei to which all his friends and acquaintances came. +I was the hero of the hour, and it seemed strange when Tuys and some +of the old men who had known me as a boy called me "Mzaan Bakoor." I +had not heard my native name for years, and it brought back my boyhood +and the little playmates of the toy-factory days. + +Sibijaan was a grown man and a fine figure of a savage. He greeted me +with effusiveness and saluted me native-fashion as soon as we had +shaken hands. Father told me that he had been very useful about the +house and was well trained. Then he told me that Sibijaan belonged to +me and was to go with me wherever I went. When I spoke of this to my +old playmate, he was surprised that I should mention it. + +"Nkoos, what the ou baas says is so," he said. "I have never thought +it would be otherwise. When we were children your mother gave you into +my charge. Now that you are a man and I am a man, again I take up the +trust!" + +This suited me. I realized I would have to have some dependable boys +and I knew that Sibijaan was faithful, honest, and more intelligent +than any kaffir I had ever met. + +Meeting Tuys again brought back the several visits we had made to +Swaziland, and I asked him how things had gone with our friends, the +royal family. He said that the old arrangement was still in effect and +that Umzulek had settled down for good and was behaving himself. + +"Queen Labotsibeni is blind now, but she still rules as regent," he +said, "and Tzaneen is taking good care that no harm comes to her son, +Sebuza. This young savage is growing into a man and already has +gathered about him several impis. He is an insolent cub and will be +hard to manage when he becomes king. As the crown prince he is running +wild, and it seems he has been impertinent to the British Resident at +Mbabane." + +Tuys then told me that he expected to make a short trip to Lebombo and +Zombode and asked me if I wanted to go along. My father, however, +seemed to think I had "better get over that foolishness" and settle +down, so I told Tuys I would go with him some other time. + +Next came the question where I was to practice medicine. There was a +good doctor in Belfast, who was a friend of our family, and it was +suggested that I join him. This, however, did not please me. I wanted +to be "on my own" and make my own career. This delighted my father, +and after some discussion we decided that I should locate in Ermelo. + +This was a little town of about fifteen hundred whites and several +thousand kaffirs, in the heart of a fine farming and grazing section +in the southeast section of the Transvaal. It has an elevation of +about a mile and is a delightful spot. However, I must admit that the +fact that Ermelo is only a little more than fifty miles from the +border of Swaziland finally decided my choice. + +After a few weeks with my family I started for Ermelo. Instead of +making an attempt to get there by rail, Sibijaan, Tuys, and I trekked +overland and had a most delightful trip. Seldom a night but we met +with friends of my father, and they always gave a warm welcome to "the +O'Neil from overseas." It seems that these simple people had wondered +over my absence, feeling that I would be too learned to ever want to +associate with them again. They were intensely interested in the +United States, and many an hour I spent telling them about its +wonders. I happened to have pictures of New York among my dunnage, and +I dug these out and showed them. Naturally, the towering "skyscrapers" +were a most wonderful thing to these Boers, many of whom had never +seen a building of more than two stories. I always remember the remark +made by one bearded patriarch when he looked at the photograph of the +Flatiron Building. + +"This is a modern Tower of Babel," he said, pointing at the structure +with a stubby forefinger. "These Americans must be good and religious +people or God would throw down such a tower!" + +When I explained to him that it was built of steel covered with stone +and told him that there were many other greater buildings, he was +impressed, but not astonished. + +"If it is God's will, these Americans will conquer the world," he +concluded. + +I then told him that war had been forced on America and her armies +were even then in France fighting the Germans. He knew a good deal +about the war and was naturally an enemy of England, which meant that +he was friendly to the Germans. The fact that America had been forced +into the conflict carried great weight with him, however, and I had a +feeling that his pro-Germanism was much weakened by this knowledge. + +I quickly found a home in Ermelo and settled down to practice +medicine. My work there was hard but interesting. Its chief delight +was the fact that I spent most of my time outdoors. A round of visits +soon meant that I would be gone several days, spending most of the +time in the saddle. Many trips could be made by motor, particularly +the periodical ones to the mines, but most of my Boer patients lived +where motors could not travel. Except for the mining companies which +had appointed me their resident physician, my patients were all white +people. The Boers are a hardy lot and hate to admit that they are ill. +Hence, when I received a call to a Boer farm, I always expected the +worst and was seldom disappointed. + +Bit by bit my practice increased, and I began to regard Ermelo as my +permanent home. There were a number of pleasant people there, both +English and Boers, and we lived a very contented busy life. Sibijaan +turned out to be a valuable servant and did everything for me that he +could. Of course I made him head boy about my place, and he kept the +other servants in good order and saw that all things went right. + +Oom Tuys stayed with me frequently, and his visits were always +welcome. He wandered about the Transvaal a great deal and was a source +of information of all sorts. It was in December, 1918, that he brought +me news that interested me deeply. + +"I have come from Zombode," he said, "and there is hell to pay in +Swaziland. Old Labotsibeni tells me that Tzaneen and her right-hand +man, Lochien, are plotting to have Sebuza made king and are making +preparations for his coronation. Lomwazi, who is a son of the old +queen and acts for her, tells me that Labotsibeni will not give up the +throne. She will have to die if she does. As you know, it is the Swazi +custom to sacrifice any ruler who loses the throne, and the old girl +doesn't want to be killed. + +"It looks to me as if there is going to be trouble. I talked to +Lomwazi and his mother and told them it was the agreement that she was +to remain regent until Sebuza came of age, and that the Boers and +British both would protect her when the young man was made king. This +seemed to reassure them, but I don't think Labotsibeni and her crowd +want to lose control. Yes, Owen, I think there is going to be trouble +in Swaziland." + +We talked the matter over, and I agreed with him that things were +going to happen soon in Swaziland. The Swazis had been at peace too +long a time for such a warlike nation and it would not take much to +start a war of some sort. The fact that Prince Sebuza was to be made +king stood out above everything else, and I made up my mind to see the +ceremonies. + +About this time I had become interested in the cinematograph. +Moving-pictures were a hobby of mine, and it suddenly occurred to me +that it would be a fine thing from an historic and educational +standpoint to take some reels of Sebuza's coronation. Tuys told me +that this would probably be the last affair of its kind, and it seemed +to me that a cinematograph record of it would be most valuable and +instructive. + +I suggested this to Oom Tuys, and he agreed with me. + +"But you'd better arrange to take the pictures," he cautioned me. "It +would be just a waste of time to rush into Swaziland with a camera and +take a chance. We don't know when the coronation is going to take +place, and what's more, we don't know that the Swazis would stand for +your taking pictures of it. The witch-doctors might tell them that you +were putting some sort of a curse on them, and then where would you be?" + +This put another light on the matter, and Tuys finally advised me to +see Labotsibeni and get her permission to film the ceremonies when +Sebuza was made king. I was afraid that I might not be able to get +what I wanted from Labotsibeni, so I asked Tuys to help me. This he +agreed to do, arranging to meet me in Zombode. This meant quite a trip +for him, because the British objected to his going into Swaziland, +owing to certain activities there in the past, and he had to go in +through Portuguese territory. I have forgotten what reasons the +government had for not wanting Tuys to visit Swaziland, but the +officials evidently had not forgotten--Britishers seldom do, +particularly when the matter affects one of their principalities. + +So it was arranged that Tuys should slip into Swaziland through +Komatipoort, a town on the border between Portuguese East Africa and +Labotsibeni's country. I was to leave as soon as I could, and we would +meet at Zombode and there transact our business with Lomwazi and the +old queen. + +I arranged for another doctor to handle my patients while I was away +and then set about making preparations for the trip. News of my +venture soon got about, and I was deluged with requests to take +friends along. If I had given in to them all, I would have invaded +Swaziland with an impi. As it was, I took Laurie Snyman, a cousin of +mine, and Joel Biddy, the accountant of the little bank in Ermelo. +Snyman had some years before been postmaster at Mbabane, the +government seat of Swaziland, while Biddy had been a useful friend on +many occasions. + +We had some interesting adventures on the trip, but suffered intensely +from the weather. Heavy storms dogged us all the way and made life +miserable. We traveled light, but the rains prevented us making good +time. Our outfit consisted of a wagonette, drawn by mules, in which we +had intended to ride. Sibijaan was our cook and general handy man, +while the mules and wagonette were in charge of Tuis, a half-breed +Basuto bushman. + +The rains made the roads so heavy that it was all the mules could do +to drag the wagonette. Hence we had to walk practically the entire +way, and it was "foot-slogging" of the hardest. Tuis was a very +obstinate kaffir and made a nuisance of himself on every opportunity. +If we had not needed him so badly, I would have either killed him or +sent him back. + +One of the features of the trip was the fact that both Sibijaan and +Tuis were constantly ill. That is, they said they were. The only +medicine which seemed to help them was gin, and they would frequently +feign illness to get some. Now and then I would refuse, and then Tuis +would give an exhibition of sulking that was wonderful. Of course it +is strictly against the law to give alcohol to kaffirs in the +Transvaal, but the fact that it was administered as "muti," or +medicine, made the act less criminal. Those boys of mine, however, +needed "muti" frequently, but the rain was a sort of justification, +for I know that we white men were only able to keep going by using it. + +On the second day out of Ermelo we ran into the Scottish section of +our country. The little villages there have such names as Lochiel and +New Scotland, and the people are quite as Scottish as these names. In +fact, we were able to get some oat cakes at one of the farm-houses. +These would have been rusks, had the people been Boers. + +Although our trek had been miserable enough so far, we did not have +any real trouble until we reached the Masuto River. It was swollen by +the heavy rains and the ford was washed out. Instead of the usual +clear rivulet, it had become a raging torrent of muddy water. We had +to cross it or go back, so we made camp on its bank and held a council +of war. All our blankets and supplies were soaked through, and a fire +could not be started. We were just about as uncomfortable as we could +be. + +Just when we were beginning to despair, a Scotch civil engineer showed +up. He was building a bridge over the Masuto, his entire working force +consisting of kaffirs. He proved a cheerful person and made light of +our troubles. This was well enough for him, since he had a good camp a +short distance away, while we were marooned on a desert of dampness. I +suggested to him that we would appreciate some hot tea or coffee, but +he carefully refrained from inviting us to his camp to have some. +Instead, he told us that we could get what we wanted from Oom Van der +Merwe, who had a farm not far distant. The Scotch are a careful and +canny people! + +We trudged over to the Boer farm and received a cordial welcome. They +received us with open arms and insisted that we remain there for a few +days, or at least until the rain stopped. This we could not do, since +I had made the Zombode appointment with Tuys and did not want him to +have to wait so long that he would give us up and leave Swaziland. + +The farmer's womenfolk gave us all the hot coffee we would drink, and +then supplied us with bread, butter, milk, and the hind quarter of a +sheep. We returned to our thoroughly soaked camp very reluctantly and +passed a most miserable night. + +Next morning we tackled the problem of getting across the Masuto, +which had risen further during the night. The Scotch engineer came to +our assistance with good advice, and this is all he would have offered +had I not discovered that he had several cables stretched across the +river. After much argument he agreed to let us use one of the cables +to get the wagonette and supplies across. This was done, although with +great difficulty. + +Knowing we would have to swim for it, we white men had put our clothes +in the wagonette. The kaffir boys did not wear enough to matter. The +Scotchman consoled us by telling us that we were a ludicrous sight, +and we must have been! There we stood, naked, cold, and disgusted, our +entire possessions on the far bank and facing the prospect of swimming +the turbulent river, driving the mules across at the same time. +However, it had to be done, so we plunged in. The current was strong +and we crawled ashore a full half mile below the wagonette. + +True to his bastard breed, one of the mules turned back in midstream +and proceeded calmly to the take-off bank of the river. We had to swim +back and get him, but it was adding insult to injury when he tried to +run away and we had to chase him through the long grass and +undergrowth of the river's edge. Finally we captured the brute and +then swam the river for the third time as his watchful escort. + +We were dead tired when we reached the wagonette and faced the stiff +climb to the top of a little mountain. The road was in the worst +possible condition, so we decided to camp for a day or two until the +weather became better. As things were, we could not have gone on, +anyway. + +As soon as camp was pitched, we looked about a bit and discovered the +ruins of an old Boer farm-house a little way up the river. There was a +trickle of smoke coming out of the chimney and this encouraged us to +visit the place as soon as possible. The thought of fire was +heartening; it meant hot things to drink and possibly warm food. When +I came close to it I saw that there were two rooms, badly roofed over, +but the blackened walls showed that the old house had been quite an +imposing building. + +My knock was answered by a young Boer with wild, hunted eyes. He +looked us over as we stood there in the pouring rain, and a moment +later smiled graciously and invited us in. When the door closed he +ceremoniously extended his hand and we shook hands all around. + +"Strangers seldom come during the storms," he said, "and I was +surprised to hear your knock. I was cooking some coffee in the back +room and now I shall add enough for all of us." + +This was a welcome thought to us, and in a little while our drooping +spirits were revived by the hot drink. Then we cooked the food we had +brought with us and had a merry party. It seems the young fellow was +quite bucked up over having visitors and he did well by the gin we had +brought with us. + +But still it rained outside! It came down as it only can in the +Transvaal, and that means a steady, relentless downpour which looked +as though it would last for days. We decided to make ourselves as +comfortable as possible, and our host insisted that we take over his +house. He was a very pleasant fellow and before long we were good +friends. + +It seems that the old house had been the home of his parents and +grandparents. It was a pioneer homestead and had been burned by the +British during the Boer War. Both his parents had died there and the +place had never been rebuilt. He had been born in the room in which we +rested and he told us that he hoped some day to rebuild and make his +thousands of acres profitable. + +Bit by bit we got the story of the place from him. It had been +destroyed in retaliation for some act of treachery, for which, he +assured us, his parents were not responsible. I asked him if he did +not get lonesome living there by himself and suggested that he ought +to get a wife to keep him company. My question opened up a queer side +of his character, and then we understood the hunted look in his eyes. + +"By day," he said slowly, "I don't mind being here alone. In good +weather people cross the river and come to me to buy things. I have a +store, you know, and sometimes as many as five or six come each week." + +This was news to us. We did not see any evidence of a store, but this +probably explained the small boxes and bundles in the back room. + +"It is the night that is terrible," he went on, lowering his voice as +though afraid of being overheard. "Those who died here come back and +look into the windows and cry out with awful voices. They cannot rest, +and must come back to this place where they were killed. Some of them +are our people and others the British, and sometimes they fight the +battle over again!" + +For a moment I thought he was guying us, but a glance at his eyes told +me that he was in deadly earnest. Snyman and Biddy caught his spirit +and egged him on to tell more ghost stories. Now the ignorant Boer is +very superstitious, so that it was not long before we had all kinds of +ghosts loose about the place. The young Boer took the stories +seriously, and those two rascals soon had him quite terrified. A +sudden burst of thunder made him jump as though he had been shot. + +Well, we told ghost stories and tales of other supernatural +visitations for some time. Then, the rain letting up a bit, we went +back to our camp, to find that Sibijaan had finally succeeded in +getting a fairly decent fire going. Before leaving we had bought the +store out. It only contained quantities of "flag" cigarettes, coffee, +and yellow sugar, but we took all we could get. The Boer assured us +that he had sent to Ermelo for a large stock of goods which would be +at our disposal as soon as the roads allowed it to be brought in. + +Late that afternoon it looked as though the stormy weather was +breaking away, and this cheered us up. We planned to start at dawn +next morning and make up for lost time by forced marches. Shortly +after dark Snyman announced that he was going to visit the young Boer +again. He went out, leaving Biddy and me smoking our pipes in the tent. + +Snyman had been gone for about half an hour when the stillness of the +night was shattered by a succession of rifle shots. They came from the +direction of the ruined house. We could hear some one shouting, also, +and each outburst was followed by more shots. + +With one motion I snuffed our candle and dived to the wet floor of the +tent. Biddy was almost as quick, and swore softly when his face hit my +heels. We neither of us could imagine what was taking place, but our +training taught us that the ground was the safest place when people +began shooting wildly. + +We had hardly got our breath when Snyman dashed into the tent, falling +over us and almost pulling it down. He had been running hard and was +fairly gasping for breath. Presently he recovered sufficiently to +loose a volley of profanity in Dutch and English. When he calmed down +a little--the shooting had stopped by this time--we asked him what all +the shooting was about and why he had returned in such haste. + +"Why, that poor ignorant fool thought he could shoot a ghost!" he +said, beginning to laugh. "I went to see if there were any ghosts +around his old house, and when I didn't find any, I felt that he ought +not to be disappointed, so I played ghost for him. I sneaked about the +house and hid in the old ruins, making all sorts of creepy noises, I +must have scared him until he went crazy. + +"I was just beginning to enjoy myself when his light went out. Then I +thought I had scared him off the map. But I was wrong, very wrong! He +must have opened the door quietly, for when I started out of the ruins +he opened up with his Mauser. I dropped flat, but it seemed to me that +a volley of bullets crawled down my back. A moment later he started +shooting in another direction, and then I got up and ran. I'll bet the +springbok doesn't live that could have caught me!" + +So this was the explanation of the sudden firing. We examined Snyman +and found that two bullets had gone through his coat, showing that +even in his fear the young fellow had shot like a true Boer. Snyman +did not seem much upset over being shot at, but was quite indignant at +the fact that the "ghost hunter" had used a rifle. + +"It just shows the ignorance of these back-country Boers," he said, +ruefully examining his torn coat. "This damned fool spends his nights +quaking because he thinks his old farm is full of ghosts, and then he +takes down the ancestral rifle and goes out and tries to kill them. As +though he could shoot a ghost!" + +Before dawn the next morning the young Boer arrived at our camp. While +he was taking coffee with us he related his adventure of the night +before. He seemed to have no suspicion of Snyman, who must have done a +wonderful job. According to his story a whole battalion of British +ghosts had attacked his stronghold. He described their wailing and +threatening cries, and then told how he had finally driven them off +with his father's rifle. + +He was so earnest and pathetic that we all felt sorry for him. His +ignorance was extraordinary, even when his isolation was considered. +We were sorry to leave him, and I remember looking back as we climbed +the hill road to see him looking wistfully after us. + +The roads were so bad that we had to walk, and it was not until the +third day that we reached Mbabane, the official capital of Swaziland. +This is about fifteen miles over the border, and the village is on the +top of a low mountain. Mbabane is the new capital of Swaziland and was +founded in 1904. The old capital, Bremersdorp, was destroyed by our +people during the Boer War. + +The long slopes leading up to the village are nearly all covered with +plantations, which have been laid out by Robert L. Dickson, head of +the Swaziland Trading Company. The settlement is a most picturesque +and charming place, and there are a number of pleasant English people +dwelling there. These white families live very well, and I can safely +say that Mbabane is the most delightful place in that whole section of +the Transvaal. + +Mr. Dickson is a remarkable character who has lived in South Africa +practically all his life. He is now about sixty-five years old, and no +visit to Mbabane is complete without at least one cup of tea with him +and his wife. Mrs. Dickson is a lovable old lady whose chief worries +seem to consist of guarding her vegetable plantation and finding her +glasses. + +The morning we called on Mr. Dickson, she came in and asked if he had +seen those errant glasses. His eyes twinkled when he answered, "No, my +dear, but I'm sure you'll find them in the cabbage patch!" She had +been there during the morning and his guess was correct, for one of +the black boys found the glasses draped over a young and hopeful +cabbage. + +Of course Mr. Dickson invited us to dinner, and this led to a typical +and amusing incident. Mrs. Dickson ordered her cook to prepare some +chickens for the meal, and the cook sent some of the Swazi servants to +get the fowls. + +Now a friend of mine, John Pythian, engineer at the tin mines nearby, +lived next door to the Dicksons. He was a chicken fancier and had some +very fine birds. As luck or indolence would have it, Mrs. Dickson's +servants caught some of his chickens instead of her own. Pythian's +servant reported this to him--he was still in bed at the time--and he +instructed his boy to tell Mrs. Dickson's Swazis to return the chickens. + +Stronger in courage than judgment, the boy attacked the enemy and +there was a battle. It was short, however, because Mrs. Dickson heard +the row and chased Pythian's boy away. By the time he reported to his +master, the chickens were slain. Pythian then sent his boy to get the +native police, and these soon arrived. + +Mrs. Dickson protested and argued that her boys were innocent, but +about this time, Mr. Honey, British Royal Commissioner for Swaziland, +came on the scene in all his majesty. He held an impromptu court and +heard both sides of the case. After deliberation, in which we all +tried to assist him, he delivered his verdict. + +"From the evidence I judge that Mrs. Dickson's boys are innocent in +that they did not realize they were killing Mr. Pythian's chickens," +he said. "However, the chickens have been killed on the order of Mrs. +Dickson, so I think the only thing to do is to arrest Mrs. Dickson!" + +Whereupon Mrs. Dickson became indignant and demanded that the +commissioner carry out his sentence. + +"If he does," she said threateningly, "I can guarantee that the High +Commissioner for Swaziland is going to feel very low in his mind +before I invite him to dinner again!" + +Thus the chicken-stealing ended in a joke, and Pythian was one of the +gayest at dinner that night. He remarked, however, that it was no +wonder that the roast chicken was so choice, since the birds had been +imported all the way from some place in India! + +During the meal I sat next to the Commissioner and brought up the +question of the crowning of the new Swazi king. I wanted to find out +what the government thought about it before I made final arrangements +at Zombode. + +"There seems to be a difference of opinion regarding this pup, +Sebuza," he said. "It looks as though there might be a row either +before or soon after he is made king. Of course he is the heir to the +job, so there can be no good reason for keeping him out. However, +Labotsibeni has been a steady old girl and has kept fairly good order +around Zombode, and it's a shame we can't keep her. But she's over one +hundred years old, and now Lomwazi seems to be fairly running +Swaziland. Sebuza will have to be king some day, but it will be good +policy to maintain present conditions as long as possible. We have +peace now, and I'd dislike to see anything happen that might start a +war." + +I could see that the Commissioner was none too anxious to have Sebuza +take over the throne. This suited me, for I knew that it would be some +time before I was equipped with the right outfit to take the pictures +I was after. If Sebuza's coronation could be put off for a year, it +would suit me even better. + +All the white residents of Mbabane treated us with the greatest +kindness and hospitality. They could not do too much for us. There are +a number of interesting things about the settlement. It is essentially +a little English village set down in the heart of the most primitive +and savage principality of the empire. Like all the rest of the +English who exile themselves from home, these people had brought a +little bit of the motherland with them. + +The jail, or "gaol," as they insist on writing it, is an institution +in Mbabane, but I must say there is not much punishment about it. The +prisoners wear the convict garb, but you meet them all over the +village. They are usually working in the gardens, and I have often run +across them three and four miles from their penitential abode. No +prisoner has ever been known to escape; perhaps the regular food has +something to do with this. + +There are a number of interesting characters who live in Mbabane year +in and year out. One of these is Allister Miller, a man of remarkable +personality, energy, and business ability. He has several immense +ranches and owns more than fifty thousand head of fine cattle. His +bulls have been imported from all over the world and his cattle have +made him a very rich man. Swaziland is an ideal stock-raising country +and it is estimated that the Swazis themselves own more than three +hundred thousand head of cattle. + +Probably the most interesting character in Mbabane is known to every +one as "Matt." He is an accountant by profession. His nose has made +him famous, and I am sure there is not another like it in the whole +world. It is immense in size and has all the vivid tints of the +"rum-nose" that distinguishes the confirmed tippler. All strangers are +advised to see Matt's nose or count their visit to Mbabane a rank +failure. + +There are a number of stories about him, one of the best being about +his experience as an inmate of the gaol. It seems that he was +accountant for a trading company and had made a mess of its books. +Money was missing and he could not account for it. Although it was +felt that he had not taken it, yet he was responsible and was +sentenced to gaol for six months. Now the warden of the gaol trusted +Matt and put him to work on the books. In addition, he used to loan +Matt to do little jobs of carpentering and painting at houses in the +village. This led to trouble. The little tin shanty, by courtesy "The +Hotel," was much like some of the saloons in the "cow towns" of the +old West in the United States. Ranchers, traders, and adventurers +would congregate there and tell stories while they drank gin, whiskey, +and combinations of the same. Matt was in the habit of passing the +"hotel" each evening on his return to the gaol, and soon the +roisterers began inviting him in to have a drink or two. + +One night there was a particularly joyous party, and Matt drank so +much that he forgot to return to the gaol on time. It was midnight +before he got there, and the jailer had already gone to bed. Matt went +to his house and woke him, and this annoyed the official very much. So +much so, in fact, that he refused to get up and let Matt into the +gaol. Matt was reduced to the ignominy of returning to the hotel and +bunking there. Next morning he made a charge against the jailer for +not allowing him to serve out his sentence! Commissioner Honey +discharged him and reprimanded the jailer for neglect of duty. + +Some years before Snyman had been postmaster at Mbabane and had made +many friends, with the result that he had a most enjoyable visit. The +morning we left to continue our trek to Zombode he was approached by +Manaan, an old Swazi chief, who wanted to shake hands with him. Manaan +was a typical kaffir, and Snyman told me a story about him which well +illustrates the characteristics of the breed. + +"When I was at the post-office here," Snyman said, "Manaan and some of +his sons went to the Transvaal to work in the gold mines. According to +the law, their money was deposited for them in the savings-bank at +Johannesburg, and the whole amount was put in the name of the old +chief. I was still postmaster when Manaan and his sons returned to +Swaziland. + +"One morning I was very busy when I saw Manaan standing at the door. +Of course he would not enter until I spoke to him. I grunted at the +old boy and he came in, with the usual 'Nkoos!' and his hands flung +up. He stood at the counter for a while, waiting for me to speak to him. + +"Finally I asked, 'Ou funaan?' which means 'What do you want?' + +"'Ou funa mali!' he answered, meaning 'I want some money.' + +"Then the old boy walked over to the corner of the room and sat down. +From the top of his majuba, or loin-cloth, he produced a little bundle +wrapped in an abundance of dirty rags and tied with some leather +thongs. Then he knelt down, as is the custom of the Swazis, and +proceeded to spread out the contents of the bundle. + +"When he unwrapped the outer cover there was another and yet another, +the last covering being the hide of some small animal. After this was +undone there was a paper wrapping, and inside this was his savings +account deposit book! This he presented to me with pride. + +"'Ou shiai intzinga; ou funa mali,' he said, which meant 'Telegraph to +the place where this money is deposited; I want to draw it.' + +"'Lunglli,' I replied; 'wati nalie e'lali bapa ou buia mfigo uti zouk +mali,' which meant, 'When the sun is over there come back and I will +give you the money.' + +"I thought I would get a reply by sunset, and Manaan arrived promptly +after I had heard from Johannesburg. He entered on my recognition, +stacked his knob-kerrie, shield, and assegai in the corner, and came +up to the counter. + +"I counted out the money to him. There were twenty-four pounds, and +ten shillings for interest. This I had to explain to him, and when he +understood that it was a gift he spent the next ten minutes in +praising the white men. He was so accustomed to being taxed and paying +for everything that to get these extra ten shillings was a shock. + +"Manaan then went over to his corner, knelt down, and counted the +money over six or seven times. He would take it up, examine it, and +put it down again and again. He seemed fascinated by the sovereigns. +Finally he gathered it up and walked over to the counter. Piling it up +in front of me, he said: + +"'E'musla implea mene bonela e'begga panzi!' which means 'Very nice +indeed! I have had a look at it; it is wonderful! Now please put it +away again!' + +"I felt like a fool. I had cancelled his account, and now the old +nuisance wanted to re-open it and put his money in the bank again. But +of course I did it. All Manaan wanted was to see and feel his money, +so that he would be sure it was still there!" + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +I meet Labotsibeni again--Flattering a savage queen--Explaining the +"little black magic box"--Curing rheumatism with tooth-paste, +vaseline, and hair oil--Women as currency--Gin, gold, and cows pay for +the picture rights--The "flu" strikes--Jennie, the "blaau app", and +the peacocks' tails. + + +From Mbabane it is only a short distance to the top of the mountain +from which the descent is made into Ezulweni, the beautiful Valley of +Heaven. As we reached the top I pointed out Sheba's Breasts and the +Place of Execution to my companions. These peaks could be seen far off +to the right, where the sun picked them out in the early morning mist. + +Coming down the mountain was hard work, the grade being one in four at +many places. We walked, because it would only have made it harder for +the mules if we had kept our seats in the wagonette. At the bottom of +the steep trail stands the place of Harry Niles, an old-time trader +who has settled down there. He has a picturesque little home and has +surrounded the house with banana trees, papayas, and semi-tropical +fruits. Niles is a charming old man who retired from active business +to live out his remaining years in this garden spot. He has no +interest in outside affairs and lives an ideal existence, if one likes +that sort of thing. His likes and dislikes are quickly expressed, and +this is probably one of the reasons that make him contented with his +life of isolation. If he likes you, however, he can be more hospitable +than any one I know. He will feed you with the most delicious salads, +fresh meat, and other delicacies, and there is always something rare +to drink. His salads are famous, so that his few friends in Mbabane +often make the hard trek to his little home to share one of them. + +Coming into the Valley of Heaven from Mbabane, instead of from +Rietvlei, made it a much shorter distance to Zombode. We wanted to get +there as soon as possible, since we had already been delayed by the +wretched weather, so we only had a drink with Niles and then pushed +on. He told me that he had heard that the Swazis were getting ready to +acknowledge Sebuza as king, but he had no definite information about it. + +"What's more," he added, "I don't give a damn! Just so long as these +royal niggers keep out of my way I'll keep out of theirs. They know +better than to bother me, and it makes no difference to me who is king!" + +Shortly before we came in sight of Zombode, Oom Tuys came riding down +the trail. A Swazi runner had brought word that we were coming, and my +uncle had come out to meet me. I was very glad to see him and he was +as cheerful as ever. He told me that he had had no difficulty in +getting into Swaziland, as he had come in through Komatipoort, but he +understood that word had gone to Mbabane that he was at Zombode and he +wanted to cut his stay as short as possible. + +"It is a shame that the great British Empire should hound one poor +lone Boer trader," he said, his eyes twinkling, "and I feel very much +afraid. I hate to disturb the peace of mind of the High Commissioner, +so I don't want to stay here any longer than necessary." + +Then he began to plan with me how to get our business over as quickly +as possible. I had not been to Swaziland since my youth, and things +were different now. Instead of our being met by a welcoming party of +indunas, only a few curious savages and a horde of children came out +to watch us arrive. The former proud formality of the royal kraal +seemed lacking, and when I asked Tuys about it he explained that since +Queen Labotsibeni had become blind "the old customs had gone to seed." + +There was still one formality about seeing her, however. This +consisted of announcing your presence by sending her a bottle of gin +and then waiting until she sent for you. Tuys explained to me that the +old queen was terribly vain and desired, above all things, to be +flattered. She liked to pretend that she could still see, and Tuys +warned me under no circumstances to admit that I thought she could not. + +"You want to look out for Lomwazi, my boy," he added. "He has more +brains than all the rest put together and is a very wily devil. He +never leaves the side of the old queen, and she can't say a word that +he doesn't hear. Look out for him!" + +He also advised me to keep my eye on Debeseembie, a brother of Lomwazi +and the favorite son of the old queen. Debeseembie was another +faithful watchdog of the royal hut and was always somewhere around. + +This was the first time I had seen Labotsibeni since I was a little +boy, hence I was keenly interested in her apart from the fact that I +hoped to obtain her permission to take pictures of Sebuza's +coronation. It is well to observe here that I use the word +"coronation" for lack of a better term. The Swazi king wears no crown, +and I suppose the right but awkward phrase would be to speak of +Sebuza's "induction as king." + +Lomwazi came out to meet us as we entered the royal kraal and readily +agreed to convey the gin-present to his royal mistress. When I slipped +him a bottle for himself, his haughty expression immediately became +one of joy. A little gin goes a long way with the Swazis. + +In a very short time he returned and said that the queen would see us. +In addition to the present sent ahead when an interview is desired +with the queen, it is also proper etiquette to leave a present when +the interview is over. Knowing this, I took along a present--that is, +another bottle of gin. + +Now the royal kraal at Zombode was built with a little kraal inside +the main one, and in the middle of that was Labotsibeni's reception +hall or audience chamber. This was the most unusual building in +Swaziland. It had brick walls about four feet high and was about ten +by fifteen feet in size. The arched grass roof was about head high in +the middle, but one had to stoop low to enter, because the three +openings were only the height of the brick wall. No one has ever +explained how these bricks came to Zombode. There are no bricks in +Swaziland and it struck me as extraordinary that I should see them +there. + +Lomwazi led us to the reception hut and we waited for him to announce +us. I could see Labotsibeni lying on a mat in the center of the floor +with a number of her women and warriors about her. She seemed very fat +and huge, and very very old. + +"Nkosikaas! All powerful Queen of Swaziland," Lomwazi chanted. "Oom +Tuys and Mzaan Bakoor, great white indunas, have come to see you. They +bring presents and would be overjoyed forever if you would look upon +them and accept their great tribute!" + +Some of this was true, but all of it was the proper sort of thing at +Zombode. Labotsibeni listened intently, and when her vizier finished +she spoke in her old cracked voice: + +"Tell my white sons that I am proud to welcome them to Swaziland and +will grant them an audience." + +Thereupon we entered the hut. There were at least a dozen +maids-of-honor attending the old queen, and several of these spread +mats for us to sit on. Some of these women were working on freshly +tanned hides from which they were fashioning skirts, and the odor of +the skins tainted the air of the hut. I am accustomed to this smell +and do not find it unpleasant, but both Snyman and Biddy soon had all +of it they could stand. + +The old queen lay on her stomach with her head propped up by her +hands. Within easy reach was a pile of leaves, and at intervals she +would take one of these, wipe her lips and fingers with it, and thrust +it through the open doorway. Her hands were small and beautifully +shaped and her nails were spotlessly clean and perfectly manicured. +Later I learned that her maids spent hours taking care of her hands, +their only tools for manicuring the royal nails being bits of broken +bottle-glass. + +Remembering Tuys's warning, I complimented her on her looks, beautiful +hands, and the cleanliness of her hut and kraal. I told her that her +royal abode was an example for all the other native kings of the +Transvaal and generally explained to her what a superior person she +was. She listened intently to my flattery and appreciated it greatly. + +Near her was the bottle of gin we had sent ahead. It was more than +half finished and she took a drink while I was delivering my +flattering oration. She reached for the bottle and Debeseembie +assisted her to get the drink by pouring out more than half an earthen +mug full of the fiery liquid. With one swallow she gulped it down, and +then almost choked. This gave me my cue, and I told her how moderate +she was and how refined in her way of drinking gin. + +"Why, Nkosikaas, if I were to give Jafta, king of the Mapors, a bottle +of gin," I said, "he wouldn't stop drinking until he had finished it, +and then he would soon become drunk. Whereas, you, with your royal +daintiness and delicacy, drink your gin like a queen!" + +This thought pleased her much and she thereupon took another drink, +which practically emptied the bottle. Of course I do not know that she +had consumed the first half of that bottle, but she certainly drank +enough in our presence to intoxicate any normal person. It was +strange, but it did not seem to have much effect on her. When she +spoke and drank, I noticed that her teeth were perfect. This, at the +age of more than one hundred years, is a great tribute to the Swazi +custom of cleaning the teeth with charcoal or sand after each meal. + +There was nothing private about our interview. While we talked indunas +came and went and the women were always in the hut. In addition, both +Lomwazi and Debeseembie were on hand all the time. After we had +exhausted all our compliments and small talk, Tuys broached the +subject of permission to take pictures of Sebuza's coronation. + +Here we ran against what seemed to be an insuperable obstacle. It was +impossible to make either the queen or Lomwazi understand what I +wanted. They had no conception whatever of what a photograph meant and +motion-pictures were entirely beyond their comprehension. Both Tuys +and I tried in every way to make them understand, but it was hopeless. +Finally I decided that the only thing to do would be to take a picture +of Lomwazi or the old queen and show Lomwazi what I was talking about. + +I persuaded him to get Labotsibeni to allow herself to be carried +outside the hut into the sunlight, and there I took a picture of her. +Then I photographed Lomwazi, Debeseembie, and a group of others. I +explained to them that I would show them the pictures the next day, as +I hoped to have them developed and printed by that time. After the +picture-taking we went back inside the hut, and then the old queen +became more friendly and told me her troubles. It seems she suffered +with rheumatism in the shoulders and back. This was due to the fact +that her upper body was usually bare and that she laid in the draught +between the openings of the hut. When cold, she would cover herself +with a magnificent fur rug, but this did not help her rheumatism much. + +On hearing of her aches and pains, Tuys's evil genius gave him an +inspiration and he proceeded to get me into a pretty pickle. + +"Nkosikaas, you are in great good luck that we came to see you," he +told her. "Mzaan Bakoor is a great white witch-doctor and makes the +muti (medicine) that cures such pains as you have. He will make the +muti for you and will cure you!" + +Labotsibeni appeared much cheered by this suggestion. I was not, +however. I had no medicines with me and would gladly have kicked Tuys +for making the offer. Shortly after this we left the queen, with the +understanding that I was going to make the medicine that would cure +her rheumatism and would bring it to her as soon as it was ready. + +When we got back to our camp I blessed Tuys with a real Boer outburst +of profanity. + +"Why, Tuys, we'll make the old lady think that we are the worst sort +of fakirs," I told him. "She won't grant me the right to take the +pictures when she finds out that we have fooled her. You have made a +fine mess of things!" + +But Tuys laughed and laughed and laughed. He thought it was one of the +funniest situations he had ever seen. Looking back at it, I can see +the humor of it, but at that time I did not find it amusing. Tuys told +me I would have to go through with it and produce medicine that would +at least make his word good. So I went to work. All I had with me were +some toilet necessities. The "muti" was compounded at length, and this +is the way the prescription read: Two ounces each of tooth-paste, +vaseline, and hair-tonic. These I beat up until they were a loose +paste and then placed them in a glass jar bearing a very vivid label. +This jar had held my photographic chemicals. + +With impressive solemnity we returned and presented the muti to the +queen. Then I explained the treatment. Her maids were to take cloth +soaked in hot water and apply it to the aching parts until she could +stand it no longer. Then small portions of the muti were to be +thoroughly rubbed in until the pains departed. + +[Illustration: QUEEN LABOTSIBENI, MOTHER OF KING BUNO + +During Sebuza's infancy and boyhood, the throne receded to Queen +Labotsibeni, his grandmother. She was blind and more than one hundred +years old] + +[Illustration: LOMWAZI AND HIS COUNCIL OF INDUNAS, OR WAR CHIEFS] + +All this impressed Labotsibeni, but she insisted that the "great white +witch-doctor" apply the treatment. I had to do it--that is, if I +wanted to keep her favor. For an hour I massaged the old woman, and +when the last of the muti was rubbed in she announced that her pains +were gone and promptly fell asleep. The hot cloth, as I had guessed, +took the aches out of her shoulders and back and the villainous muti +bluffed her into a cure, which was good for the time being at least. +It was a fine piece of chicanery for a graduate of two of the greatest +medical colleges to have to practice, but it did the trick! + +Next morning we went to the royal hut as soon as we were sent for. The +same gin ritual had to be followed, and we found the old queen quite +happy and a trifle under the influence of the liquor. The pictures had +turned out well, and Lomwazi was amazed to see himself in all his +barbaric beauty. He is one of the strongest men in Swaziland and is +very vain concerning his athletic prowess. One of his greatest sports +is to wrestle with any one who will stand up to him, and he seldom +loses. Hence, when he saw himself in the pictures, he felt very proud. +Immediately he christened the camera "the white man's magic" and told +Labotsibeni all about it. I watched this talk, and it was pathetic. +Lomwazi explained as best he could what we had done and then handed +his mother the picture of herself, telling her to look at it. She held +it close to her eyes, and then said: + +"The white man's little black box is very wonderful! It must be a good +magic or my son would not recommend it so highly." + +If she had been able to see, she might have remarked that the picture +was a remarkably good likeness. It was the only time she was ever +photographed, and it seemed a shame that the old queen could not +appreciate it. + +Again we brought up the question of permission to take the coronation +pictures. I explained that we wanted to do the same with Sebuza as we +had done with them. This seemed to be all right, and we were getting +nearer our goal when Lomwazi brought up the question of paying for the +royal permission. He knew that the white man was not asking this favor +for fun, and it came to him that we ought to be made to pay for it. + +"Nkoos, you have come far to ask this permission," he said. "You have +trekked through the rain and sun and it has cost you time and money to +get here. You would not have done this if the queen's permission was +not of great value to you, would you?" + +I had to admit that I was not there entirely for my health, but +minimized the importance of the pictures to myself personally. + +"These pictures will show the glory of Swaziland to the whole world," +I protested. "I shall carry them over the great waters to all the +countries and there show the people what a wonderful land this is. I +will show the English, the Boers, and all others that Sebuza is a real +king. I will show the entire world that the son of Buno and the +grandson of Queen Labotsibeni rules one of the greatest nations in the +whole of Africa!" + +This oration flattered the vanity of the old queen and practically +settled the question. Even the primitive Swazi values publicity. +Labotsibeni agreed that we should have the royal permit to take the +coronation pictures, and the next question was what I would pay. This +was debated for some time. I tried to make Lomwazi set a price for the +permission, while he, cunning beggar, tried to get me to make an offer. + +Now the Swazi has only a few standards of value. He recognizes the +fact that women, gold, gin, and cattle have values that are stable +everywhere. These values are about as follows: + +One gold pound buys one cow; + +Five cows buy one woman; + +One quart of gin buys whatever it will, according to the degree with +which it is desired by a Swazi. + +Five cows, however, are not a standard price for all women. Only the +women of the plain people are valued at so low a figure. If the women +to be bought are of good family, that is, if they are the daughters of +indunas, they are worth more than five cows. I have known princesses +to be bought for as much as fifty cows. These were the exception, +however, since these girls were the daughters of a high chief. + +I was prepared to offer cattle, gin, and money, and had brought along +a certain amount of the latter. Lomwazi, however, started the deal +with women as his counters. + +"How many young women, all maidens, are you prepared to give?" he asked. + +"It would take too long a time to get the women," I objected, "and I +don't wish to trade women for the permission. I am ready to pay a +small amount of gin and money, and perhaps some cows, but I cannot get +women now." + +"Can't you get ten or fifteen women, Nkoos?" Labotsibeni asked in her +husky voice. "My son, Lomwazi, has but few wives and I have so few +maids. It would be very agreeable if you could get a small number of +women." + +Lomwazi agreed with her in this, and I had to argue for some time to +get out of the woman phase of the bargaining. Oom Tuys, although he +knew it was against the law for white men to buy and sell women, +pooh-poohed my scruples and told me to turn him loose and he would get +me all the women I wanted. However, I remained firm in my refusal and +the dickering took another tack. + +"Well then, we'll buy the women we need," Lomwazi said. "Mzaan Bakoor, +you will have to give much gin and money, and also cows. The queen has +decided that one thousand pounds, one thousand quarts of gin, and one +thousand cows shall be the price." + +The old queen nodded her approval. I had not seen her confer with her +vizier and realized that he was acting on his own authority. This +showed me his power and how much the old lady trusted him. I then set +out to get the price down to where we could really talk business. I +had an idea that Lomwazi did not know how many there were in a +thousand, but had used that figure as a basis for the deal. + +When I suggested that the thousand figure was preposterous, he +reminded me that it was only as many as there were men in the royal +impi, thus proving that he actually knew what "one thousand" meant. + +We talked back and forth, Labotsibeni every now and then putting in a +word. The upshot of it all was that I agreed to pay five hundred +gallons of gin, five hundred gold pounds or sovereigns, and five +hundred cows for the right to take the pictures. + +Oom Tuys thought I was a fool to give them so much. + +"That is a tremendous price to pay for a few reels of these savages," +he said; "particularly, when there is a good chance that you will not +be ready to take the pictures before the coronation takes place. To +protect you, I shall make them promise to keep you informed as to when +the show will take place, so that you can get on the job." + +He then pinned down the old queen, Lomwazi, and Debeseembie to a +solemn promise that they would send me word as soon as preparations +were under way to make Sebuza king. It is a point of honor among the +royalty and high chiefs of the Swazis that their word is good, and +this promise assured me that I would not lose my opportunity. + +Next came the problem of paying for the rights to take the pictures. +Money I had with me, and I was soon able to buy enough cows to make up +the required number. The gin, however, was not so easy. It is against +the law to bring gin into Swaziland, although the authorities did not +object to a few bottles being brought to the old queen. On Tuys's +advice, I arranged that the five hundred gallons be brought in through +Komatipoort, from Portuguese territory. This confession, I suppose, +will make me liable to arrest when I return to the Transvaal. To avoid +detection, the gallon jugs were each packed in bags of straw +surrounded by chaff, being carried over the border by native women. +They looked as though they were carrying corn, and the government +officials let them pass without suspicion. + +After making the payment we set out for Ermelo. We had been about a +fortnight on our trip, and both Snyman and Biddy were anxious to get +back. We took the short-cut by way of Mbabane and made good time, the +roads being fairly hard. + +We had one shock, however. When we reached the Masuto River we found +that the "flu" had visited there during our absence. First the Scotch +engineer had died and been buried by the Boer farmer who had given us +food; then the farmer had died and been put away by the young +storekeeper with the hunted eyes; and finally he had died and been +hidden in a shallow grave near his store by some passing strangers. +All three were gone, and this cast a gloom over our party, so that we +were glad to leave the spot. + +The river had gone down and we were able to ford it without much +trouble, although Snyman had hard luck and fell out of the wagonette +into the only deep spot. + +I remembered that there were several women at the house of the dead +farmer, so we went there to pay our respects and offer them any +assistance we could. The house was closed and they were all gone, +evidently to some of their relatives near Ermelo. We were about to +return to the wagonette when I thought I saw something stirring near +an orange-tree back of the house. + +It was a "blaau app," or blue monkey, which was tied to the tree. The +farmer's women had forgotten the poor beast when they went away and it +was pathetically glad to see me. It must have been very hungry, for it +had been eating oranges, as the skins strewn on the ground showed. It +was the first time I had ever heard of a monkey eating such food. When +I cut it loose, the poor thing jumped into my arms and I took it back +to the wagonette, where we fed it. Biddy and Snyman soon started an +argument as to what its name should be. The first wanted to call it +"Labotsibeni," but the other thought "Victoria," in memory of a +late-lamented Queen of England, would be a nice name. So, since it was +my monkey, I called her "Jennie," whereat the others upbraided me for +my lack of inspiration. To add to their iniquity, no sooner did we +unpack in Ermelo than they started a preposterous yarn about how I had +stolen "Jennie" from old Queen Labotsibeni. They said that the monkey +was her consolation in old age and that I had decoyed it away, thus +breaking the aged queen's heart. + +This was not the last of "Jennie," however. The young doctor who had +taken over my practice was carrying on well, and he adopted the +monkey. She had the run of the place and was quite contented in her +new home until one morning we were awakened by a fearful row. The +peacocks next door were screeching at the top of their lungs and their +owner, a gruff old Englishman, was out on the lawn using very bad +language. + +I ran out--and found "Jennie" up a tree with her hands full of the +long tail-feathers from several of the proudest peacocks! It took me +some time to pacify the Englishman, who demanded her life and was +calling for his shotgun. Finally I smoothed the troubled waters, but +"Jennie" was not allowed to run loose after that. + +Having obtained the picture rights, I was anxious to have them taken +properly. I scouted about, but could not find the equipment or +camera-men I needed, so I decided to go to New York and get them. Oom +Tuys agreed to watch things in Swaziland and delay the coronation +until I could get back. I felt I could trust him to protect me, so I +started to make arrangements for my overseas trip. + +[Illustration: THE STREAM THAT DIVIDES THE ROYAL FROM THE COMMON GROUND + +It was on the banks of this stream that we camped awaiting permission +to enter the royal territory. This herd of cattle is being sent to the +royal kraal as payment for two Princesses whom a chief has purchased +as wives] + +[Illustration: TYPE OF AFRIKANDER CATTLE + +These cattle are the unit of value among the Swazis and enter into +every business transaction] + +[Illustration: SWAZI WOMEN AT HOME + +Fashion is as inflexible in Swaziland as anywhere, but the styles do +not change] + +This was not any too easy, because the war had disarranged sailings +and there were not many ships touching at Cape Town. However, I soon +saw in the paper that there was a freight steamer in port which was to +sail direct to New York. I knew the skipper and telegraphed him that +there was an emergency that required my sailing with him. + +"If you care to take a chance," he wired back, "join the ship as soon +as you can." + +Just as I was leaving, Tuys reached Ermelo with a message from Lomwazi +that Sebuza would be crowned within the next two months. This made me +all the more anxious to be gone, and I left Tuys with the +understanding that he would do his best to delay the coronation until +I got back from New York. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +I start for New York--The religious atmosphere on shipboard--"Flu" +attacks the Javanese--The missionaries refuse to help--Sharks as +scavengers--The little mother's end--Evils of liquor--Assembling my +party in New York--Passage as freight--St. Lucia and a little +excitement--The thin magistrate--Released on bail. + + +When I reached the ship I found the reason for the captain's peculiar +telegram. He had more than three thousand Javanese on board whom he +was taking from the East Indies to Paramaribo, Dutch Guiana. From +there he would go on to New York. These people were practically deck +cargo, since there were no accommodations for them inside the ship. + +While making arrangements for my cabin, I found that there was a woman +who also had to go to New York. Although my friend, the captain, +objected, I gave up my cabin to her and agreed to share the cabin of +an old Javanese gentleman who was supposed to be in charge of the +others. He was very primitive and ignorant, but spoke Dutch fluently, +and I learned a great deal about Java and the East Indies--that is, +while he lived, which was not long. + +The first night out of Cape Town there were twenty-four of us at the +long table in the saloon. All the officers ate with us, and there must +have been sixteen or seventeen passengers all told. + +Most important of the passengers were seven American missionaries +returning from their godly work in the waste places of Africa and the +East Indies. They were most conspicuous at all times and did +everything possible to keep table conversation confined to religious +topics. I chummed with a Canadian who represented an American +agricultural firm in South Africa, and we soon became weary of +religion at all meals. + +"There's a place for everything in this world," he said one morning +after breakfast, "but I'll be damned if I want to combine kippered +herrings with my soul's salvation!" + +It was not long before both of us were in the bad graces of the +missionaries, who did not hesitate to murmur that "it was no wonder +that the savages did not heed the call of Christ when the white men of +their country were so irreligious!" + +About the third day both the Canadian and I had had our fill of the +missionaries. We were thinking of asking the captain to allow us to +eat at another hour when something happened that changed the whole +aspect of the ship. I had gone to my cabin to get some "smokes" when +the little old Javanese crept in. He answered my cheerful greeting +very quietly and then shut the door. I could see that something had +hit him and that he wanted to talk. So I sat down on my bunk, +wondering what the trouble was. + +"Doctor, there is great trouble among my people," he said in a low +voice. "Last night eleven of them died, and now they are dying all the +time. Some terrible plague is among them and they die, they die!" + +This startled me. I had not noticed that there was anything amiss +forward, but then I remembered I had spent practically all my time +aft. Instantly there came to me the recollection of the sudden deaths +of my friends at the ford of the Masuto River. I asked him what form +the disease seemed to take and he gave me a lot of rambling details, +none of which made much sense. He was plainly in a blue funk. I told +him to stay where he was and then went to the captain's cabin. + +"I was just about to send for you, Doctor O'Neil," he said in +greeting. "Something has broken loose among those Java coolies and +they are dying like flies. As you know, we have no doctor on board. +Will you go and see what's the matter?" + +Then he told me that the first officer had buried more than a dozen +the first thing that morning and that he would have to throw another +lot overboard by noon. + +"Why, they're dying like flies," he continued, "and we've got to do +something to stop it. I shipped a full three thousand of them, but at +the rate they're going I won't have a thousand left when I reach +Paramaribo!" + +So the captain and I went into the forecastle, taking with us the +little Javanese head man. It took me about five minutes to find out +what was the trouble. + +"They've got the 'flu' and got it bad," I told the skipper. "It looks +as though we are in for a bad time." + +I was right. Here we were in the midst of nearly three thousand +ignorant people who had no idea of what was the matter. All they knew +was that the man who was sick now would be dead in a short time. They +sat about, perfectly quiet, waiting for death. I have never seen such +resignation. In the scuppers there were six or seven bodies waiting +for the first officer and his burial crew. No one paid any attention +to the dead; they just sat about as though stupefied by what was +happening. + +"There's just one thing to do," I told the captain when we got back to +his cabin, "and that's to organize a life-saving corps and get to +work. Let's get all the medicine you have and as much brandy as there +is on board and make a fight." + +He agreed with me, and we overhauled the medical stores, finding +little of any use in the present crisis. I have forgotten now what +there was, but I remember thinking that we would have to put our trust +in God and alcohol. I told the captain how inadequate his medicines +were and he threw up his hands. + +"Who'd ever expect to get the 'flu' on board, anyway," he asked, as +though it were my fault. "I've got all the medicines I need for the +usual ailments and brandy will cure most of the sicknesses that occur +on this ship. I'll give you all the brandy, rum, and gin there is, and +then you go to it!" + +He was panic-stricken and practically told me I was to take command of +his ship, except that he would take care of the navigation and +discipline. I told him the first thing I wanted was assistants, and +asked him to summon all the passengers to the saloon. When they were +assembled, I got up and told them what it was all about. + +"These poor devils of Javanese are dying like rats in a hole," I said, +"and I want volunteers to help me save them. There isn't much we can +do, and every time you go among them you stand a chance of catching +the 'flu.' They may not be good Christians, but they are certainly our +fellow men and it is our duty to help them! I want volunteers and want +them now. Who will join my life-saving crew?" + +Instantly the lady to whom I had given my cabin and my Canadian friend +volunteered. The others followed one by one, with the prominent +exception of the missionaries. I was astounded that they were not +among the first, and turned to them. + +"What's the matter?" I asked, by that time annoyed at their holding +back. "Don't you want to practice a little practical Christianity? Are +none of you going to give us a hand in this fight?" + +They did not deign to answer. Instead, they looked at their leader, a +tall gentleman with lean jowls, and he calmly turned and left the +saloon. They trooped after him, and then our captain exploded. + +"Of all the yellow dogs!" he exclaimed. "So that's the sort of people +they send out as missionaries! I'd like to throw them all overboard! +Why, they'll hoodoo my ship! I was brought up to believe a parson put +a curse on a ship, and now I know it's so!" + +Well, we pitched in and laid out our fight. It was a seemingly +hopeless job. These Javanese did not appear to want to help +themselves. Their only idea was to die, if they were called, and there +was never a peep out of any of them. + +Men died and were sent to the sharks, leaving their women mute in +their agony; wives and mothers died, and their men never turned a +hair; children died in their mother's arms and were cast into the sea +without the least outward sign. + +I mention the sharks, but even now I hate to think of them. They +loafed along beside the ship, their great bodies slipping easily +through the water, with now and then the flash of a white belly as +they turned to meet the falling body. The Javanese were dying at a +rate of between fifteen and twenty a day, and we soon ran out of +weights for their bodies. The sharks increased in number until it +seemed as though word had been sent out that there was a "death ship" +on the sea. Before long they were fighting for the bodies. I watched +one such conflict, but one was quite enough. + +My volunteers and I worked day and night to stem the tide of the +"flu," and through it all the ship plugged along across a sea that was +more like beaten brass than copper. It was hot, very hot, and at night +the decks seemed to steam. Always the impi of sharks kept pace with +us, their bodies throwing up streaks of phosphorescence as they lunged +for their food. The whole thing was like a living nightmare and it +seemed as though it would never end. + +Out of the haze of those ghastly days there comes to me one vivid +incident. One of the Javanese women, a mother of seventeen or +thereabouts, had a child of less than a year in her arms. I first +noticed her when she held up her baby to me as I was going among the +sufferers. The look in her eyes was so pleading, so trusting, that I +took the little boy from her and examined him. The baby was as good as +dead already. I gave it a sip of the stuff I was carrying, and the +poor little thing opened its eyes and looked at me. I knew it could +not live, but smiled encouragement as I gave it back to the +outstretched arms. + +It was about sunset that night when the little mother realized that +her son, her first-born, had gone. I was standing on the companionway, +looking down on the fore-deck and wondering how long the plague would +last, when some of the crew began picking bodies out of the scuppers +and throwing them overboard. The glory of the sunset seemed a mockery +and the thought came to me that I would be fortunate if I saw many +more such sights. Slowly the young Javanese mother got to her feet and +stood swaying as she wrapped her baby in a gay shawl. This done, she +pressed it to her breast and began to walk to the rail. + +"She is going to bury her son herself," I thought, and I was partly +right. + +She stood at the rail for a moment and then, the dying sun bright on +her wistful face, turned and smiled at me. I smiled back, but the +smile died aborning, for with one motion she rolled over the rail and +was gone! + +I rushed to the place and looked over. The shadow of the ship was +broken by some swirling streaks of phosphorescence, and that was all. +There was no sign of the little Java wife who could not live without +her baby. + +That night I asked the old Javanese chief about her. In his clear +Dutch he told me that she was the wife of a Javanese who had gone to +Guiana some months before. She was to join him and bring his son, of +whom he was very proud, when he had established their home in the new +land. + +"Now, how can I tell him about this?" the old fellow asked. "He will +want his wife and child, and I will only have a sad story for him." + +But he was spared this. Early the next morning I noticed that he was +ill, and in spite of all I could do he passed away before noon. +Shortly before he lapsed into unconsciousness he sent for me. + +"I must go with those who have already gone," he said. "They need me +and have sent for me. I can only go if I know that you, the great +white doctor, will guard and care for those whom I leave behind. Will +you do this?" + +Naturally, I promised, and that was the last I saw of him. He was a +kindly, simple, old soul and the misfortune of his people would have +broken his heart, had he lived. + +In a little while the "flu" began to lose its grip. Fewer and fewer +died each day, and I had begun to think that the end was in sight when +the white lady who was going to America came down with it. She had +been tireless in her efforts to help in caring for the Javanese and I +was not surprised when she fell ill. She was the only white person +aboard to catch the "flu." We did everything possible for her, but she +died on the second day. + +As her body went overboard the captain read aloud from the Bible, +choosing the passage, "Greater love hath no man than this, that a man +lay down his life for his friends." This struck me as particularly +appropriate, since she had truly given her life for those Javanese. +After her death the "flu" devil seemed satisfied and abandoned us. +Before the end, however, we had lost more than twelve hundred of the +Javanese! + +The missionaries kept close to their cabins during the whole "flu" +visitation, only appearing now and then on the afterdeck. They even +gave this up as soon as the captain suggested that the wind might +carry "flu" germs to them. In spite of their protestations, they had +to eat with the rest of us or go hungry. The captain insisted on this +point, since he felt that they deserved no consideration and it was +also highly entertaining to watch their indignation when we all took a +stiff nip of brandy with our meals. They spoke of what a great thing +prohibition was for the United States, and every time they said it +they would look meaningly at the Canadian and me. In fact, after the +"flu" left us the missionaries varied their religious conversations by +giving table-talks on the evils of liquor. I remember how shocked they +professed to be when I told them how much old Labotsibeni liked her +toddy and how we always brought it to her when we visited Swaziland. + +When we reached Free Town, in the Barbadoes, an incident happened +which was very amusing, but which these fanatics used to point out the +evils of liquor. I knew some people there, and the Canadian and I went +ashore and called on them. Of course there was "a party," and we +enjoyed ourselves in free and easy fashion. + +Now the ship lay about a mile off port, because there was not +sufficient water to allow her to dock. We went ashore in rowboats and +came back in the same way. The deck was reached by a thirty-foot +ladder, which is not the safest sort of footing at best. On our return +from the party my friend missed his step at the top of the ladder and +fell plump into the sea. There were a number of boats about and he was +fished out without difficulty. The captain and I regarded the mishap +as a good joke on the Canadian, but at dinner that night the +missionaries used it as the text for an extended discourse on the +evils of strong drink. + +One female missionary told us a story which led to a retort that is +worth repeating. + +"Forty-odd years ago three prominent Philadelphia doctors decided that +drink and tobacco were the two great evils of the world," she said, +"so they agreed never to touch either as long as they lived. They +agreed that they would all meet after forty years and see how they +compared with their drinking, smoking, dissipating friends. All lived +up to the agreement faithfully. Then they met in Philadelphia as +before, and were amazed to see how energetic, health-perfect, and +generally superior they were to those who remained of their friends. +They were now between seventy and eighty years old and yet were as +active as men scores of years younger. + +"This proves conclusively," she concluded, "that all the ills of old +age are directly due to drink and tobacco." + +Naturally, we agreed with her. This, of course, we should not have +done, since the fanatic gets no pleasure unless able to argue for his +creed. My Canadian friend, however, could not contain himself. + +"Dr. O'Neil told me a similar case this morning," he said quite +seriously. "It was about his uncle. This uncle is now one hundred and +five years old and is beginning to worry about his health. Not long +ago he was talking about drink and tobacco and told the doctor here +that he had smoked steadily since he was seven years old; also that +since he was fourteen he had drunk like a fish. 'And look at me,' he +concluded; 'look at me! I know this whiskey will get me in the end!'" + +There was a roar of laughter about the table, but the seven +missionaries did not join in it. Instead, we went out of their lives +forever, and in the long days that followed, the skipper, the +Canadian, and I spent most of our time together. + +The remainder of our voyage was uneventful and we finally reached New +York. Here I found a cable from Oom Tuys saying that the coronation +was to be held soon and advising me to return as quickly possible. + +I realized that no time could be lost and rushed about the city +getting my equipment and party together. I engaged Dr. Leonard Sugden, +the arctic explorer, as art and field director, William T. Crespinell +as technical expert, and Earl Rossman as camera-man. Since they were +to do the work, I had them buy the equipment. A feature of this was +the manner in which the reels of film were packed. Knowing the +difficulties of the Transvaal climate, Crespinell had them soldered in +tins which were again placed in other tins. These were also soldered +and the air exhausted between the outer and inner tins, so that the +films practically traveled in a thermos bottle. + +After assembling my party and equipment, the next step was to get the +whole outfit to Swaziland. This was a terrific undertaking. The war +had so disarranged the world's shipping that I spent days on the docks +of Staten Island and South Brooklyn trying to find a ship that would +take us to Cape Town. Finally, after almost despairing, I was able to +book passage for Crespinell and Rossman on the steamer "City of Buenos +Aires," which went direct to Cape Town. A day later the captain of a +freighter for the same port was induced to include Dr. Sugden and +myself in his cargo. He did not know when he would start, but assured +me that it would be soon. + +This was on a Saturday, and I told Sugden to stand by and wait for +word to go on board. I saw that our equipment was stowed in the +forward hold of the ship, and then went up to Fairfield, Connecticut, +where some friends of my Harvard days were living. They invited me to +stay until I had to sail, and I settled down to have a pleasant visit. +They have a fine farm and a barbecue was arranged in my honor. This +barbecue was held in the woods, and we were in the midst of it when a +servant came from the house with a telegram from the captain of the +ship. He said that he would sail at eleven o'clock the next morning! + +At once commenced a mad rush. I got Sugden's hotel on the long +distance telephone, but they only knew that he had gone somewhere in +the country to spend the week-end. I hurried back to New York and +looked up every address where I might get information about him, but +was unable to locate him. I kept trying up to the last moment, but +finally could only leave word at his hotel that I was sailing. I went +aboard very low in mind because his duties with my proposed expedition +were of great importance. + +But Sugden is one of those mortals who seldom gets left. As we swung +down the bay past the Statue of Liberty, I spied a tug coming after us +with great speed. In addition, she was whistling and generally acting +as though she was trying to catch our freighter. We were going slowly, +so that in a short time the little craft fussed up alongside--and +there was Sugden waving his hand from her forward deck! A rope-ladder +was lowered, and a moment later I was gleefully shaking hands with him. + +Now this was to be one of the most memorable voyages of my life--and I +have traveled a good deal. To begin with, we had the worst +accommodations I have ever endured on any vessel. Our ship was only a +cargo boat and there were no passenger-cabins whatever. We slept in a +sort of steerage in the hold, in company with twelve of the crew. It +was the most filthy hole I was ever in and reeked with vermin, +including rats of the largest and most ferocious kind. The crew were +the usual scum found on such boats and were the dirtiest human beings +I have ever seen. They disapproved of us--and we of them--to such a +degree that I often expected they would try to do us harm. Sugden, +however, took all this as part of the game, and his sporting spirit +made it possible for us to exist. His experiences in the Far North had +made him familiar with all sorts of white men, but I had never seen +such as these. People now and then speak slightingly of the kaffir, +but the Swazi, with his daily ablutions, is a very superior person +when compared with these so-called "white men." + +When our ship reached the warmer latitudes our hole became unbearable +and we moved our pallets to the poop-deck, where we managed to get +some sleep in spite of the terrific rainstorms we ran into. We felt +that it was better to be drowned by clean rainwater than to suffocate +and die slowly in our steerage bunks. However, our miserable existence +used to get on our nerves now and then and we would drown our sorrows +with whatever liquor we could obtain. + +There was one other passenger on the boat. He was a typical American +of the western type who had lived in South Africa for years. Every +year he made a trip to the United States and brought back blooded +stock of various kinds. He was the slap-dash, breezy kind of +big-hearted soul and soon became chummy with us. Owing to the fact +that he was a regular tripper on this boat, he was able to share +accommodations with one of the officers. + +It soon became his custom to visit us. He would sing out, "Look out +below!" and then would creep down the shaky ladder which was the only +means of entry to our place of misery. Always he brought a bottle, and +the excellent "hootch," as he called it, did much to make our lives +bearable. He was a good story-teller and would always introduce a +preposterous yarn with the preface, "Now this _is_ true!" We gave him +quite a run for his money when it came to yarning, as both of us had +been about a bit, Sugden in the north and I in the south of the world. + +The first break in the monotony of this dreadful voyage came when we +reached St. Lucia, in the British West Indies. This is a gorgeous bit +of the tropics set in an opal sea, with cloud-covered mountain-tops +that seem to rake the sky. + +When the ship tied up in the roadstead, Sugden and I felt that we were +due to go on the loose a bit and went ashore with the express purpose +of forgetting our troubles. We certainly succeeded in doing so, but +ended by jumping out of the frying pan into the fire. Several of the +ship's officers went with us, as they felt there were events at hand +which they must not miss. Our "party" started at the first hotel we +entered. This, it seems, was exclusively for the colored section of +the population, for the place fairly reeked with blacks. + +After we had had several drinks, Sugden turned to me and asked: + +"Well, what are we here for? What do we want?" + +"Excitement!" was my answer, and we proceeded to get it. + +There was a billiard-table in the room, and this, with its torn green +baize, suggested a battle-ground. We started a series of fights +between the blacks, with a prize of five shillings to each winner. The +conditions of the battles were that the two blacks should fight on the +billiard-table, the loser being the one knocked off. There were some +gallant battles, and every winner fairly earned his crown. + +The noise of the cheering drew a crowd, and soon the large bare +bar-room was jammed with black boys and a sprinkling of whites. We +whetted our interest by betting on the combatants, and I was doing +quite nicely when the police broke in and stopped the fun. + +There was a squad of these funny black policemen, led by what I took +to be a sergeant. They carried authority, and the blacks seemed to +regard them with a great deal of respect. + +The sergeant wanted to know what I was doing. I told him that I was +conducting a boxing tournament for the benefit of something or other. +He asked if I had "official permission," and I admitted that I had +overlooked this formality. + +"Then you are inciting riot and rebellion," he said in his clipped +English. "I arrest you in the name of the King!" + +At this, Sugden commenced to laugh. This was a great mistake, since +the black sergeant seemed to think that we were scoffing at the king. +Without more ado, he invited us to accompany him to the court. + +"This, my dear sirs," he said severely, "is a very serious matter. It +is not allowed to stir up strife in His Majesty's colonies." + +The court was in an old-style Spanish house, and the room was vacant +except for buzzing flies. These zoomed like infant meteors through the +narrow streaks of sunlight from the long windows. The benches were +worn and comfortable, and I remember dropping off to sleep with the +thought that even these flies had more luck than we did, since they +had sunlight and fresh air, while our home was that dreadful steerage +hole. + +I was awakened by Sugden's elbow. There on the high bench sat a thin +old gentleman all in white. He had a thin hooked nose much like an +eagle's beak, and his eyes were of the well-known gimlet type. As I +took him in, the sergeant was reciting the charge against us. + +"These are desperate men," I heard him say, "from the ship now in the +harbor. They were in the St. Lucia Hotel and were--" + +"Yes! Yes!" interrupted the thin magistrate in a voice as sharp as his +nose. "But what is the charge? What have they done? Never mind the +oration; get to the charge!" + +By this time I was wide awake. I suddenly came to a full realization +that I was one of those "desperate men" and found myself deeply +interested. + +"They were inciting riot and rebellion," the sergeant went on, +undaunted by the magistrate's impatience. "A boy ran to the +police-station and said murders were being done at the hotel. I called +out all the police and went there as fast as we could run. Inside the +billiard-room were hundreds of whites and blacks, all shouting with +their desire for blood. On the billiard-table were two black men +trying to kill one another. As I watched, one struck the other. He +fell from the table and the crowd cheered. + +"Then this man," he went on, pointing at me, "hands money to the man +on the table and says, 'You win!' After this he takes money from the +other white man"--pointing at Sugden--"and tells him that he is rotten +at picking fighters." + +"What next? What next?" the magistrate snapped. + +"Then the first man demands that more men come and fight," continued +the sergeant, "and there was a rush by the blacks to see who could get +on the table. Then I brought my men in and arrested them both. +Entirely unashamed at being arrested, this man"--again indicating +Sugden--"laughs out loud when I say the name of the king!" + +It seemed that we were guilty of disturbing the peace and quiet of His +Majesty's island of St. Lucia and were very reprehensible characters. +The lean magistrate regarded us with severe eye, and I am not +surprised that he looked at us with suspicion. The voyage had not +improved our looks much and we had come ashore in much-worn "ducks." +In fact, we must have looked like a couple of beach-combers. + +"You have heard the charge?" he snapped at us. "Guilty or not guilty?" + +We were as guilty as could be, of course. Therefore we answered in one +voice: + +"Not guilty!" + +The magistrate raised his eyebrows at our effrontery and then cleared +his throat again. + +"Then you'll have to stand trial," he said. "I shall admit you to +bail. Five pounds each!" + +We promptly produced the bail, and I think the "thin dash of vinegar," +as Sugden christened him, was surprised that we had it. Certainly we +did not look as though we had a shilling between us. After our +pedigrees were taken, we were informed that we would be tried at "ten +o'clock next Thursday morning." + +Outside the court-room we found one of the ship's officers in a state +of frenzy. It seems that he had been sent to get us, as the ship ought +to have sailed several hours before. + +"She's been blowing and blowing and blowing for you!" he informed us +in an aggrieved tone, "The old man is fair beside himself with rage." + +"Oh, that's what all the noise is about," Sugden innocently remarked. + +Then he suggested that we take our time and stop at several places. He +argued that so long as we kept the officer with us the captain would +not dare to sail. But I vetoed this proposition, feeling that we had +already run afoul of "His Majesty the King" and not caring to take +another chance. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +Obstinate stowaways--Free Town and a fight--Bay rum as a +beverage--Sugden lets off smoke-bombs--Cape Town, a party, and some +Anzacs--Oom Tuys advises haste--Through South Africa--Americans and +Boers in Ermelo--Hurried visit to Swaziland for information--Mystery +over the coronation--Royal gin for Labotsibeni--Debeseembie drinks and +talks. + + +We were certainly unpopular with the skipper when we got back on +board. The officers who had attended our fistic tournament had +returned slightly the worse for wear, and, of course, their condition +was laid at our door. In fact, we retired to our pallets on the +poop-deck feeling that we had not one friend on the ship, outside of +the gunner, who was heavily subsidized. It was his job to feed us, and +we tipped him liberally to get us the best there was. He earned his +money, however. + +At dawn the next morning there was a fine explosion--the captain +fairly blew up. The chief officer had discovered two stowaways, and we +were wakened by his marching them up to the captain's cabin. It seems +it was the duty of the commanding officer of the ship to return these +stowaways to the port where they slipped on board, and the rules made +him responsible for their cost until he did so. This annoyed our +worthy captain exceedingly and his language was more sultry than the +weather, and that is saying a great deal. In his torrent of profanity +the skipper included Dr. Sugden and myself, for it seems that he held +us responsible for the stowaways getting aboard the ship. + +While he relieved himself of all that bad language, the two stowaways, +both negroes, stood silent, although there was a baleful gleam in +their eyes. They were finally told off to do some work, but flatly +refused to lift a finger. Then food was denied them until they did +work, and the matter reached a deadlock. The captain finally decided +to put into Free Town, in the Barbadoes, and turn them over to the +authorities there after making arrangements for their return to St. +Lucia. + +When the ship reached Free Town the captain gave strict orders that no +one should be allowed ashore, adding, "particularly those two +doctors!" We did not like this, as Free Town is a pleasant place and +we could have found relaxation there that would have broken the tedium +of the voyage. We needed the break, too, for the captain had ordered +that we should not be allowed to buy any more liquor after the events +at St. Lucia. + +However, we had commissioned the gunner to see what he could do for us +and he had gone ashore with "the old man." In a little while a busy +motor-launch, with the Union Jack flying free, came chugging alongside +with our worthy captain and six of the Free Town police. + +They tumbled on board and announced to the stowaways that they were +under arrest. + +"We are, are we?" these worthies asked. "Well then, come and get us!" + +They tore off their coats and shirts and waited for the attack. The +police made no move, and I did not blame them. These two outcasts were +the finest specimens of "fighting niggers" I have ever seen. Their +torsos were ribbed with muscle and they looked fit to fight for their +lives. What was more, they seemed anxious to begin! + +The police shuffled their feet, and I saw that they were afraid to +tackle them. The stowaways saw it, too, and became cocky. They turned +on the captain and officers of the ship and let loose a flood of +damaging language quite as strong as their splendid bodies. +Expurgated, it ran something like this: + +"You white folks think 'cause you've got some gol' braid on yer coats +that yu' kin run over us! Come on an' get us! If yu' wanter arrest us, +come an' do it! Yu' aint got th' nerve! Yu're afraid, that's wot yu' +are! Come on an' fight, white men, come on!" + +Not one of the officers or police moved. The stowaways were right; +they were afraid. Then Sugden and I broke the tension by cheering the +stowaways. Like us, they were the under dogs and we were for them. We +cheered and applauded their defiance, and this proved too much for the +forces of law and order. + +There was a wild rush, and after a few sturdy blows the stowaways were +overwhelmed by sheer force of numbers. When the flailing arms stopped, +they were flat on the deck with about six men sitting on each. The +irons were brought and clapped on them, and the last we saw of them +was when they were hustled on board the launch. + +While this party was going on the gunner had been busy on our behalf. +He had been unable to sneak away from the captain's gig when ashore, +but made up for it by doing business with the bumboat men who came +alongside. From one of these he bought two cases of bay rum, paying +twenty cents a quart for it. This he smuggled down into our steerage +and told us about it as soon as the smoke of battle had cleared away. + +Now this bay rum is not meant for drinking, although the blacks of +that part of the world consume great quantities of it. I have heard +that it makes them wild, and I am not surprised. It did worse than +that to Sugden and me. + +We started drinking it as soon as we could, and before long we reached +the semi-conscious state that made life bearable. From this we went +into the second stage--that of hallucinations. We went practically +crazy. Sugden insisted that he was a red squirrel and I believed that +I was a wild cat. We became violent and were locked in the steerage. +However, they did not take our bay rum away. + +Now the captain never visited our quarters, so he did not know of our +plight until the end of the second day. Then he ordered that we be +released. No sooner was the hatch taken off than Sugden tore up the +ladder, crying out that "the wild cat" was after him. I was! Believing +his assertion that he was a red squirrel, I chased him all over the +boat, intent on killing him. + +We dashed through the officers' quarters, the captain's cabin, across +the decks, up on the bridge and down again, and even got into the +engine-room in our mad chase. Every one on the ship followed us, +roaring with laughter. It was the funniest thing they had ever seen. +Finally they captured us and brought us back to earth with buckets of +sea-water. + +The captain was so amused that he forgave our previous sins and became +our friend. He confiscated the balance of the bay rum and put us on an +allowance of one stiff drink of whiskey each evening. This helped, but +it was not very much under the circumstances. + +The next afternoon Sugden made a hit with the captain. The World War +was not long over and the ship had a number of smoke-bombs which were +supposed to be used in foiling U-boats. The gunner was in charge of +them. Since they were no longer needed, the captain gave orders that +they be thrown overboard. + +The gunner, however, proved inexpert. He lighted several, and then +dropped them over the stern so quickly that the fuse was extinguished +without the bomb exploding. Sugden watched these manoeuvers with +extreme disgust. At each failure his remarks became more insulting. +Finally he could stand it no longer--he had not yet fully recovered +from the bay rum--and staggered up to the gunner. + +"You're a fine gunner," he snorted. "Who ever heard of a gunner who +couldn't make a smoke! Stand back and let an expert let 'em off!" + +I was deathly afraid that he might have an accident, that one of the +bombs would explode and kill him. The gunner had the same idea and +hurriedly withdrew. The captain called to Sugden, but he paid no +attention. He lighted the first bomb, held it for an interminable +time, and dropped it over. It "boomed" as it struck the water and +threw out the smoke-screen in most approved navy fashion. We all +cheered, partly from relief that there had been no accident. Then +Sugden let off all the rest of the bombs without a failure. + +"Well, you're a little bit of all right, after all," the captain said. +"Come down to my cabin and I'll give you a real drink!" + +From then on we had a pleasant trip. Our captain let bygones be +bygones and we enjoyed the few remaining days enough to partly make up +for the misery that had preceded them. + +Crespinell and Rossman had arrived in Cape Town when we reached there, +and came out in a motor-boat to meet us. We introduced them to our new +friend, the captain, and he gave them a brief resume of our activities +during the thirty-odd days of the voyage. He gave us credit for being +two of the "rarest specimens" he had ever encountered. + +"The next time I ship two such wild men as these," he said, "I'll move +into the forecastle and give 'em my cabin! What's more, from now on +I'm going to limit myself to one doctor a trip, and he won't be a +Boer, either. These two devils did everything from start a menagerie +on one case of bay rum to instigate a mutiny when we had some fighting +stowaways on board." + +Then he gave a romantic and none too flattering account of how we had +been arrested in St. Lucia, and ended by informing my men that we were +"fugitives from justice." This had not occurred to me; perhaps it is +so and I shall find the funny black policeman waiting for me the next +time I visit the island. + +We were glad to get ashore. It is one thing to race across the +Atlantic in five days on a floating palace and quite another and +none-too-pleasant experience to spend more than a month on a freighter +in the warmer latitudes. The solid earth welcomed our feet and we +found Cape Town very gay. + +After getting settled at the hotel, we started out to enjoy ourselves. +Of course we chartered a motor, and our trail could easily be followed +by the familiar fumes of gasoline and alcohol. The town was full of +"Anzacs," Australian and New Zealand soldiers, returning from the war. +They were great big reckless devils, glad to be going home and +glorying in the fact that they had won the war. This led to an +argument and to my taking a short and sad cruise in the "Mayflower," +this being the highflown name of a typical Cape Town hack. + +In one of the many places we visited during the course of our rambles, +we ran into a number of "Aussies" celebrating the downfall of the +Boche. They immediately noted Dr. Sugden's sombrero and greeted him as +a "Yank." This was all right, but soon they added a familiar remark, +"The Yanks won the war; oh yes, they did!" and Sugden became +indignant. The usual argument ensued. Words ceased when Sugden slammed +his hat on the ground and offered to lick them all. A second later we +were in the center of a fine melee, which was ended by the military +police breaking in. + +Sugden was badly used up and some of the rest of us were severely +bruised. The nearest vehicle was the "Mayflower," so we piled the +"fighting Yank" into it and took him back to the hotel. He had been +badly damaged, so that it was a week before we were able to travel. + +In the meantime Oom Tuys had sent me several telegrams in which he +urged me to hurry. In one there was the phrase, "Tzaneen making +trouble; maybe war," and this sounded as if we were in for an +interesting time when we reached Swaziland. I did not understand how +she could do anything unless she tried to take the throne for Sebuza +by force, but the situation looked as though there was some excitement +ahead. + +Sugden was still recuperating from his battle with the Australians and +expected to remain in bed for a few days more when this wire reached +me. I showed it to him and he immediately became excited. + +"Come on, let's go" he said, getting out of bed. "We're wasting time +here. Let's get into Swaziland and see what's doing." + +We left next day for the Transvaal. It is a long journey, but to one +who has not made it before there is much of interest. + +After leaving the coast there come the beautiful mountain passes of +the Cape Colony. Then the train drops to the Karoo Desert, with its +endless brown stretches broken only by dry rivers, near which can be +seen great herds of sheep. Kimberley, with its barrenness and huge +dumps of dark, diamond-washed soil comes next, and finally the Great +Fish River is crossed to the grassy plains of the Orange Free State. +Across these plains the train runs for hundreds of miles, and then +comes the Vaal River, after which the veldt of the Transvaal is +reached. After a while the huge smoke-stacks and great white ore-dumps +of Johannesburg loom, and the journey is practically ended. + +My companions were keen to hear all about this country, so new to +them, and I was kept busy running from side to side of the car +supplying their thirst for information. Dr. Sugden, I found, was well +up on the history of the country and would often supply a missing date +when I related the romantic story of the Boer and British conquest of +South Africa. + +We spent several days in Johannesburg, and my companions were +delighted with it. They frequently commented on its being like an +up-to-date American city, as they found practically everything there +that they would expect in the United States. In fact, Sugden was loud +in his praises of the telephone service, which he insisted was "almost +as good as that at home." The city has developed extensively during +the last twenty years and now has buildings, hotels, and streets of +the most modern type. The great contrast lies in the character of the +street traffic. There are hundreds of motors of all kinds, but there +are also innumerable rickshaws drawn by Zulus, thousands of kaffirs, +and not a few horse-cabs. + +Then, of course, the huge mine-dumps right in the heart of the city +struck my companions as extraordinary, but it must be remembered that +the city grew up after the mines were sunk. There are miles and miles +of smoke-stacks, and the crushing of the ore mills can always be +heard. My party was much impressed by Parktown, the millionaires' +suburb to the north of the city. Here there are libraries, a +zoological garden, and all things essential to a thoroughly equipped +and prosperous city. I have many friends in Johannesburg and my +companions had a pleasant time visiting them with me. + +They had their first view of a real Boer village when we landed in +Ermelo a few days later. The morning we reached there we saw several +score of Cape carts loaded with farmers and their wives coming to town +to shop. Then there were several of those great canvas-topped freight +wagons, drawn by seven or eight span of wide-horned oxen and driven by +a number of kaffir boys. These walk alongside with their long goads, +and the entire progress of the caravan is one long shout. With the +yelling of the kaffirs, the creaking of the great wagon, and the +frequent lowing of the oxen, the noise of such an outfit is as +striking as is its picturesque appearance. + +Sugden was intensely interested in these great freight trains, and +reminded me of their similarity to those which made the overland trail +in the States during the days of the forty-niners. The heavy-set men +riding beside the wagons particularly impressed him. + +"Why, they are the same men that settled the West of my country," he +exclaimed. "Their steady eyes and great beards remind me of the days +of Crockett and Boone. Their rifles, ready for instant use, carry out +the picture. Fred Remington would have been crazy over these ox-teams!" + +I noted that the interest was not all on our side; these farmer Boers +were quite as curious about us as we were about them. They called each +other's attention to our strange clothes, and not a few looked with +envy at Dr. Sugden's sombrero. He was right about these men. They are +the true pioneer breed, the men who found and make empires! + +Oom Tuys was not in Ermelo. One of his boys was waiting for me, +however, with a message that preparations were being made for the +coronation at Lebombo, but that Labotsibeni had made no sign as yet. +He assured me that I need not worry and that he would join me at +Ermelo in a day or two. + +I commenced assembling our expedition, and while I was so occupied my +companions visited about and made many friends among the Boers. None +of them had ever seen any Americans, although they had heard much of +the United States, and they were greatly interested in everything the +latter said and did. In fact, word reached the outlying districts that +some Americans were in Ermelo and several hundred Boers trekked in to +see them. Of course my companions could not talk Dutch and it was +seldom that an interpreter could be found. It was no unusual thing for +several great, bearded Boers to shake hands with them and say, "Hello, +America!" this being the extent of their English. Sometimes +conversations would take place in very broken English, the Boers +always wishing to get news from the outer world. + +I remember one such talk. The Boer was a sort of preacher and was +fairly well read. He spoke English of a kind--that is, it was +understandable. He caught Sugden and me when we were returning from +looking over some oxen and asked us a question that had been +perplexing him. I translate his words into ordinary language, as +otherwise they would be difficult to understand. + +"The war is over, yes?" he asked. "And America sent more than two +million men and spent hundreds of millions of pounds. England, France, +and the others will take much from Germany and Austria, but America +says she will take nothing. Is this so?" + +"Yes, that's right," Sugden answered. + +"Why is America so foolish?" he asked in a puzzled way. "She loses +thousands of men and millions of money, and yet wants nothing from +Germany! Why did she go into the war?" + +This question was not asked so often in those days, and I was curious +to hear Sugden's reply. + +"America went into the war to save herself," the doctor answered +positively. "If Germany had won, she would have had to fight her +alone, so she went in to avoid such a war." + +This satisfied the greybeard, but he went off muttering, "America +wants nothing! America wants nothing! Such a foolishness!" + +Naturally, he could not understand this. Every time the Boers made war +they gained territory, as did the British, and he judged from his own +experience. I was glad that Sugden had stated the facts, instead of +the old cant about America fighting to "save civilization." I know the +old Boer would not have understood that and would have regarded it as +what Sugden called "bunk." + +I had about finished assembling our outfit when Tuys came. He brought +word that the coronation was indefinitely postponed, so we settled +down to wait a bit before starting for the wilds of Swaziland. As +usual, the unexpected happened. One of Tuys's men came to Ermelo in +hot haste, bearing word that the coronation was to take place as soon +as possible. + +This was disconcerting information, and Tuys and I held a council of +war. + +"I don't believe that they intend having the coronation right away," +he said. "I don't think that Sebuza has been properly consecrated yet." + +"Well, you know what we've just heard," I said. "I wish we could get +some first-hand information about it. I'd hate to lose out after all +the trouble I've taken." + +"Owen, lad, there's just one thing to do--let us make a quick trip to +Zombode and find out about it," my uncle advised. + +We talked the matter over for some time, and that seemed to be the +only solution. There were still a few details of our expedition to be +attended to, but I turned these over to Sugden and made up my mind to +leave next morning. + +Dawn saw Oom Tuys and me on the trail. We rode fast ponies and went +unattended. What food we needed we carried in saddle-bags, and the +most weighty part of our load consisted of several bottles of gin. +These, of course, were a necessity. + +The trip proved uneventful. The weather was good and we were able to +sleep out comfortably. We skirted around Mbabane, since it would not +do for Mr. Commissioner Dickson to know that Tuys was going into +Swaziland. + +When we reached Zombode we found Lomwazi on guard at the royal kraal. +He came out to meet us and received our gift of gin with rather poor +grace. He seemed uneasy and not at all glad to see us. We asked to see +Queen Labotsibeni. + +"Nkoos, the queen is not well and cannot see you," he answered, lying +badly. + +"But she sent for me," Tuys said, catching his eye and meeting lie +with lie. With the assured air of the white man, he was able to tell +his lie convincingly. + +We knew that we would be caught if we allowed Lomwazi to return to the +old queen alone, so we dogged his footsteps and arrived at her hut +with him. Tuys fairly pushed in ahead of Lomwazi, and a moment later +was talking to Labotsibeni. + +"Nkosikaas, mother of Buno the Great," he said, "I, the White King of +Swaziland, am here to do your bidding. Your son, Lomwazi, told me that +you are not well and I have brought Mzaan Bakoor, the great doctor, to +cure you." + +I could see the old woman seemed very feeble. She nodded approval as +Tuys finished and answered by asking for gin. Lomwazi pulled out the +glass stopper and a moment later held the earthenware cup to his +mother's lips. She gulped and choked, then repeated her action, and +finally finished the drink, gasping for breath. + +We sat and watched and saw a transformation. As the alcohol went down +we saw her strength return. In a few minutes she was the same old +queen I had known before. Lomwazi squatted behind her with sullen +look. When he glanced our way there was murder in his eyes, and I did +not like it. Tuys, always reckless and utterly fearless, gave him +glance for glance, and the black man's eyes always fell. + +"I am cured, Nkoos," Labotsibeni began in quite a strong voice. "I am +well. The 'muti' of the white man cures all ills of the body, even +when it numbers the years as the leaves of the trees. Why have you +come to see me?" + +"I wish to know when you plan to make your grandson, Sebuza, the son +of Buno, king of Swaziland," Tuys answered without fencing. He thought +that a direct answer might get the truth. + +"When all is ready Sebuza will be made king," she answered without +hesitation, and it seemed to me there was the ghost of a smile on her +lips. + +Tuys then asked her how soon that would be, but she said she did not +know. This time I was sure she smiled. I had a feeling that we would +get no information out of her and that Zombode was not any too anxious +for the coronation. + +Tuys then asked for Sebuza and wanted to know where he was. The blind +old queen let Lomwazi answer us, and the wily vizier said he did not +know, but that he thought the crown prince was in the mountains being +consecrated. + +According to the ancient customs, before the new king takes office he +must go through a lengthy ceremonial in the mountains. This usually +lasts for two months, or "two moons," and the priests, or +witch-doctors, are in charge of the rites. In the case of Sebuza the +sanctification was also the celebration of his attaining manhood. + +After Lomwazi's evasive reply--for I felt that he was +lying--Labotsibeni began to ask questions. I knew that we must answer +them in detail if we wished to get any further information, so we did +so. She became quite peevish when the effect of the gin wore off and +was nothing but a querulous old woman. But she asked the most +extraordinary questions! I realized more than ever that she had +brains, for she went from one end of the world to the other. Of course +she had no education as we know it, but she asked about the Boers and +British and how they were getting along together, "lying in the same +bed," as she put it. + +She had heard that all the white men were at war with one another, and +she asked question after question about the world conflict. It seems +that aeroplanes had flown over parts of Swaziland during the war, and +she was curious about these. They had been described to her as great +birds carrying men and guns, and she wanted to know how it was done. + +Tuys and I kept our patience and answered everything we could, always +trying to get a stray bit of information concerning Sebuza's +coronation. She had several drinks of gin during the talk, which ended +after about three hours with our being no wiser than when we came. +Once or twice we thought the news was coming, but each time the +watchful Lomwazi stepped into the breach and turned the subject. We +were completely baffled. + +Finally we gave it up. As we made our farewell speech, in which we +wished the old queen "long life and good health," I offered her the +"going-away present." Then ensued an incident that showed how keen she +was in spite of her great age and lack of sight. + +The gin bottle was an unusual shape; that is, it was long and tall, +instead of being squat and square. When I handed it to her she passed +her hands over it with rapidity and then asked what it was, for she +had never had a bottle like it before. + +"It is royal gin," I assured her. "It is gin that is made only for +kings and queens. It is the gin that the queen of the English drinks. +It is the only gin worthy of you, Nkosikaas!" + +This satisfied her and she accepted our farewell, so we went back to +our horses. Tuys was amused at the old queen's keenness and told me I +had committed treason by making the Queen of England drink gin to +placate a Swazi potentate. Lomwazi came with us to do the honors, +though really he wanted to make sure we did not talk to any one and +get information. He was still sullen and suspicious, and we pointedly +did not present him with the gin he hoped for, although he saw that we +had several bottles left. + +"It's no use, Owen," Tuys said, as we rode down the trail to the +Valley of Heaven. "They are planning something, and I fear it means +trouble for that cub, Sebuza. I have a feeling that we ought to get +our outfit here and sit tight and watch events. Something is going to +happen. It may be a new king or a dead crown prince. I can't tell +which." + +That night we camped near a kraal of one of the minor indunas and +noted that there was less cordiality than usual. Tuys strolled over to +the great fire and talked for some time with the warriors. In a little +while he came back quite excited. + +"Debeseembie, Lomwazi's brother, is over there," he said. "He is +inside the kraal, but some of his men let out the fact that he was +there. I wonder what he is doing? Suppose we try and find out." + +This seemed a good idea, and Tuys went about it in his own cunning +way. He strolled over to the fire and told one of the warriors that he +had a bottle of gin for Debeseembie, but that he would only deliver it +to him personally. Then he came back to where I was stretched on my +blankets. + +Now a Swazi, like all other kaffirs, will do anything for alcohol, +even to the sacrifice of his royal dignity. Debeseembie was the son of +a queen and the brother of the late King Buno; nevertheless, he was +standing respectfully nearby within a few minutes. + +"Nkoos, you have a present for me?" he asked, and I could see his eyes +flash in anticipation. + +"Yes, if you will sit and talk a while," I told him, and then produced +a bottle. Tuys poured out a generous drink and gave it to him. +Debeseembie choked it down, just as the kaffirs always do, and then +gasped for breath for a moment. + +Then Tuys began talking about many things, none of them with much +bearing on the information we wanted. In a little while Debeseembie +had another drink. He is the most sincere of all the royal family and +I have always found him to be very trustworthy. He is not a good liar +and seems to know it. + +Gradually we led the conversation to the coming coronation and finally +asked him the leading question: How soon will it be? He was not +angered and gave us the first direct intimation of the trouble we had +suspected. + +"My brother, Lomwazi, doesn't want it to take place," he said; "and he +has great power over our mother. He frightens her by telling her that +she will have to die when Sebuza is crowned. All the people of +Swaziland want to have a king and are tired of Labotsibeni and +Lomwazi, and Tzaneen is working for her son's coronation. No one can +tell when Sebuza will be made king. It may be never!" + +That was what we wanted to know. Debeseembie, always at the old +queen's elbow, ought to know what he was talking about and we felt +that he had told the truth. A few moments later I gave him our last +bottle of gin and he stumbled back to his kraal. + +Next morning we were up at dawn, striking back to Ermelo as fast as we +could go. Again we skirted Mbabane, but nevertheless made good time. +Tuys was very thoughtful during most of the trip, and I cannot +remember that he had anything to say until we came in sight of Ermelo. + +"Well, it looks as if our friends in Swaziland need some one to make +up their minds for them," he said in a musing way. "However, I don't +want to have to do it!" + +I glanced at the cunning old man, but he was looking into the dust +ahead and did not amplify his remark. It was an interesting thought, +however, and it did offer one way out of our difficulties. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +Outfitting for Swaziland--Our cook becomes "Gunga Din"--Lomwazi's +messenger--Off for Zombode--Rossman goes hunting--Too much rain--The +oxen die and are replaced by donkeys--Sneaking liquor through +Mbabane--Ezulweni mosquitoes rival New Jersey's--We are very unpopular +in Zombode--Manaan's damage suit and settlement. + + +Dr. Sugden and the others were waiting for me at the house. They were +all ready to start and impatient to be off. The novelty of Boer life +in Ermelo had worn away and they now were keen to be out among the +Swazis. + +"Let's go!" was Sugden's chant. "Come on, let's start! All the things +are packed, the wagon's set, and the oxen are eating their heads off. +Come on, let's go!" + +I assured him that we would be off as soon as possible, and added that +he would find plenty of hard walking to use up his surplus energy once +we started trekking. Tuys and I, as the old-timers of the party, made +a thorough inspection of the wagon and outfit. We had trekked +practically all over the Transvaal and Orange Free State at various +times and our equipment was all that could be needed for the job in +hand. + +The wagon was one of the great freight-carriers used so extensively in +South Africa. It was along the lines of the old American "prairie +schooner," except that it was much bigger and heavier in every way. It +was about eighteen feet long by ten wide and could safely be loaded up +to three or three and a half tons. Its wheels were squat and heavy, +with broad tires built to prevent their cutting into soft roadways and +to roll over the dust of dry weather without sinking into it. The rear +half of the wagon was covered with a top, or tent, under which a +permanent bed was built. This bed was of the primitive plain-board +kind, but saved us from having to sleep on the wet earth on many +occasions. When we started out the wagon was drawn by eleven span, or +twenty-two oxen. Three Swazi boys were in charge of it and were +responsible for its animals. + +Then, chiefly for our personal convenience, I had pressed the +wagonette into service, and this was drawn by six mules. Sibijaan and +Tuis were in charge of this part of the outfit. + +I must not forget our cook. He was a most important member of the +expedition and came through it in a most remarkable manner--always on +the job and always ready to work a little harder. He was an Indian, +that is, a native of India who had come to the Transvaal as servant to +a British officer during the World War. His right name became lost +early in our association. It was a long, three-barreled sort of name, +quite melodious, but not handy for trek use. When I was inspecting our +equipment I asked him his name again, and he calmly answered, "Gunga +Din, Sahib." + +"Since when? When did you change your name?" I asked, surprised that +he had relinquished his proud paternal patronymic. + +"Yesterday, Sahib. The sahib with the large hat says that he can't +remember my name and tells me that from now on I shall be known as +'Gunga Din.'" + +Investigation showed that Sugden became fed up on the long, beautiful +name of our cook and had firmly given him one that was easy to remember. + +"Gunga Din's easy to remember," he explained. "Gunga Din and Rudyard +Kipling go together, and you surely can't forget them both. G. Din +made R. K. famous, and it's a cinch to remember the cook's name that +way. Anyhow, we'll be calling him 'Din' as soon as we get going!" + +And he was right. The chef with a name like a great poet became "Din" +and remained "Din" until we returned from Swaziland. + +The great wagon was heavily loaded with all the dunnage and +impedimenta needed for our expedition, among which were gin and a +number of mysterious cases I had personally seen packed in New York. +My companions did not know what was in them until late in our +expedition, but when they found that I had nearly one hundred pounds +of glorious five-and-ten-cent-store jewelry they realized that I knew +a bit about the kaffir character. + +Of course we had all the weapons we could use. The best sporting +rifles and revolvers were part of the equipment, though I hoped that +we should not have occasion to use them except for pot-hunting. Things +will happen in Swaziland, however, and Tuys was a great believer in +foresight. + +After our rigid inspection of the outfit we returned from the kraal to +the house, where the whole party assembled for dinner. During the meal +a discussion arose as to whether it would not be a good idea to start +immediately and work our way into Swaziland on the chance of being +able to get action. Tuys maintained that we ought to start at once and +hinted mysteriously that the coronation might be arranged whether +Labotsibeni liked it or not. Knowing his propensity for taking chances +and his liking for trouble, I hesitated to encourage this idea. +Sugden, of course, wanted action and rather welcomed the thought of +trouble. Crespinell was neutral, taking the stand that anything was +better than "sticking around Ermelo," while Rossman said he did not +care whether he took pictures of peace or war. But the matter was +taken out of our hands. + +At about dawn next morning Sibijaan came hammering on the door of my +room. I jumped up and let him in. + +"Mzaan Bakoor, there is a messenger outside from Zombode," he +announced. "He came in the night and would not wait any longer. He +says he must see you now." + +I had the man in. He was one of the old "king's messengers," but +without his distinguishing sign. His lean, hard body and muscular legs +would have singled him out, though. + +"Nkoos, Lomwazi sends me to bring you a message," he said, with his +hands outstretched in salute. "He says that Sebuza will be made king +at the next new moon." + +Looking back, it seems to me that we must have made a peculiar tableau +there in the bedroom dimly lighted by the coming sunrise. The savage, +with his great shield, knob-kerrie, and assegai, and the white man in +his pajamas! I will admit that the white man had his finger on the +trigger of a little 44-caliber bulldog revolver during the first part +of this interview. One does not take foolish chances in South Africa. + +I asked the messenger for further details about the coronation, but +all I could learn was that Sebuza had been in the mountains undergoing +sanctification for the last six weeks and would return to Lebombo +before the new moon. + +Sibijaan took care of the Swazi and saw that he was fed and given a +little drink. After which he took to the trail again, and I saw him +fade into the distance at a dog-trot just about the time we were +finishing breakfast. + +His news decided the argument of the night before. The oxen were +inspanned, the mules also, and about noon we started off on our trek +for Zombode. The expedition had been the talk of Ermelo for some time, +and practically every white man and most of the kaffirs were on hand +to cheer and give us a rousing send-off. Many of our friends walked +with us until we crossed the little bridge and were lost in the +willow-groves along the river trail. + +This first day the roads were excellent and we made the best speed of +any day of the trip. Before night we had gone a full twenty miles, +stopping at the fine farm of an old-fashioned Boer. Instead of camping +in the open, as we had to do for practically all the rest of the +expedition, we stopped with the farmer. I did this because I wanted my +American associates to see how real Boers live. We had a regular Boer +supper, consisting of grilled meats, such as chops, hearts, liver, +kidneys, and Boer bacon; crushed mealies, rye bread, and coffee. There +was an abundance of all this and it was cooked to the queen's taste. +The twenty-mile trek, during which we walked every foot of the way, +had given us wonderful appetites and we were able to do more than +justice to the quantities of food set out. + +Following supper the old Boer became solemn, as is the custom after +the evening meal, and led us in religious services. No matter how poor +or how humble, the true Boer never forgets his "night prayers." This +is his heritage from those Huguenot ancestors. It was impressive to +see my American companions bow their heads silently as the old farmer +recited his devotions. + +Prayers over, we went to the "parlor," whose chief ornaments were +almost priceless relics and skins, and staged an amateur musicale. +There was a good piano and we had our ukelele. What more could be +desired? All the kaffirs in the neighborhood gathered outside and +fairly wept for joy. It was a splendid concert, considering the +talent, and made a great hit with the farmer and his wife. + +Next morning we were inspanned and on our way by dawn. It was raining, +and this made it look like bad going all day. The farmer and his wife +were up as soon as we, and had rusks and hot, strong coffee for us. It +was chilly, and the coffee was a good "pick-me-up" before a day's +trek. Before we left the Boer made us promise to stay a week with him +on our return from Swaziland. He said he would arrange a feast for us +and we would be able to play our "hand-fiddle" for all his neighbors. + +By ten o'clock we had made about seven miles, and camped for breakfast +on the shores of a small lake. Our progress had been much delayed by +the rain, and this made the walking disagreeable as well. We were very +hungry for breakfast and Din performed wonders, considering that the +rain continued until an hour after we had finished. After a short rest +we started on again, and by four o'clock we had reached the banks of +the Masuto River. Here we made a good camp, pitching two additional +tents, so that we would have a mess-room and cook-house with which the +rain could not interfere. This camp was chiefly memorable for the fact +that Rossman almost had an "adventure." While Din was getting supper +ready the camera-man took a rifle and went along the river with the +intention of shooting something. He had been gone only a few minutes +when we heard a shout, followed by a shot. Sugden and Crespinell +rushed to Rossman's assistance, each with a rifle. They reached his +side to find him gazing fearsomely at a large snake whose back had +been severed by his bullet. It was a dramatic moment--especially when +Sugden picked up the snake and pointed out the fact that it must have +been dead for a week or more! + +That night we were all very tired and went to sleep as early as +possible. Next morning, true to my Boer upbringing, I was up and about +before dawn. Coffee and rusks were ready soon after, and my companions +were awakened to face their third day's trek. Of course we could walk +faster than the oxen, so I pushed ahead as I knew that there was a +Mapor kraal a short distance away. We reached the kraal about five +miles ahead of the wagons, and this gave me time to show the others +their first native settlement. + +All the men were away, only women and children being at home. These +all seemed to belong to a small chief of the tribe, and they informed +me that he was away on a hunting trip. Sugden and the others were +intensely interested in everything they saw and I arranged for them to +inspect the interior of a number of the huts. + +I soon noticed that all the women were much taken with Rossman; in +fact, they could hardly keep their eyes off him. I found by questions +that they were fascinated by his great horn-rimmed glasses. The upshot +was that we allowed a certain few of these dusky Eves to try the +glasses on, and they were much amused thereat. We distributed about +five shillings among them and they treated us to tswala and brought us +a number of fresh eggs. + +In a little while the wagons hove in sight and camped near the kraal +for breakfast. Scraps of wood and "buffalo chips" made our fire, and +presently Din had a good "feed" ready. While the cooking was going on +the little kaffirs gathered about the camp in numbers. Some of them +even drove their goats close so that they might see the white men eat. +By the time we began breakfast there were more than forty of these +little beggars squatting on their haunches near the table. They +watched every motion most intently and followed each morsel to its +destination. Every now and then I would take a piece of lump sugar +and, without looking, throw it in their direction. Instantly there +would be the fiercest sort of a scramble for the tidbit. They were +rough beyond reason, and every now and then one of them would be hurt +and crawl away for a few minutes until he had recovered. Never, +however, would he cry out or show that he felt the pain. No sooner did +our wagons leave the spot than there was a wild rush to where we had +been. They fought furiously over every scrap in the hope of finding +food that the white men had thrown away. + +We kept steadily on until five o'clock that night, and then made camp. +When Din gave the supper-call at about eight o'clock, Sugden and I +went to the mess-tent to find Crespinell and Rossman sound asleep on +the floor. They were worn out by the steady walking and I did not +blame them for taking it easy. After a "shot" of Picardy brandy, we +all sat down to the best supper Gunga Din had yet given us. There was +soup, chicken curry, rice, vanilla pudding, canned fruits, and coffee. +Truly, a feast for a trek supper! + +That night Sugden and the others were kept awake for some time by the +howling of several jackals. They suggested that they take their rifles +and go out and "get some of those infernal beasts!" I had to explain +to them that it would be exactly like trying to shoot the shadow of a +ghost, and they went back to bed grumbling heartily. + +The next day was a bad one, rain making our progress slow and +miserable. I wanted to reach a certain point, and we forced the oxen +until noon before stopping. This trek had been too long and hurt the +brutes so that their spirit seemed broken. We camped among some very +rugged hills, and here Dr. Sugden showed us all how to handle tents +and ropes in wet weather. The ease with which he tied and untied knots +in the ropes astounded our kaffirs and filled the rest of us with envy. + +The rain increased, and soon everything became soaked. It was such a +downpour that we decided to wait for it to slacken and ended by +remaining in this camp for two days. Our only amusement was to watch +Tuis, the Basuto-Bushman kaffir, in his perpetual conflict with the +other boys. Being of a different breed, he did everything in a way all +his own and, in addition, was naturally antagonistic and sulky. + +[Illustration: ON THE WAY TO THE ROYAL KRAAL AT ZOMBODE + +Dr. O'Neil and party going through the Valley of Heaven. The barren +mountains in the distance show the rugged nature of the country] + +[Illustration: THE SECOND TRIP INTO SWAZILAND + +The O'Neil caravan shortly after the draft-oxen had died and were +replaced by mules and donkeys] + +[Illustration: MOTHER FEEDING HER BABY] + +[Illustration: MAIDEN SINGING TO THE CROWN PRINCE SEBUZA + +She is playing on the native instrument which consists of a bow and +one string] + +In spite of the picturesqueness of this camp, we were very glad to +leave it. We were now in the wild country, with no farms, and the only +break in the monotony was a little wild goose shooting shortly before +we reached the Swaziland border. Our real troubles began about this +time. The oxen began to die, and it was not long before we were +absolutely stalled. We were then in camp on the border, and it looked +as though we would stay there unless I was able to get some other +animals to pull the wagon. + +Finding further progress impossible, I scouted about and ran into a +kaffir living on the border who had a horse. I hired this steed--a +sorry one it was--and, following a tip given me by its owner, rode +twelve miles to see if I could talk business with a small Swazi chief +who was said to have a number of donkeys. + +At first this old chief did not want to talk about donkeys at all, and +it was not until I began to talk payment first and donkeys last that +he consented to get down to business. We finally made a deal, and it +was this: I was to pay him the equivalent of one pound sterling in gin +for every day I used his donkeys. This was not such a bad bargain +because I had to have about forty of the little animals to make up for +the oxen I had lost. + +The most interesting part of this transaction was to see the chief's +men harness the donkeys to our big wagon. They used bits of weed-rope, +rawhide, and a stout grass rope that they make themselves. The +harnessing took a long time and we were delayed until I began to grow +impatient, but there was nothing else to do but wait. Finally we were +off, but it was a funny looking caravan. It had been raining hard for +some days and we presently came to a little stream which was much +swollen. Here we had a terrible time. The "harness" kept breaking, and +the way the natives thrashed those poor donkeys was frightful. It +seemed to be the only method, though, and eventually we took a hand in +the punishment ourselves. + +The night of the second day saw us camped at the foot of the mountain +that leads to the village of Mbabane. We found several other transport +wagons there, with three white traders whose occupation was to carry +goods from Ermelo and Carolina, the two rail stations, to Mbabane and +vice versa. These traders were much interested in our outfit, and by +treating them to drinks, fresh food, and the payment of one pound +sterling I was able to hire twelve donkeys from their caravans to +assist us to the top of the mountain. We started at dawn next day, and +by noon had reached the summit. There we rested for the balance of the +day. + +My object in delaying there all the afternoon was mainly on account of +the great load of liquor in the big wagon. I did not want to bring +this through Mbabane in daylight because I had no permit to bring it +into Swaziland and I did not want to get caught doing so. I thought +that I could get by practically unobserved if I waited until after +dark and then went through the village with other wagons. Our camp at +the top of the hill was about three miles from Mbabane, and I ordered +Sibijaan to inspan and start on again at five o'clock. This would +bring him to the village at about eight o'clock, or shortly after dark. + +We went ahead and called on Mr. and Mrs. Dickson, who gave us tea. It +was real English tea and we enjoyed it immensely. The Dicksons had +heard of our expedition and were much interested. Mrs. Dickson, +however, was greatly amused at our capacity for tea, since we each +drank between five and six cups. But we were dead tired and it was +wonderful to shut out the whole of Swaziland and sit down in this cozy +English home to drink decent tea poured by a white woman! + +After thanking the Dicksons, I went to the little store and bought +some supplies. I also went to the hotel and bought some liquor, this +being merely for camouflage, as I wished them to think I needed it. +The supplies and liquor I gave to a native carrier, telling him to +take it to the place where we expected to camp for the night. There +were six packages in all, weighing about forty-five pounds, and it was +amusing to see this kaffir summon five others to help him. Each Swazi, +carrying his shield, knob-kerrie, and assegai, started for our camp +with a little parcel on his head. + +The wagon was late. I began to be worried, for I had estimated that it +would arrive in the village about eight o'clock. I spent a nervous +hour or so waiting for it to show up, but it did not do so till about +9:30. I told Sibijaan to proceed to the camping place about two miles +further on, and we pushed ahead to be on hand when it arrived. + +Soon we ran into a typical wonder-sight of that part of the country. I +had noticed a red glow in the sky off to the left, and on turning a +little hill we saw that the whole side of a mountain was one +tremendous fire. While this was at its worst, or most glorious, +height, the great red African moon came up over the mountain like a +huge ball of flame. The whole scene was so striking that Sugden +insisted we ought to take a picture of it. We hurried back to the +wagon and found a number of Swazis trailing it out of curiosity. With +the aid of a box of cigarettes, I pressed twelve of them into service +and got the cameras to the spot from which we wanted to take the +picture. While we were doing this little Swazis seemed to spring up +out of the ground, and before we had finished there must have been at +least four score of them wondering what the white men were trying to do. + +Sibijaan saw a chance to air his superior knowledge and I heard him +telling these little fellows a preposterous yarn. + +"You see those black boxes?" he said, pointing to the cameras. "Well, +those are the magic boxes of Nkoos Mzaan Bakoor, the great white +witch-doctor. He will look at the fire through them and soon it will +go out. If he is offended, he can make the fire burn up the whole +country and kill all the Swazis!" + +I was afraid to look back and note the effect of this beautiful lie, +but I heard the kaffir exclamation of wonder--"Ou! Ou!"--from a dozen +throats and decided that my trusty henchman had gotten away with it. + +By the time we had packed our cameras again the wagons had caught up +with us and we went on. The spot I had picked for the camp was under a +small grove of palm trees across a little stream, and we arrived there +to find that the six carriers had started a fire. It was about +midnight when our wagons reached camp, and soon after we rolled up in +our blankets and dropped off to sleep just where we stood. + +Next morning we started down the steep slopes into the Valley of +Heaven. This was a very dangerous descent for the wagons, so that it +was after midday before we reached the floor of the valley. The poor +donkeys were completely exhausted, and we camped there until next day. + +The Valley of Heaven was certainly living up to its name. It was never +so lovely, and my companions were enthusiastic in its praise. I +pointed out to them the Place of Execution and Sheba's Breasts as we +came down the mountain, and they immediately decided they would visit +both before returning to Ermelo. + +Although I remember the beauties of the Valley of Heaven as though it +were yesterday, still the difficulties that befell us there made me at +that time regard it as the "Valley of Hell." We had come down about +two thousand feet and the climate was hot, moist, and uncomfortable. +Our energy was sapped, the donkeys were worn out, and our kaffir boys +were lazy beyond all use. + +The trail ahead consisted of a succession of low hills cut by little +streams. Many of the inclines were steep, and I estimated that we +would be lucky if we made five or six miles a day. It was practically +impossible to judge distance, and this led me into error. I had picked +out a camping spot seemingly about six miles away, and Sugden and I +started to walk to it. The grass was six feet high in most places and +full of deadly snakes. Few of the little streams were fit to drink, +and the farther we walked the farther the chosen spot seemed to +recede. Finally we saw a fair-sized stream which we thought was two +miles away, but which turned out to be nearer four. When we reached it +we drank, after straining the water through our handkerchiefs. We were +very hot and uncomfortable, and were made supremely unhappy by the +realization that the wagon could not reach us for at least two days. + +There was nothing to do but go back, and we finally reached the outfit +at sunset. The donkeys were completely exhausted, so we camped right +there. I realized that for the last thirty miles before reaching the +royal kraal at Zombode we would be lucky if we made three or four +miles a day. + +Because of this experience I changed our trek time. Instead of trying +to make it in daylight, we did most of our traveling by dark. This +helped a little, but we failed to make more than a mile every two +hours, even when the going was good. To add to the misery of the trek, +the mosquitoes tormented us continually. However, these pests +introduced a little comedy into our suffering, for my companions would +recall the mosquitoes of New Jersey, U. S. A. and compare them with +those of South Africa. + +Crespinell summed up the comparison when he said: + +"For brutality and ruthlessness these 'skeeters take the biscuit, but +the New Jersey breed have got 'em skinned a mile when it comes to +technique!" + +At the end of five days of untold hardships we climbed out of the +Valley of Heaven and reached the stream that divides the royal from +the common ground at Zombode. We arrived there at about nine o'clock +at night. + +Fires were burning in front of many of the huts and there was a hum of +life in the air. The sounds were all the more noticeable because no +one appeared to have any intention of meeting us or giving us a +welcome. We pitched camp and Din prepared the evening meal. By this +time we had a score of little visitors, all Swazi children of about +ten or twelve years of age. Usually these little beggars are in bed at +this time of night, but the noise of our wagons had aroused them and +they had sneaked out of the huts to investigate. + +None of the indunas, warriors, or women came near us, and I soon +realized that we were in disfavor for some reason or other. Only a +direct command from Lomwazi or the old queen would have made the +people avoid us in this manner. However, it was not fitting that I +should visit the royal kraal without invitation, so I did not stir +from our camp that night. In the morning I announced my arrival to +Labotsibeni without the indignity of supplicating an interview. This +came about in a peculiar manner. + +Shortly after dawn I was awakened by the deep bass of a native who +seemingly was greatly annoyed. The voice was strangely familiar, but I +could not place it for the moment. In a little while Sibijaan came +into the tent with my coffee and announced that I had a visitor. + +"Ou Baas, there is a great induna outside," he said, "and he wants to +see you. He says he is very angry. Shall I tell him to go to hell?" + +Thirsting for information regarding things at the royal kraal, I bade +Sibijaan send him in. This my old playmate did with poor grace, since +he would have preferred to be cheeky to the chief. + +To my surprise, Manaan--he of the savings-bank account--strode in. He +was carrying his war tools and stood facing me for an instant in quite +a belligerent attitude. I was wearing only a thin bathrobe and for a +second or two the angry black man faced the white. Then the age-old +supremacy of race asserted itself and Manaan dropped his eyes with the +familiar "Nkoos!" + +"What the devil is the matter with you?" I demanded angrily. "Why do +you make all this row so early in the morning?" + +"Peace, Nkoos, peace!" the old induna answered. "I did not know that +it was you. I would not have made talk if I had known." + +Then he went on to explain that our donkeys had strayed across the +stream during the night and had ruined his corn patch. He insisted +that the poor beasts had eaten all the young corn and that he and all +his wives faced starvation during the coming year. What he really was +worried about, it developed, was that there would be no corn to make +tswala and in consequence he would have to go without his beer until a +new crop came in. + +I sympathized with him and told him that I would go over and see the +damage as soon as I was up and about, agreeing to pay him for it. I +felt sure that he was lying, but did not want to make an enemy of him, +since I knew that he was said to be close to Labotsibeni. In the olden +days he was leader of one of Buno's crack impis and was a noted warrior. + +In a little while I accompanied him to look at the ruined crop, and, +as I suspected, found he had lied like a kaffir. The damage was about +three shillings worth, and I told him so and offered to pay him the +money. He became very indignant. + +"This is not right, Nkoos!" he almost shouted. "I am a great induna +and cannot be treated in this way. I am one of the queen's most +important chiefs and I shall report this injustice to her." + +Now this threat suited me. If the old fool reported that I was robbing +him, he would also be notifying Labotsibeni that I was in the +neighborhood. + +"I am willing to abide by what the queen decides," I said. "You tell +her that I await her word. I shall state my side to her, and you can +state yours!" + +This was what I really wanted. It would bring me before the old queen +and allow me to ask her about the coronation. With this understanding +Manaan left for the royal kraal, while I went to breakfast. Shortly +after we had finished, Manaan returned. + +"I have seen the queen," he announced in an important manner, "and she +is much offended because you have treated Manaan so unjustly. She says +that you must pay me five shillings and a bottle of gin, and then the +debt will be satisfied." + +To make the payment seem greater I protested for a moment and then +gave it to the old fellow. I asked him how the queen was, but he +answered evasively. This brought the suspicion that he had not seen +Labotsibeni at all and had concocted the story about her decision as +to the payment. Manaan would have been quite capable of this because +he had lived for some time among the whites in Johannesburg and had +been schooled in guile. + +Nevertheless, I was satisfied that he had brought word to the royal +kraal that I was there, and I expected that I would soon receive a +message from the queen to come and see her. When the sun showed that +it was nearly noon I decided to force her hand and sent Sibijaan with +presents, which means gin, to the royal kraal. He returned presently, +saying that Lomwazi had taken them from him and that they had been +accepted by the queen. + +Sunset came and yet there was no word from the old lady, and I began +to grow anxious. I sent for Manaan and cultivated him in an attempt to +get some information. He soon became drunk and told me many little +things, none of which threw much light on my problem. One statement, +however, was important. + +"All the people, except Lomwazi and a few of those close to the queen, +want Sebuza to be king," he said. "They are tired of being ruled by a +queen, and Lomwazi asks too much. He always wants more cattle and corn +from each kraal, and the people are dissatisfied. Even now they are +waiting for Sebuza to come down out of the mountains and it is said +they will demand that he be made king then!" + +Part of this was very interesting. I was glad to know that the people +wanted Sebuza, but I doubted that they would dare to ask for him to be +appointed king. The Swazis are subservient to their rulers and it was +unthinkable that they would assume to ask Labotsibeni to abdicate. +They were very afraid of the old queen; she seemed to exert some sort +of extraordinary influence over them. It was cheering, however, to +know that I had public opinion on my side. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +Labotsibeni refuses to see me--Sugden and my men escape +assassination--A fruitless conference--We flee to Lebombo--Oom Tuys +turns up--We confer with Queen Tzaneen and Lochien--Five-and-ten-cent- +store jewelry has persuasive powers--Sugden falls ill--We build his +coffin--Sebuza returns from his sanctification. + + +Next morning I got up, pocketed my pride, and decided to call on Queen +Labotsibeni. When I reached the entrance of the royal kraal I was met +by Lomwazi. He was furtive in manner and did not look me in the eyes. +His voice, as usual, was quite low, and for once his dramatic gestures +were lacking. + +I demanded to be allowed to see Labotsibeni. Lomwazi shook his head +and spread out his hands deprecatingly. + +"The queen will not see you, Nkoos," he said, "and she sends word that +you are not to camp on the royal ground." + +"But why won't she see me? I bring her presents and much gin," I +protested. "She promised that I should attend the coronation of Prince +Sebuza!" + +"She is very, very old, but still she doesn't want to die," added the +wily Lomwazi, glancing at me out of the corner of his eye. + +At last I understood. Lomwazi had let the cat out of the bag and the +delay in the coronation of Sebuza explained itself. Tempted by the +great price I had offered for the picture rights--five hundred cattle, +five hundred gallons of gin, and five hundred pounds in gold--the old +queen had overlooked the fact that Sebuza's accession to the throne +meant her death. At the time I made the bargain with her, or with +Lomwazi as her agent, she had consoled herself with the thought that +the British Government would be able to save her life. Now she was +afraid that the government might not be able to do so and wanted the +coronation delayed indefinitely, or put off for good. + +Labotsibeni and Lomwazi were in an uncomfortable position. They faced +either the certainty of being sacrificed when Sebuza mounted the +throne or the breaking of their contract with me. In addition, the +sentiment of the people of Swaziland was against the old ruler and +Lomwazi must have known it. Under Labotsibeni there had been more than +twenty years of peace, and there had grown up a feeling that the +nation was becoming decadent without a war, if only a little one +against some inferior tribe. The British had backed the old queen in +all her moves toward keeping peace within her borders, and the +fighting men of Swaziland were unhappy at not having any opportunities +to show their mettle. From the days of Ama-Swazi the Swazis had been a +warlike people, and the bloodthirsty Buno had developed their ferocity +by frequent raids and forays on neighboring tribes. The accession of +Sebuza, young and warlike, made the Swazis feel that they would have a +real leader again, and the fact that the crown prince was the son of +Buno added to their desire for him to reign. + +I had left Oom Tuys in Ermelo with the understanding that he would +join us in Zombode. I began to wish he would show up, since I seemed +to be butting my stubborn Boer head against a brick wall and my uncle +was the one white man in all the Transvaal in whom old Labotsibeni +placed her trust. I knew that she would not refuse to see him and +there was a chance of his getting her to agree to the coronation. + +Realizing that we were in for a delay that might last several months, +Dr. Sugden and his companions decided to study the Swazis at close +range and compile data concerning the tribe. To me was left the +politics and "wangling" of the expedition, while they started out +blithely one morning to catch Swazis. + +Their expedition was abortive, to put it mildly. Of course Sugden +would only be content with Swazi life as exhibited in the royal kraal, +and it was there that he decided to begin. I did not know this, and +thought that he was going to visit some of the little kraals where the +indunas lived. + +I was sitting in my tent thinking about sending a man to find Tuys, +when Sibijaan came running in very much excited. + +"Ou Baas, Mlung Emantzi Eenui, Makofa, and the other white man are +going to be killed at the royal kraal!" he cried. + +Now Sugden was called Mlung Emantzi Eenui--"The Man of Living and +Burning Words"--by the kaffirs, and Crespinell was given the name of +Makofa, which means "The Small Alert One." The other white man was +Rossman, of course. + +I sprang out of the tent, across the little stream, and ran to the +royal kraal. There I found my companions surrounded by a full impi of +warriors who had hemmed them in with their assegais. The white men had +drawn their revolvers and were ready to use them. It only remained for +some one to make a sudden break and there would be a killing. + +"Make way! Make way!" I yelled, diving through the throng. + +In a second or two I reached Sugden, who had the grim look that means +fight. He had Lomwazi covered with his revolver and I could see that +the induna would be the first to go if the shooting started. + +"What's all this trouble?" I demanded, as though I were the chief of +all. "Why are these warlike manoeuvers? Why have these warriors +stopped my men?" + +Lomwazi hesitated for a moment, during which I could see the tension +relax and the Swazis begin to drop their spear-points. + +"It is forbidden that white men enter the royal kraal," the chief +said. "These men tried to force their way in. They said they wanted to +see all things in the kraal. The queen sent her own impi to stop them +and gave orders that they were to be killed if they did not go away!" + +Sugden was much disgusted, and gave his side of the affair. + +"I only wanted to take a look around," he said. "We were just inside +the kraal when these men came running from every direction and +surrounded us. I thought we would have to fight our way out and would +have popped some of them off if Lomwazi had not come up. He told us to +get out, and here we are!" + +That seemed to be all there was to it. However, it was a bad affair, +as it put me in the position of trying to break into the queen's kraal +without permission. Later I realized that it did not make much +difference, since we were out of favor at Zombode anyway. + +I was well nigh desperate now. It seemed as though nothing could be +accomplished through Labotsibeni or Lomwazi, but I decided to make one +last appeal to him. I sent him a present by Sibijaan and asked that he +come and see me at my camp. + +My boy brought back word that Lomwazi would see me next morning, but +would meet me at the crossing of the little stream. "When the sun +reaches the royal kraal" was the time set, which must have been about +seven or seven-fifteen o'clock. + +The stream was only a short distance from our camp, and I watched +until I saw Lomwazi coming to the rendezvous. I had expected that he +would arrive with four or five of his indunas, and I had arranged that +all my white companions should accompany me to the interview. Instead, +Lomwazi brought practically the whole royal impi with him. The savages +were in full war costume and made a splendid picture as they marched, +the sun reflecting from their black shoulders and assegais. It was the +first time that Sugden and the others had seen a whole impi in all its +glory and they were much impressed. The warriors were drawn up in a +sort of regimental formation at the meeting-place, with Lomwazi +waiting in front, by the time I decided we should leave our tents. + +Since they had come armed to the conference, my companions and I +shouldered our rifles--we always wore revolvers--and walked in a +leisurely manner toward the little stream. As we came close Lomwazi +raised his arms in greeting and the impi gave us the royal salute. It +was the first time in some years that I had been thus honored. The +shrill whistle following the heavy stamp of the thousand feet gave the +Americans a real thrill. + +Lomwazi and I shook hands in a formal way and then sat down to talk +things over. I little thought that this would be the last friendly +conference I would have with him. Behind me sat my three companions, +while behind the vizier sat four or five of his high men, all lesser +indunas and leaders of warriors. It was an imposing gathering, much +like many out of which peace has come during the various savage wars +between the whites and kaffirs in the Transvaal. + +After the necessary conventional amenities, which have to do with +health and the condition of wives, I came to the main question, but +from a widely different angle. + +"Lomwazi, you and Queen Labotsibeni made a paper with me that shows I +gave you five hundred cows, five hundred gallons of gin, and five +hundred pounds in gold for the right to take pictures of the +coronation of Sebuza," I began. "Now the queen will not see me and you +will not tell me the truth when I want to know about the coronation. +Other indunas have told me that you and the queen have plotted to +prevent Sebuza becoming king--" + +"Nkoos, that is not so!" Lomwazi returned hotly, interrupting me. "We +wish Sebuza to become king and will do nothing to prevent it. It is +the government that does not wish him to become king; it is the +government, and not my mother, Labotsibeni!" + +This I knew to be partly true, but I felt sure that the government +would be willing that Sebuza should reign if the change in rulers was +accomplished without bloodshed. + +"Then if the government refuses to let Sebuza be king," I went on, +"you and the queen have obtained much wealth from me for something you +knew you could not give. There is only one thing for me to do--that +is, to hold you and the queen liable for the price of the rights she +granted me. I shall notify the government at Mbabane and ask that it +collect the money value of what you received from me. I am a friend of +the government and close to the Commissioner, and he will send to +Johannesburg for troops who will come and collect from you. If you do +not care to have me do this, you can make restitution now by giving me +the price in cows." + +Now this meant that Lomwazi would have to round up at least two +thousand head of cattle and turn them over to me. This I knew he could +do, but I also knew that he would not do it without such compulsion as +I was unable to bring. + +He glanced keenly at me while I laid down the terms of my ultimatum +and saw that I was in dead earnest. With his great cunning, Lomwazi is +a keen judge of human nature, and he watched me to see if I was +bluffing or not. He decided that I was not and listened in silence to +the end. Then he raised his eyes and spoke in the same low, level tone +he always used. + +"Nkoos, what you ask is unjust," he said. "Labotsibeni gave the word +of a Swazi queen and her word cannot be broken. You will have the +opportunity you have bought and I shall see that it is so!" + +"Yes? Then how soon will Sebuza be crowned?" I asked. + +"When Queen Labotsibeni, mother of Buno, gives the word the ceremonies +will take place," he said, and this ended the interview. + +Lomwazi threw his leopardskin cloak about his shoulders and rose, and +I got to my feet also, feeling that I had gone as far as I could, but +had gained nothing. The indunas shook hands and the impi gave their +salute as he raised his arms with the salutation, "Nkoos!" Then he +turned and went back to the royal kraal followed by the great +warriors, their plumes nodding in the sunlight. + +I realized that I had come to the end of my string at Zombode. The old +queen would not give the word for the coronation to take place and +undoubtedly Lomwazi was behind her refusal. Looking back, I do not +blame them very much; the coronation would be their death warrant and +the government was not prepared to send troops to protect them. + +That night I had a little talk with Sugden, who was feeling ill, +explaining to him what we were up against. + +"It looks as if we are out of luck," was his comment, "but there must +be some way to beat the game. I'd hate to lose out, now that we're +here. It seems to me that you ought to be able to find a way to +prevent Lomwazi from sitting on the lid much longer. Let's see if we +can't get action by talking to the other indunas." + +This did not seem a good plan to me. Sugden did not know these people +and underestimated the power of the old queen. She represented the +established order of things, and the government always objected to +anything new, particularly in the way of rulers. + +"No, I can't agree to that scheme," I told him; "but I believe I will +have a look at the other side of this game. Queen Tzaneen is reported +to be much incensed because Labotsibeni doesn't allow the coronation +and I think I will have an interview with her." + +Having taken this decision, I made arrangements to start for Lebombo, +the royal kraal of Queen Tzaneen and her son, the next morning as soon +as it was light enough to trek. That night the donkeys were all driven +in, so that they would be ready when wanted. During the weeks we had +spent at Zombode these poor animals had greatly improved. There was +good feed and water there, and they looked sleek and fresh again. + +Dawn saw us on the road to Lebombo. Camp for breakfast was made on the +bank of the little river that separates the land belonging to the two +villages, and we came in sight of the kraals after about two hours. + +Our reception here was very different. Lochien, who was the vizier, or +secretary of state, of Queen Tzaneen, and one of the sons of King +Buno, her late husband, came out to meet us. He had a number of +indunas with him and was most cordial. His first words gave me great +pleasure. + +"Welcome, Nkoos," he said. "Welcome to Lebombo! Last night the White +King of Swaziland came to Lebombo and waits for you at the royal kraal." + +This was good news, indeed. Oom Tuys had arrived and was waiting for +me! I thanked my stars that he had not gone to Zombode and thus missed +me. At last it began to look as though we would get some action. + +A few minutes later, our great wagon creaking and the boys shouting to +the donkeys, we approached the kraals and I saw a solitary figure +coming out to meet us. It was a tall heavy white man, long bearded and +wide-hatted, with the rolling gait of one whose only home is the +saddle--Oom Tuys Grobler, my uncle, the "White King of Swaziland." + +He threw his great arms about me and gave me a "bear hug," and then +held me at arms' length and looked me over. + +"So you are all right, Mzaan Bakoor?" he asked in his gruff voice. +"This morning a kaffir came and said that last night a plan was made +to stop you from coming here, and I was anxious. I only heard about it +a few minutes ago, and was on the point of starting for Zombode when +the runners came and said you were near." + +This was news to me. I did not know that Lomwazi had decided to +prevent me from going to Lebombo. It showed that he was afraid to have +me learn the truth from Tzaneen and Lochien. I was thankful that we +had not had trouble, for our patience was well nigh exhausted and +there would have been a battle if Labotsibeni's men had tried to bar +our path. + +I asked Tuys about the lay of the land at Tzaneen's kraal, and he told +me that she was very much excited over the situation. + +"The queen mother is very angry at Labotsibeni," he said. "It is +another case of the mother-in-law over again. Tzaneen feels that the +old lady will hang on to the throne as long as she lives, and as she +is now in her second hundred years that is likely to be a long time. +Only last night Tzaneen reminded me of the Swazi saying, 'If you live +to be a hundred, you live forever,' and she spoke of Labotsibeni with +bitterness. + +"Sebuza will soon return from the mountains and it will be a national +scandal for him to have to wait for his kingdom. His mother is frantic +over the situation and even talks of taking the throne by force. Of +course such things have been done,"--and he smiled--"but I told her +that the government would not stand for such action." + +Lochien then told us that the sanctification ceremonies were about +ended and Sebuza would return within the next week. As these +ceremonies also included the coming of age of the young crown prince, +he was attended by the chief witch-doctors and made to undergo +scarification and circumcision. He had to live on the barren slopes of +the mountains, his only food being wild berries and the game he killed +himself. Only the witch-doctors could visit him, and their visits were +official and hedged about with much flummery and hocus-pocus. + +Tzaneen was waiting to see us when we reached the royal kraal, and I +immediately sent her the regulation presents. A little while later +Lochien ushered Tuys and me into her presence. She is a remarkable +woman and has a very sweet and charming personality. Tall and +splendidly formed, she is an ideal Swazi queen, just as she was the +pick of the Zulu princesses at the time she became the royal wife of +Buno. Her head is large and well shaped, and she has an active brain. +With education, Tzaneen would have been a leader anywhere in the world. + +Her greeting to us was gracious and cordial. She asked if we had +brought our wagons and camp outfit, and said she would send an impi to +get them and bring them to Lebombo from Zombode if we had not. This +gave me a clue to the feeling between the two queens, because I knew +that Labotsibeni must have been annoyed when she learned that our +entire outfit had left for the rival camp. After I had assured Tzaneen +that we had arrived bag and baggage, Lochien introduced the subject of +our mission to Swaziland. In this he seemed to have the approval of +Tzaneen, who listened closely to my answers. + +I told them that I intended staying in the country until I had seen +Sebuza crowned, and this statement met their approval. But there was a +fly in the ointment, I found. + +"Queen Tzaneen is the rightful ruler of Swaziland," Lochien announced, +"because she is the royal widow of King Buno. She is the mother of +Prince Sebuza, who will soon be king. You want to see Sebuza made king +and wish to look at the ceremonies with the black boxes on legs that +you have with you. Is this not so?" + +Evidently he had heard about the cameras we had brought with us. + +"Yes, that is so," I assured him. "These black boxes make all things +live again so that everybody may see them, and we want to show all +people that Swaziland has a son of Buno for king." + +"Then, Nkoos, why did you pay Lomwazi and Queen Labotsibeni all the +money, cows, and gin for the right to use the black boxes?" Lochien +asked. + +The truth was out. They were jealous because Labotsibeni and Lomwazi +had received the purchase price of the picture rights, while they had +been ignored. I was thinking quickly and was about to smooth matters +over, when Oom Tuys broke in. + +"Mzaan Bakoor has not yet paid you for your permission to do this +thing he desires," he assured them. "He could not come to Lebombo +before, but now he is ready to pay you even more than he gave +Labotsibeni and Lomwazi." + +"The white king speaks truly," I added. "Even now I have in my wagons +more precious and more beautiful presents than I gave to them. These +presents I brought from America, across the great water of which you +have heard. I bought them in the greatest city of the world and have +carried them here for you, Nkosikaas!" + +This was a tall statement, but I knew that I could make good on it. +Tzaneen was much interested and her curiosity was whetted. We dickered +a little more, and I agreed to pay them a large amount of gin and a +certain sum of money. Then, to avoid any further demands, I ended by +going to the wagon and getting one of the mysterious packing-cases. +This I opened before Queen Tzaneen. Very slowly I began taking from it +quantities of the five-and-ten-cent-store jewelry. It fascinated her +beyond words. She put it on, draping the tawdry necklaces about her +full throat and loading her fingers with the gaudy rings. She was +completely won over, and Lochien also was deeply impressed. So peace +was restored on the subject of the price of the picture rights. Now +the road was clear for taking the pictures, that is, if we could find +the place of coronation of the savage king. + +Tuys motioned to me to leave soon after the jewelry episode, and we +went back to our wagons. + +"One thing at a time, Owen," he said. "You wanted to ask about the +coronation, I know, but we'd better wait until to-morrow. I want to +see how the land lies and find out what is going on before we force +that issue. To-morrow we'll see Tzaneen again and find out what she +plans to do about Sebuza." + +Lochien soon came to the wagons and told us that it was the queen's +pleasure that we camp a few hundred yards from Sebuza's kraal, which +adjoined that of his mother. The spot chosen was in a small grove of +tall trees among which were buried indunas who had died at Lebombo +ever since the village was founded. This was a great honor to us, +since it was sacred ground, the most sacred in the land with the +exception of "The Caves" near Zombode, where only kings and queens are +buried. + +[Illustration: DR O'NEIL AND COMPANIONS ARE RECEIVED BY QUEEN TZANEEN + +They had come to discuss the possibility of ceasing hostilities. As is +the custom, she treated them to tswala and drank first from the +calabash to show that it contained no poison] + +[Illustration: DR. O'NEIL, QUEEN TZANEEN, DR. SUGDEN, AND MR. CRESPINELL + +While Sebuza the crown prince was still in the mountains conforming +with the religious rites on attaining his manhood Dr. O'Neil realized +that both the British Government and Queen Labotsibeni were +antagonistic to Sebuza and wished to repudiate his right to the throne] + +[Illustration: WIVES OF THE PRIME MINISTER TO SEBUZA] + +[Illustration: QUEEN TZANEEN AND LOCHIEN + +She was a Zulu Princess and is the only royal widow of the famous King +Buno who had, in all, twenty-six wives. She is the mother of Crown +Prince Sebuza. Lochien is her adviser in addition to being Sebuza's +_charge d'affaires_ and commander-in-chief of all his impis] + +That night I became greatly worried over Dr. Sugden's condition. The +water he drank in the Valley of Heaven had caused fever and violent +dysentery, and he had rapidly grown worse during the last forty-eight +hours. The heat during the day was severe, and it seemed to affect him +so that he was hardly able to recover at night. I had given him +medicine and done everything I could for him, but nothing seemed to +help much. It was very discouraging to have him ill, because his +unfailing optimism and ready wit had helped us over many a hard place. + +Next day Tuys and I called on the queen, and were received as +cordially as before. As usual, she was surrounded by maids and other +women of her kraal, and it was interesting to note how affectionate +they were toward her. She is the best liked woman in Swaziland without +a doubt, and this is strange, since it is seldom that these savage +women display any affection for one another. + +We asked her how soon Sebuza would be made king. Her face darkened at +the question and I could see that it touched a sore spot. + +"Until my son, Sebuza, returns from the mountains this matter is in +the hands of Queen Labotsibeni, whom the government recognizes as +regent," she answered. "But when the prince is a man and is ready for +the throne, perhaps there will be a change!" + +I asked her what she meant, but she refused to be drawn out. Instead, +she told us about her last attempt to arrange for the coronation. + +"Only seven days ago," she said, "I sent men to see the old queen and +ask her how soon she would be ready to surrender the throne. She +refused to see them, so they gave their message to Lomwazi. He told +them that Labotsibeni would let them know when she was ready, and then +dismissed them." + +"When they left the royal kraal at Zombode many of the warriors made +menacing gestures toward them, and they came back glad to escape with +their lives. That is Labotsibeni's answer to the mother of the +rightful king of Swaziland and the royal widow of King Buno!" + +She was very indignant. After a little conversation, during which we +complimented her, as was proper, we withdrew. I noticed that there was +a gin-bottle in the corner of the royal hut and realized that Tzaneen +was not different from other kaffir royalty. + +Sugden was very low when we returned. He was the finest sort of +patient, however, for the worse became his physical condition, the +more determined he was that he would live. He kept murmuring, "Don't +give up the ship!" but I could see that he would hardly last until +morning. + +I called Crespinell and Rossman into my tent and explained how sick +the doctor was, telling them that I feared he did not have a chance. +His cheery way of looking at things had fooled them, and they were +shocked when I told them that I did not expect we would have him with +us much longer. + +"I've done everything for him that I can," I explained, "but I can't +get his fever down or stop his dysentery. He is so weak now that it is +only a question of hours before he leaves Swaziland for good. + +"There is something I want you fellows to do, however. I shall remain +with him all night and will call you if he wants to make a will or say +anything. We've got to bury him like a white man, and I want you to +knock a coffin together. Take some of the boards from the +packing-cases and the big wagon and fix a decent sort of box. Don't do +any hammering where he might hear you, because he's keyed up and might +suspect what you were doing." + +A few minutes later I saw them sneaking off among the trees, with +several of the black boys loaded down with boards. We were all blue +over Sugden's illness and the thought that he was dying cast a gloom +over the party that nothing could lift. + +That was a bad night. Sugden seemed to get weaker and weaker, and soon +I was keeping him alive with brandy. Tuys and I sat beside him in +turn, and the old Boer was as distressed as the rest of us. + +"He is such a fighting devil," he said in a whisper, when I came to +relieve him shortly before dawn. "A few moments ago he opened his eyes +and croaked that he was going back to New York when this expedition +was over and have 'one hell of a time.' I told him that I'd go with +him, and he began to tell me what we'd do. Right in the middle of a +sentence he fainted through weakness. When I brought him to with +brandy, he opened his eyes and smiled at me!" + +Dawn found Sugden still hanging on. I marveled at the vitality of the +man. His body was wasted to a mere shell, but his courage burned +bright and undiminished. Shortly after sun-up I realized that he was +likely to live another day, but that seemed the most we could hope for. + +While I was at breakfast an induna came from Lochien with word that +Sebuza had left the mountains and was on his way to Lebombo. This was +exciting news, and I went over to the royal kraal to get details. +Lochien told me that the sanctification ceremonies were over and that +the crown prince was to arrive that morning. + +"We are almost afraid to see him, Nkoos," he said. "He is now ready +for the coronation and will expect us to have all things waiting for +him." + +I could see that Tzaneen and her trusted vizier were in a nervous +condition. Sebuza was a reckless, impatient young savage and would be +much put out at any delay. The royal kraal was in a ferment of +excitement, and the warriors in Sebuza's kraal were chanting and +dancing in preparation for the welcome to their commander. + +I returned to the wagons, realizing that, being a white man and an +outsider, I was not wanted at the royal kraal when Sebuza arrived. I +would see him when he sent for me, but until then I must remain quiet +and control my impatience. + +Shortly before noon I saw the impis of both Tzaneen and Sebuza forming +in lines outside the kraals. They were dressed in their most gorgeous +costumes. The indunas and leaders wore the leopardskin cloaks, and all +had on their great plumed headdresses. I felt that Sebuza must be +close at hand, and it was not more than fifteen minutes before both +impis began to dance. This they continued for a short time, and then +came to a sudden stop. There was utter silence and at length I saw the +crown prince striding down the road, followed by at least a dozen +witch-doctors. These halted some distance behind. + +Sebuza came to a stop in front of his impi and raised his hands. +Instantly the thousand warriors raised their shields and war-clubs +above their heads and the deep-throated shout "Nkoos!" rang out. This +was followed by the thunder of their feet and then the air was split +by the shrill whistle. Three times they gave the royal salute, Sebuza +standing like a statue. + +Then, strutting like a turkey-cock, the young prince passed through +his men into his kraal. The witch-doctors followed, and then the +indunas went in. Finally his warriors broke ranks and this concluded +the homecoming of the son of Buno. + +The impi of Tzaneen still remained on duty in front of the royal +kraal, and I waited to see what they would do. In a little while I saw +Lochien go into the prince's kraal, and shortly after he and Sebuza +came out together. Sebuza pointed to our wagons, and I could see +Lochien telling him about us. Then they went to the queen's kraal and +her warriors gave Sebuza the royal salute, which he received in the +same manner as before, standing motionless before them. + +After Sebuza had entered the kraal the impi dispersed. I returned to +Sugden's side, to find him wide awake and talking faintly. He seemed +weaker than before, and I expected he would cease speaking forever any +moment. Crespinell and Rossman were with him, and he was trying to +tell them some of the stories of the Far North which he had seen acted +out when he was a surgeon in the Northwest Mounted Police. His grip on +life was extraordinary. Here he was living over in spirit the wild +days in the frozen North, while his body was practically dead and his +coffin lay behind the wagon! + +I was standing thus, quite overcome by the situation, when Sibijaan +pulled my sleeve. + +"Ou Baas, Lochien is here and wants to talk to you," he said. "He has +a message from the queen." + +Outside I found the induna dressed up in his war costume and carrying +his arms. He greeted me very formally and then told me that Tzaneen +wished me to attend a conference between Sebuza and herself, asking me +to bring Oom Tuys along. After delivering his message Lochien unbent +and we had a few words together concerning Sebuza. He informed me that +the prince was much annoyed that his throne was not ready and was +eager to pay an armed visit to Labotsibeni. + +Tuys and I were received with royal honors when we reached the queen's +kraal. There was the usual delay in observing the proper formalities, +and then we entered the royal hut, to find Sebuza sitting by his +mother. Tzaneen was as cordial as usual and seemed proud to have the +future king by her side. + +Sebuza, whom Tuys told me later was the perfect picture of Buno in his +youth, was haughty and seemed suffering acutely from a sense of his +own importance. He was wearing a peculiar headdress and several +strings of the five-and-ten-cent store beads I had given his mother. + +Since we were in the presence of royalty, it was not fitting that we +begin conversation, except to receive and give the usual greetings. +Tzaneen started the ball rolling. + +"My noble son," she said, turning to the prince, "these are the white +men who were the friends of your father, the great King Buno. The big +one with a beard is Oom Tuys, whom Buno called 'The White King of +Swaziland' and whom your father made the guide and guardian of our +people when he died. The other, he of the shaven face, is Mzaan +Bakoor, who makes wonderful magic with little black boxes on thin +legs. The white men are our friends and come to Lebombo to assist in +your coronation." + +During this introduction Sebuza regarded us keenly, and his scrutiny +seemed to satisfy him. When Tzaneen had finished Oom Tuys made a +little speech. + +"Sebuza, son of Buno and of Tzaneen, rightful Queen of Swaziland," he +said impressively, "your father at his death made me your guardian, +and I promised him that I would watch over and protect you. I am 'The +White King of Swaziland' and the government holds me responsible for +all that takes place here. With my nephew, Mzaan Bakoor, I have come +to see you placed on the throne of your father. We have pledged +ourselves to assist you in every way, except to provoke war. We shall +remain here until you have been made king." + +Tuys said much more than this, but what I have translated is about the +sense of all of it. Sebuza thawed quickly, once he had found out what +we were in Lebombo for, and then we all had a pleasant talk. He asked +innumerable questions and was much interested in what had happened at +Zombode. + +His answer to one of my questions was very typical. I had asked him +how many people were his subjects in Swaziland. He thought for a +moment, and then answered, "Mzaan Bakoor, can you count the blades of +grass in a field?" + +The interview ended immediately after we informed Sebuza that we had +presents for him in our wagons. He said that he wanted to see our +outfit and would go with us, and a few moments later we all left for +the camp. + +Several indunas accompanied us, and the stately head witch-doctor, +L'Tunga, also went with us. I regarded this as rather impertinent, but +was very glad of his presence shortly. + +Crespinell and Rossman were much interested in Sebuza and were only +too willing to gratify his curiosity concerning the "little black +magic boxes on thin legs." They took a number of pictures of him, some +of which filled him with awe when they were given to him next day. I +produced a box of the "jewelry" and presented it to him with a great +flourish. He was fairly overcome by its gorgeousness. Soon he had +bedecked himself much after the fashion of a Christmas tree and +strutted about like a peacock. Tuys told me to "go slow with the gin," +so I only gave him a few bottles. Strange as it may appear, Sebuza was +not enthusiastic about the liquor, and later I found that L'Tunga had +taught him that it was a kind of "white man's poison." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +L'Tunga's "muti" cures the sick white man--Sebuza chooses his wives--I +receive a message from His Majesty's High Commissioner for +Swaziland--A flying trip to Mbabane--The Government refuses sanction +to Sebuza's coronation--How witch-doctors smoke dagga weed. + + +Sugden was wide awake when we reached the camp and despite his +condition was overcome with curiosity. He could see nothing, being +shut in by the tent-walls, and was too weak to get up and look out. +Suddenly, while we were watching Sebuza enjoy his ornaments, I saw the +side of the tent being feebly punched from within. I raised the flap, +and there was Sugden regarding us with his fever-bright eyes. He hated +to be left out of the party and had signaled for me to count him in. I +went to him, but my heart sank. He was the sickest man I have ever +seen. Except for his blazing eyes, he had all the look of a dead man. + +Every one looked at us, and a second later L'Tunga leaned over me and +asked what was the matter with the "sick white man." I held Sugden's +poor head in my arms as I told him. The witch-doctor nodded and then +straightened up. + +"Nkoos, I will cure him!" he said. "I will make a magic that will make +him well. I go, but I will come back soon and bring the muti." + +He left, and I laid Sugden down and pulled the tent flap. He was +exhausted by his effort to join the party and was nodding with the +sleep that was nigh unto death. + +Now I was very curious about the "muti" of the witch-doctor. I knew +that their rites and rituals were all humbug dressed up in feathers, +but every now and then they did something that was quite amazing. It +was certain that they knew things about the herbs of their country +that we white men did not, and I never felt sure that they were the +fakirs we thought them to be. + +In a few minutes L'Tunga returned, and this time he carried a wand +tipped with feathers. He stood for a moment regarding us, and then +went to the side of the tent and drew up the flap, showing poor old +Sugden asleep but barely alive. Then L'Tunga motioned me to help him +move the cot out into the sunlight. + +Carefully, for this savage was as gentle as a woman, we placed Sugden +with his head facing the sun, and then L'Tunga got busy. We stood back +to give him room, and he certainly needed it. He started to dance and +chant, circling the sick bed and waving his wand round and round. I +could not understand what he chanted, but it seemed to be something +about it being time for the "devil" to leave the sick white man, since +he, L'Tunga, had come. + +This ceremony must have lasted fully fifteen minutes, and Sugden slept +through it all. I watched his breathing, for I was afraid that he +would not live. The show ended with the witch-doctor picking up a +handful of dust and holding it to Sugden's nostrils. After a moment he +threw the dust to the winds and then drew from his loin-cloth a small +package wrapped in skin. This he undid, and then asked for "emantzi, +emantzi," meaning water. Crespinell brought him a little mug full of +it, and he poured all but a few tablespoonfuls on the ground. Then he +took some of the contents of the little package and mixed it with the +water in the mug. + +I had been thinking rapidly. He could not hurt Sugden, since the white +man was beyond all human aid, and was only living through sheer will +power. There was a faint chance that he might do him good, and I made +up my mind to let the witch-doctor alone. + +A moment later L'Tunga had forced Sugden to drink the contents of the +mug. Immediately he dropped off to sleep, as though drugged. After +watching him a moment L'Tunga turned to me and said: + +"At sunrise to-morrow I will come and give him more muti. In three or +four days he will be well!" + +Then, with all the dignity of a great civilized specialist, he +shouldered his magic wand and withdrew. + +Sebuza and the rest of us had watched his operations with great +interest, and the young prince left shortly after, his indunas +carrying the "jewelry" and gin. + +We were all curious to see the effect of the witch-doctor's +prescription, and had quite an argument about it. I found that Tuys +was sure that it would cure Sugden, and both Crespinell and Rossman +were inclined to agree with him. I remained skeptical and sent for +Sibijaan to ask him what he thought. I knew that my old playmate was +in touch with many things that a white man could not know and I asked +him about the "muti" that L'Tunga had given Sugden. + +"Ou Baas, it is a magic leaf," he told me, "and only the head +witch-doctor knows where it grows. They say it is found in only one +place, and that is near Sheba's Breasts. He gets it when the moon +dies, and always goes alone. But it will cure 'Mlung Emantzi Eenui. +The 'muti' is only for royalty and some of the great indunas. L'Tunga +would not give it to the common people." + +He was so certain that the medicine would save Sugden that I began to +find myself half-believing that it would. That night I sat by the +latter's bedside for many hours. He never stirred. All night long he +slept as though heavily drugged, never once making a move. Next +morning the fever had much abated and his pulse was nearly normal. He +did not awake, however, and when L'Tunga arrived to give him another +dose, he only came to enough to swallow it. I noted, though, that the +dysentery had stopped. + +Four days later Sugden was well. He was weak as a cat, but food soon +remedied that, and within ten days he was on the job and as cheerful +as ever. I made up my mind from that time on not to scoff at +witch-doctors. I tried to get L'Tunga to give me a little of his +"muti," but this he resolutely refused to do, even when I offered to +buy it with all sorts of things dear to the savage heart. Some day I +am going to get some of that "muti" and have it analyzed; it may be a +drug that will be of value to all of us who live in that section of +South Africa. + +During Sugden's recuperation Tuys and I had visited the royal kraal +every day and had always had pleasant talks with both Sebuza and his +mother. But we did not succeed in getting any nearer to the +coronation. The queen was entirely at a loss what to do and Sebuza +kept growing more impatient every day. As he was a man now, he felt +entitled to start housekeeping, and his mother set about procuring +wives for him. Lochien assisted in this delicate operation, and it was +rather an interesting event. The Swazis follow about the same +procedure in this business as their civilized white brethren. The only +difference is that the Swazi method does not employ so much camouflage. + +The fact that Sebuza had reached manhood and would soon become king +was known throughout practically all the savage tribes of South +Africa, though it naturally was of paramount interest in his own +country. All the indunas and his relations, such as Umzulek, +Debeseembie, Vilakazi, and others, knew that he would have to have +wives. Their children were logical candidates for this honor, so that +there were many conferences at Lebombo between Tzaneen and those who +had daughters to sell. + +Now the Swazi, from the highest to the lowest, sells his women. Women +are the "pound sterling" among all the savage tribes, and the unit of +value is five cows for an average maid who is young, sound in limb and +wind, and trained to the primitive duties of her race. These consist +chiefly in ability to do a decent day's work in the fields, the making +of tswala, and the cleaning of a hut or kraal. Of course the care of +children is considered important. + +A Swazi's wealth is measured by the number of wives he has. The number +of his cows and other livestock is secondary. For instance, Umzulek is +regarded as a millionaire because he has sixty wives and more than two +hundred and forty children. The average Swazi induna has five or more +wives, and some have many more. + +The price of a woman depends greatly on her birth and beauty. All the +Swazi women have fine bodies, and many are very handsome, according to +the native standard. Princesses sell for as much as fifty cows apiece, +and a wife is always proud if she brings more than the market price. +In fact, her importance as a wife is usually based on her purchase +price. + +When the time arrived for Sebuza to choose some wives, there were +quite a number awaiting his inspection. The morning that he looked +them over they were assembled in the "Sacred Bathing Pool," a sort of +market-place. Their owners, mostly parents, stood beside the crown +prince and extolled the virtues of their offspring. The maidens were +lined up along the banks of the pool and the prince examined them most +minutely. + +It was almost pathetic to see how these dusky belles bore up under his +inspection. Each looked appealingly at Sebuza, much after the fashion +of a dog that hopes to be petted, and almost quivered with the hope +that she would be selected. The thought came to me that the rejected +ones must face a hard life when they were brought back to their home +kraals. + +Sebuza chose five of the girls, and they were straightway sent to his +kraal. The rejected ones were immediately clothed and their owners +took them away. Later in the day Lochien told me that all the girls +selected by Sebuza were exceptionally high caste and that between +forty and fifty cows had been paid for each. + +My companions were sadly disappointed over Sebuza's wholesale +marriage. They had expected a wild ceremony and much savage +celebration, but I explained to them that the Swazis did not go in for +that sort of thing. There are no marriage ceremonies whatever--the man +pays for his wife and she belongs to him from that hour until he dies. +He may accumulate other wives, and this custom is so old that all the +wives live together in peace, such a thing as jealousy of the white +kind being unknown. From what I have seen of the toilsome lives of +these wives, it would seem to me that their contentment is based on +the old saw which sagely observes that "misery loves company." Another +advantage of plural wives is that each additional wife lessens the +labors of the others. + +Although there are no marriage rites beyond payment for the wife, +there are very strict customs in regard to widows. If the deceased +husband is an induna of importance or a connection of the royal +family, it is customary for the king to take his pick of the widows. +If, however, he has no interest in them, the nearest male relation who +can afford to keep them inherits as many as he wishes. Of course, when +a husband dies all his wives shave their heads in token of mourning. +As they have trained their hair to grow in a sort of pyramid, the hair +is shaved clean up to this structure. Daughters of the dead man have +their hair shaved right off; if they are already wives, this does not +apply, since the claim of the husband is greater than that of any +other relative. + +We did not pay our usual visit to Tzaneen the day Sebuza married his +first installment of wives. Instead, Tuys and I remained in camp +planning some way to accomplish our mission and my companions made +good their threat to learn something first-hand about Swazi life. + +Next morning trouble of another kind occurred. A government messenger +arrived with a communication for me. He had located me at Zombode, +where they told him that I had gone on to Lebombo. This messenger was +a Swazi induna with six warriors, and he carried himself with a good +deal of swank. Evidently he was impressed with his importance. I know +he snubbed Sibijaan, and my boy was breathing fire when he came to +announce this arrival. + +The messenger waited for me in front of the tent, with his warriors +drawn up behind him. It was quite a military turnout, and he saluted +me with gravity and impressiveness. Across one shoulder he had a small +despatch-case on which were the arms of Great Britain in well-polished +brass. From this he took an official looking envelope and handed it to +me with a flourish. + +It was a communication from His Majesty's High Commissioner for +Swaziland, and it "begged most respectfully to call to your attention" +the fact that I had passed through Mbabane without acquainting the +government officials with the details of my expedition into British +territory. At once I realized my mistake, and could have kicked myself +for not calling on the Commissioner and telling him about my project. +I knew how these British officials work. First they are punctiliously +polite and request information. If they do not get it speedily, they +remain polite but make certain definite demands. If still unsatisfied, +they become annoyed in a polite manner and take "proper measures." +These latter oftentimes consist of a "flying column," which makes it +decidedly uncomfortable for the object of their well-bred attentions. + +I read the missive from the Commissioner and for a moment intended +replying to it. Then I realized that any reply would seem impolite and +possibly evasive, so I decided to make a quick trip to Mbabane and +make the laggard call on the Honorable Mr. Honey. I gave directions +that the messenger and his men should be fed, and then had Sibijaan +inspan the six mules and prepare the wagonette for the trip. + +Oom Tuys was missing and I suspected that he had gone to the royal +kraal. I went over there and found him sitting with Lochien outside +the royal hut. The queen was asleep inside and several of her maids +were busily engaged in hairdressing, a most important function among +high class Swazi women. + +I told Tuys what I intended doing and he agreed that it was the right +and proper thing. One caution he gave me, however. + +"Forget I am here, Owen," he admonished. "The British don't like it, +as you know. If Honey asks about me, you will have to lie. I am not +here!" + +We talked in Dutch, and he told me that he would keep the kettle +boiling while I was away and try to gain a step or two in my absence. +He seemed quite happy and enjoying himself with Lochien, so I left him +after he had reminded me that it would be a good thing to get the +messenger and his men out of the camp as soon as possible. + +We all started together for Mbabane. I had practically nothing in the +wagonette and the mules were in fine fettle after their long rest. +Sibijaan drove, and it was not long before we left the messenger and +his escort far behind. The Valley of Heaven was as beautiful as ever +and the trip a pleasant one. We arrived at Mbabane on the evening of +the second day, having made better than twenty miles a day. + +I stopped at the little hotel and the mules were turned into the kraal +of the livery-stable across the way. After washing the travel stains +away, I reported to the Commissioner's office. Owing to the midday +rest, or siesta, he usually remained at his desk until about seven +o'clock, and I caught him shortly before he closed up shop. + +The interview was typical of governmental business as conducted by +such officials. My name was taken in by his clerk and shortly after I +entered the comfortable office with its large screened Windows. Mr. +Commissioner Honey sat at his English desk writing with a scratchy +pen. After a moment he looked up. + +"Well, Doctor O'Neil?" he said with a rising inflection. + +It was just as though he had reminded me that I was guilty and was +waiting to hear me plead. There were a dozen other meanings, all +unpleasant, in that little word "well." I never realized before that +one monosyllable could mean so much. I knew that he had me right, as +it were, and I decided to act as innocent as possible. + +"Mr. Commissioner, I received your letter," I said, "and I considered +it would be best and more polite to reply to it in person than to send +an answer by your messenger." + +"Very good, Doctor, very good," he answered. "Now will you be so kind +as to tell me what you are doing at Zombode?" + +I did so. I told him all about the plan to take pictures of the +coronation of Sebuza and how I was meeting obstacles which appeared +insuperable. I told him that I had moved my outfit to Lebombo and gave +him satisfactory reasons for the change. I could see that my candor +impressed him favorably. There was no reason why it should not. What I +told him was the truth. Of course I related how L'Tunga had saved Dr. +Sugden's life, and this impressed him deeply. He let me talk for some +twenty minutes, and then leaned back in his chair and gave me some +advice. + +"If I were you, Doctor," he said, "I would not waste more time waiting +for Sebuza's coronation. It is my opinion that this will not take +place for some time, possibly a year or so. You may not know it, but +the young gentleman is not in the best graces of His Majesty's +Government and it may mean a long delay before official permission is +granted for him to reign. + +"Your expedition is costing you a lot of money and it seems a shame +for you to remain in Swaziland with no chance of fulfilling your +mission. If you will take my advice, you will return to Ermelo and +wait until I send you word that the coronation has received the +official sanction of our government." + +This was a blow to my hopes. I had no idea that Sebuza would not be +recognized by the authorities and it began to look as though my +expedition were a wild goose chase after all. We talked a little while +longer, but I was not able to find any specific reason for the +government's dislike of Sebuza. Apparently there was a general feeling +that he would try to follow in the footsteps of his father, Buno the +Terrible, and the government regarded Swaziland as a sleeping dog that +it would be unwise to awaken. + +Our talk ended when Mr. Honey rose to his feet with the remark, "Of +course you are dining with me tonight?" + +I assured him that I would be most pleased, and he told me that eight +o'clock was the hour. This barely gave me time to get back to my hotel +and dress, but I made it. I got into my dinner-coat and fresh linen +while I cursed the habits of the English. They will take +civilization--particularly of the "dinner" kind--with them no matter +where they go! + +Dinner proved a delightful affair. There were half a dozen people +there, including several of the minor officials and their wives. It +was a gay party and the food was excellent, being served in London +fashion by several silent-footed Indians. The thought came to me that +British officials certainly "do themselves well." We talked about many +things, none of them concerning Swaziland or its coronations, and it +was a pleasure to have my worries banished for a few hours. + +After dinner we played "bridge," and then I went back to my hotel +feeling as if I had stepped out of an English drawing-room into the +heart of Swaziland. At his door the Commissioner shook hands and gave +me a parting word. + +"Better come back and avoid trouble, Doctor," he said. "There isn't +likely to be any coronation this year and you always run the change of +getting into a fight. If you stay, be careful! His Majesty's +Government is interested in the peace of Swaziland. Goodnight and +cheerio!" + +[Illustration: PRINCESSES AT THE SACRED BATHING POOL + +Previous to being offered for the choice of Crown Prince Sebuza of the +Swazis] + +[Illustration: A SCENE AT THE ROYAL BATHING POOL] + +I was rather blue that night as I went to sleep. It looked as though +my voyages, privations, and trouble had all been for nothing. + +Next morning Sibijaan and I set off bright and early. He told me that +a kaffir had chummed with him at the kraal and had enquired whether +Oom Tuys was with my expedition. Sibijaan had lied, as he knew he +must, and then I understood why the Commissioner had carefully +refrained from making me perjure myself. My only hope was that +Sibijaan had been a convincing liar. Otherwise, the fact that Tuys was +with me would make the Commissioner watchful of my activities. + +On the way back through the Valley of Heaven I came to the conclusion +that something had to be done, and done quickly, if Sebuza was to be +made king. What this something was, however, I only had a vague idea. +I wanted to talk it over with Tuys before taking any action, since his +help would be necessary. + +My uncle was waiting for me when I reached camp and seemed anxious to +know what the Commissioner had said about him. When I told him that he +had not mentioned his name, his pride seemed hurt, but he cheered up +when I related how the kaffir spy had tried to pump Sibijaan. + +"I would hate to think that the British have ceased to worry about +me," he said. "I have had a good deal of fun by teasing them, and I'm +not ready yet to settle down and become a farmer all the time!" + +There was not much harm in Tuys, but he was Boer enough to enjoy +worrying the British and the fact that he was not wanted in Swaziland +made his sojourns there all the more enjoyable. + +Next day we visited Tzaneen, and I found that she was much interested +in my sudden trip to Mbabane. Her indunas had told her that I had +received a summons to visit the Commissioner and she was curious to +know all about it. I told her why Mr. Honey wanted to know about me +and then repeated his advice. + +"Yes, Mzaan Bakoor, I know all about the government opposition to my +son becoming king," she said. "He has so many followers that they are +afraid of him. The British fear Sebuza because they would sooner have +a weak old woman like Labotsibeni in Swaziland than a strong man and a +son of Buno." + +"How many followers has Sebuza, Nkosikaas?" I asked, for this was part +of what I was thinking. + +"Mzaan Bakoor, you of great magic, can you count the blades of grass +in the field?" she replied. + +Then she assured me that all Swaziland was behind the young prince. +She further told me that this was the chief reason why Sebuza was +disliked by the government and added that he had been impudent to some +British officials. I had heard rumors of this, but had placed small +weight in them. Now, it seemed, Sebuza must have over overstepped the +mark and no reconciliation was possible for some time. This, added to +what I had heard in Mbabane, made me despair of accomplishing the +object for which I had come to Lebombo. There was more talk along the +same line and we treated the queen to a bottle of gin. This led to a +peculiar incident. + +That night Sebuza came to our camp and asked to see me. I thought he +might have something of importance to communicate, but all he asked +was that I stop giving gin to his mother! This, of course, was +impossible. She was in authority until he became king and her request +for liquor was a command we dared not disobey. + +Sugden had spent the afternoon with L'Tunga and had watched the +witch-doctors smoke dagga weed. I had forgotten to tell him about this +and he was much excited over the discovery. With his faculty for +observation, he had made a serious study of how the Swazi uses the +weed and was much interested in its effects. + +"L'Tunga took me to his witch-doctors' school," he told me, "and I +watched them smoke dagga. It is a small leaf that must be something +like tea before it is dried. Believe me, it has a 'kick.' There were +about twenty of these witch-doctors sitting in a circle in their +kraal, all hitting the pipe. They have a crazy way of smoking it, too. +You've seen the pipe, haven't you? It's a great long thing, very badly +made, and it takes a strong man to make it draw. + +"The way they smoke is this. The first man takes a calabash of water +and then drops a coal into the pipe, thus lighting it. He next sucks +on the pipe until he gets his mouth full of smoke. Then he attempts to +fill his mouth with water, all the while trying to prevent any of the +smoke from escaping. When he can no longer hold the smoke and water in +his mouth, he blows them out together. It is a sort of smoky +shower-bath! + +"Most of them could only do it once. Almost before they could pass the +pipe on to the next doctor, they would keel over and go sound asleep. +For some reason or other the smoke did not affect them all in the same +way. Some of them became happy and began to chant, but they, too, soon +grew drowsy. For plain unadulterated 'kick,' the dagga weed has it +over anything I've ever seen, though it resembles hemp in its action." + +It seems that L'Tunga did not join this smoke-party, but took Sugden +to where he could see the common Swazis indulge in the same pastime. +Not being allowed the great pipe of the witch-doctors, they had a +method of their own. + +First they dig a little hole in the ground. Next a narrow trench is +scraped out of the earth leading from this hole to another of about +the same size. At the bottom of this trench is placed a freshly cut +stick, and this is buried in the hard soil by covering it with wet +clay. When the clay is firmly packed the stick is drawn out, leaving a +little tunnel. Then clay is used to build a small mound over the +second hole, through which an opening is made which connects it with +the little tunnel. This is the mouthpiece of the pipe, the tunnel is +the stem, and the first hole is the bowl. + +"The Swazis filled the hole with dagga weed and lighted it with a hot +cinder from the fire in front of the kraal," Sugden concluded. "Then, +one by one, they sucked the smoke through the mouthpiece. They used +the water method, also. It was an amazing sight! One after another +they would fall over, the next man at the pipe usually having to drag +the body of the last one out of the way." + +I had seen these dagga orgies before and knew what they were like. +Sugden, however, thought it a most unusual spectacle and would have +taken a whiff of the dagga himself if he had been urged. His interest +was purely scientific, of course, and he succeeded in obtaining a few +leaves of the plant which he proposed to have analyzed when we reached +civilization again. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +Witch-doctors of Swaziland--How they brought a famine--L'Tunga's +school of witch-doctoring--The "Poison Test" to settle ownership--The +professional witch-doctor's equipment--L'Tunga decides a murder +case--Some genuine cures. + + +Dagga weed was Sugden's most interesting discovery up to that time and +it whetted his appetite. I pointed out to him that the witch-doctors' +craft would be a good thing to investigate and he went after this like +a bloodhound on a hot scent. We all became interested, and I soon +found myself whiling away the tedium of waiting for the coronation by +running down evidence of the art of "witch-doctoring." + +What we discovered made me realize the wisdom of the government, which +had recently passed strict laws against the witch-doctors. For a time +L'Tunga regarded our curiosity as a great impertinence and did +everything possible to prevent our getting more information than was +readily available. Finally, one night, he grew confidential and told +us why the government had set its foot down on his brothers of the +craft. He did this chiefly because Dr. Sugden and I had shown him that +we were "white witch-doctors" and thus had established a sort of +fraternity among fellow practitioners. + +"The bad witch-doctors caused all the trouble," he said, "and it was +their own fault that the government made laws against them. None of +the doctors in my 'lodge' were guilty of these offenses, but we have +to suffer with the rest. Like you white doctors, I cure the sick and +drive out evil spirits." + +I had not claimed to drive out spirits, but I am not sure that Sugden +had not made such a statement. He always did things in a thorough +manner and L'Tunga might have misunderstood him when he told him what +healers we were. + +"The trouble began a little while ago," the witch-doctor went on, +"when a number of strange doctors came among us. They were from the +gold country to the west and they had many queer tales to tell. They +told our people that they were fools to work for the white men and +that they ought to rise up and drive them out of the country. + +"I do not know where they received their learning, but they said that +our people were as good as the white men and told them that they were +fools to let white men govern them. Our people listened and became +much excited. They talked of making war and there was much unrest. The +warriors began to gather, and the Boers and other white men sent +messengers and spies to find out what was going on. + +"However, these strange witch-doctors talked too much and made too +many promises. Soon they began to tell our people that they need not +grow any more corn nor breed any more cattle. They promised that there +would be a great rain of corn and that millions of cows would come +into the country for any one who wanted them. The people were +convinced and sat about in idleness, waiting for the free food. The +end of this was that there was much hunger in our land and many of the +people starved to death. + +"I went about when these strange witch-doctors told these lies and +warned our people that starvation would come. But they scoffed at me +and would not even bow to my most sacred charms. They said I belonged +to the old order and that the new witch-doctors were the only ones +worth following. For some time--too long a time--I had no honor and it +was not until starvation came that the people again listened to me. + +"Then the government learned of all these things and sent food to the +people, so that not so many died. Some of the strange witch-doctors +were caught and killed, but most of them escaped. + +"Making starvation was not the only crime they did. So foolish were +the people that they believed in them and for a time would do anything +they said. Some of the doctors told them to commit murders and sold +them charms that were to prevent them from getting caught. A number of +killings took place and many women were stolen. When the murderers +were caught and brought to court, they told how the doctors had +advised them to kill and even named the number of cows they had paid +for the charms that were supposed to protect them. When the government +heard of this they became very angry and passed laws against +witch-doctors." + +L'Tunga was full of this invasion of Swaziland by these strange +witch-doctors and told us stories about it for several hours. One was +as amusing as it was illuminating. It seemed that two young indunas +had a difference of opinion over a woman. They both tried to buy her +and bid against each other, so that the successful one had to pay +three or four times her market value. This hurt the purchaser's +feelings, while the loser was angry because he had been outbid. The +result was that the latter went to one of the witch-doctors and bought +a charm to protect him while he unostentatiously murdered his rival. +At about the same time the other induna bought a charm from another of +these witch-doctors and started out to slay his enemy. Before they +could meet the two witch-doctors compared notes and decided it would +be a bad thing for them if there was a killing. The doctor whose charm +proved valueless would lose prestige in the villages he was +plundering. So they agreed to prevent bloodshed, and did so by proving +that the woman in question was bewitched and thus only fit to serve +them! One of them took her, and the indunas decided to forget their +differences. However, when the crash came, after the starvation +episode, they hunted up these witch-doctors and promptly killed them. + +"I have never heard what became of the woman," concluded L'Tunga, "but +I fear she is no longer in danger of being bewitched." + +Before leaving us that night L'Tunga agreed to tell us everything +about his profession--with reservations, I suspected. He invited us to +visit his school where he trained the young witch-doctors, and we +decided to do so next day. His invitation, he explained, included only +Sugden and myself, as he knew that none of the rest of my party were +"white witch-doctors." He was extending to us a sort of "professional +courtesy," as it were. + +We learned more about witch-doctoring at the school in a short hour +than we had during all the weeks we had been in its proximity. The +school was in a small kraal set apart from the others, and we found +about a score of would-be "doctors" in attendance. We must have +arrived at a slack moment, for they were all smoking dagga weed and +enjoying it to the full. L'Tunga, nevertheless, showed us all over the +place and painstakingly explained everything of interest. One small +hut, however, was forbidden to us. He explained that it was the +sanctuary where the charms were kept, and that if white men entered +it, none of the charms would ever be of any use. "We'd put a curse on +'em!" Sugden tersely put it. + +It was at the end of this tour of inspection that we received a +practical demonstration of how a regular witch-doctor works. We were +beginning to examine L'Tunga's professional equipment when one of the +neophytes approached and with the utmost respect informed him that he +was wanted. Of course we went along, and found quite a gathering at +the gate of the kraal. In the center were two large and indignant +warriors. They were all chattering away at a great rate, but all talk +ceased immediately when L'Tunga stepped out of the gate. He was +absolute master of the situation, and the deference with which these +common people treated him showed that they knew it. + +"Why do you disturb L'Tunga and his white friends?" he demanded. "Do +you not know that these are white witch-doctors of great magic and are +too great to even look on such lowly people as you?" + +Properly rebuked, the crowd dropped its eyes, and then L'Tunga quickly +found out what was wanted. It seemed that the two warriors each +claimed to own a certain cow. Instead of fighting over its possession, +they had decided to ask L'Tunga to find the rightful owner by means of +the "Poison Test." I had often heard rumors of this test, but had +never seen it performed. L'Tunga talked with them a little while and +arranged that the loser was to pay him one cow for his services in +determining the ownership of the animal. After this was decided, each +of the warriors sent one of his people to get a cow. While these cows +were being brought L'Tunga prepared himself for the test. + +We went to his hut and he allowed us to squat nearby and watch him +dress. Two of the would-be witch-doctors acted as valets for him, and +when he had finished he was certainly a striking and awesome figure. +First, he was plentifully smeared on the forehead, face, and body with +a sort of red-and-white clay pigment. With his black skin, this gave +him a weird appearance. When sufficiently painted, he put on a +magnificent headdress consisting chiefly of porcupine quills some +fourteen inches long. This headdress is known as the "ekufue" and is +only worn by witch-doctors who are masters of the craft. The white +pigment is known as "ocikela," while the red is called "onongo." Both +have other uses which we were soon to learn. + +To complete his costume L'Tunga wound a wide strip of antelope skin +about his middle. This contains a large pouch and is known as the +"uya." In it are carried a number of medicines and some charms. When +fully dressed for his work our friend looked every inch a leader of +his profession. + +On our return to the kraal gate we found the two cows waiting. L'Tunga +looked them over and said they would do, although he was far from +enthusiastic. Sugden and I thought they were fine beasts, but it would +not have done for the witch-doctor to have admitted this. + +Then came the test. The warriors were told to stand together in front +of L'Tunga, who knelt on several small but fine skins which his +assistants had placed on the ground. When all were in place an +assistant handed L'Tunga a small hollow gourd, or "okapo," partly +filled with water. In this he mixed several drugs the nature of which +we learned later. First came a form of "ombambu," which is said to be +so deadly that birds die when they light on the limbs of the tree from +which it is obtained. Then came another drug of the same nature, said +to be obtained from the roots of the tree. Lastly L'Tunga dumped +"onsunga"--a mixture of powdered herbs the ingredients of which we +were never able to ascertain--into the gourd. Then he stirred the mess +with the foot of an antelope. While he stirred it he chanted in a low +voice. + +During all this performance the crowd remained absolutely silent, as +were we. The only noise was the lowing of one of the cows who seemed +to disapprove of the proceedings. + +When the "hellish brew," as Sugden called it afterward, was thoroughly +mixed, L'Tunga handed it to one of the warriors and told him to drink +it. Without hesitation the man did so, and it seemed to me he took a +good half of the mixture. L'Tunga then retrieved the gourd and passed +it to the other warrior, who drank the remainder. + +Next came the climax of the test. Both warriors appeared to grow +violently ill. L'Tunga chanted in a louder tone, while the crowd +pressed close. Sugden and I did not know what was going to happen and +watched anxiously. The warriors swayed back and forth and there was an +air of tense expectation that became constantly more acute. Suddenly +Sugden caught my arm. + +"Look, look! He's going to vomit!" he said, pointing at one of the +warriors. He was right. A second later the man retched and vomited. As +he did so, the crowd cried out so loudly that I caught the words, "He +is the loser! It is not his cow!" + +L'Tunga immediately stepped to the man and smeared him with red +pigment, placing it mainly on his forehead and arms. Next he turned +quickly to the other and smeared him in similar manner with the white +pigment. Then with all haste L'Tunga mixed "asangu" and gave some to +each man. This, we learned later, was a powerful emetic and it +certainly acted without delay. + +When the warriors had calmed down they were rather weak and weary. +L'Tunga directed an assistant to take the cow of the man who became +sick, and we thus understood that he had lost in the "Poison Test." +While L'Tunga was divesting himself of his ceremonial trappings he +explained to us that there was no doubt that this man was wrong about +the ownership of the cow over which the dispute began--if he had owned +the animal, he would not have vomited! + +"This is no country for a man with a weak stomach," Sugden remarked to +me. "It looks as if a strong constitution counts even more here than +in the U. S. A." + +L'Tunga also explained that both warriors would have died forthwith, +had he not given them the emetic. The mixture he had compounded caused +sure death after a short time. He told us that he considered the cow +he had received in payment not much of an animal and adopted the pose +that his talents had been poorly remunerated. + +By sympathizing with him in these complaints we made L'Tunga feel that +there was a further professional bond between us, and he became even +more willing to assist us in our study of witch-doctoring. When he had +removed his paint and other marks of his profession, he offered to +show us the stock-in-trade of a real witch-doctor. + +"We must use many wonderful and powerful charms in our work among the +poor and ignorant people," he said. "Many of them have come down to us +from the old witch-doctors who knew much more than I do, and I know +more than any other in the whole of South Africa. My father was a +witch-doctor, and his father was one, too. He was the head +witch-doctor for King Ama-Swazi, and his word was law with the king as +well as the people. In his day there was much honor for a real +witch-doctor and he had many wives. He was very, very rich. He was +also very powerful, so that the king was glad to have him with him +when he made war and governed his people." + +I had already heard tales of his respected ancestor, but I regret to +say that few of these reflected credit on him. It seems that Ama-Swazi +allowed him the right to inflict the death penalty, and it was his +habit to remove any induna whose wives he coveted or who might possess +anything else he could use. In addition to these civic activities, +this old devil added a number of new charms to the outfit carried by a +professional witch-doctor and L'Tunga was proud of the fact that he +had some of the original ones his ancestor had invented. + +One of the most interesting things that L'Tunga showed us was his +charm-case, or "uhamba," which all properly accredited witch-doctors +carry. This corresponds to the familiar little black bag carried by +white physicians when making their calls. The "uhamba" he used was a +tightly woven basket, roughly one foot broad, two feet long, and +perhaps ten inches high. In this was a queer collection of charms. The +chief thing, however, was the "ongombo", or small gourd used in +divination. This was very sacred and L'Tunga would not allow us to +touch it. In it were the most potent charms, and he exhibited these to +us one by one. + +There were a few rough images of wood, very crudely made but yet +unmistakably representing human beings. They were both male and +female, and were used to symbolize persons who were doing business +with the witch-doctor. Then there was a lion's tooth, a horn of a +goat, some chicken-bones, a pig's foot, and the hoof of an ox. More +interesting than these were a chicken's head dried with the mouth +open, which was used to symbolize a gossip, and the dried nose of a +hyena, which L'Tunga used when he "smelled out" crime. There were a +number of other odds and ends, but they had no special significance. +All these charms played a part in various rituals, and L'Tunga told us +that none of the would-be witch-doctors in his school were allowed to +practice until they were able to use each and every one correctly. + +[Illustration: INTERIOR OF THE ROYAL KRAAL + +This shows the details of its construction, and also warriors and +children] + +[Illustration: CHIEF WITCH-DOCTOR OF SWAZILAND + +He is holding the latest addition to his family. He is a very +influential man and is the personal doctor to the queen and the +prince. He has thirteen wives and sixty children] + +[Illustration: A SCHOOL OF WITCH-DOCTORS] + +[Illustration: A SWAZI SEMINARY OR SCHOOL FOR YOUNG WITCH-DOCTORS + +These are being taught the secrets of their profession, one of them +being in the act of smoking a Swazi pipe] + +Next he showed us a number of other charms of a different character. +One of these was the "ombinga," which was the horn of an ox, full of +medicines, herbs, and drugs. This was a very valuable and potent +charm, and only kings and great indunas were allowed to possess it. It +was supposed to prevent lightning or disease from striking the owner, +and its wonderful power also extended to his family and possessions. +In addition, it was supposed to prevent wild animals from attacking +those under its protection. + +"That is some charm, believe me," Sugden said, when L'Tunga had +reverently explained it. "It is a combined lightning-rod and accident +policy, and must cost a lot." + +L'Tunga assured us that the "ombinga" cost many cows, and this was the +reason why only kings and chiefs could afford to own it. Following +this, he showed us a rain wand, but refrained from demonstrating its +power. This he called an "ocifungo." It was made of the tail of an ox, +with two small deer horns inserted in the end. There were some magic +oils in the tail, also, and he explained that he could drive rain away +by blowing the little horns and waving the tail at the rain. Sugden +asked him in all solemnness if the wand worked, and L'Tunga assured +him that it was infallible, provided the right payment had been made. +The payment, it seems, consisted of a number of cows, and young women +would not be refused. Sugden remarked that we ought to get one of +these rain-dispellers and have it around all the time so that we would +not have any further trouble with wet weather. + +Last of all, L'Tunga unwrapped a bundle of skins and produced a number +of neck-charms, known in the singular as an "umbanda." These were for +the use of any one willing to buy them, and were most potent as a +protection against injury in battle. The "umbanda" consists of two +bottle-shaped objects about four inches long and is made of woven +grass-string. From the end of each there protrudes a tuft of feathers +about two or three inches long, and each one contains magic medicines. +The Swazi warriors wear the "umbanda" around the neck and believe that +they stand a poor chance in battle unless they do so. However, I had +seen natives wearing them at times when there was no war, and this +prompted me to ask L'Tunga about it. + +"There is always a reason, Mzaan Bakoor," he said. "When a warrior +puts on his 'umbanda,' he fears that he may meet the assegai of an +enemy. Then again, he may be going to destroy an enemy and wishes to +be protected." + +Further development of his explanation showed that when a Swazi +appeared wearing his "umbanda," it was generally understood that he +was off to a killing. They always go armed, so that weapons mean +nothing, but when they put on this charm there is bloody work afoot. + +After inspecting L'Tunga's equipment we strolled over to the school, +where a class was in session. The details of this we missed, however, +as the instruction halted as soon as we came in sight. L'Tunga talked +for a moment with the "professor" and then told us that the fact that +we were white men would prevent us from seeing the novices receive +their instruction. + +"But it would not be worth your time to see these young men at work," +he added to console us. "They are only learning certain rituals. First +the instructor explains the charm to be used, and then he shows them +how it is done. They try to do as he does, and when they have learned +he explains another charm." + +Sugden and I were sorry not to see this class at work. It would have +been entertaining to watch them, and I wondered how they would have +compared with my classes in the Harvard Medical School. Of one thing I +felt certain--these savages were just as much in earnest as any of us +back there in Cambridge. + +It appears to take a long time to make a bona-fide witch-doctor. The +course given in L'Tunga's school is most thorough--at least, that is +what he said--and no candidate receives his "uhamba" until he knows +all the tricks of the trade. It astonished us to find this intelligent +savage taking his profession so seriously; it all seemed such +frightful nonsense to us. Still, the thought came to me that L'Tunga +might think the same about some of our most sacred medical practices. +When we left him he promised that he would send for us the next time +he was to work. + +Three days later he did so. One of his students came to tell us that +his chief was about to make a divination and that we could witness it +if we wished. Naturally, we accepted. We had been eager to see a +divination, which we understood to be a ceremony where the +witch-doctor really went through his paces. + +L'Tunga was waiting for us in his hut. He was cordial, but very solemn. + +"This is a serious case," he said. "I am about to ask the spirits to +decide the life or death of an induna. He is accused of murdering +another induna, and there is no way of proving his guilt or innocence +except through the spirits who work for me. To-day you shall see the +most important work I do!" + +We were properly impressed. Sugden, in fact, was so interested that he +forgot to make his usual caustic comment. It struck me as the most +barbaric thing we had yet encountered that this witch-doctor with his +foolish bag of tricks should be called upon to decide the fate of a +fellow-being. + +L'Tunga dressed himself as before, the only difference being that he +put on his paint and ornaments with more care. When he was dressed he +called out, and several of the young witch-doctors entered. These he +loaded with various queer things the nature of which developed at the +ceremony. When we were all ready, our party solemnly marched out to +the entrance of the kraal. + +There we found a large crowd of people, the great majority being +warriors and indunas. Standing apart from the rest, facing the gate, +was the induna whose fate was to be decided. He was a tall, heavy-set +man of middle age, and his face was that of a killer. He looked as if +he might be accused of a dozen murders, instead of only one. + +"If looks count for anything, that gentleman ought to be shot on +sight!" was Sugden's remark. + +L'Tunga halted just outside the entrance of the kraal, and an old +witch-doctor stepped out of the crowd and addressed him. + +"O L'Tunga, greatest of witch-doctors," he began, "you are called upon +to decide the guilt or innocence of Makeza, this induna, the owner of +many cows and women. Three days ago an induna was found dead with many +wounds. Makeza was his enemy, and the people of their village say that +Makeza killed him in the night. Oktela was his name, and now Makeza +has taken his wives and there is much outcry in the village. Makeza +says that he knows nothing about Oktela's death, but you, L'Tunga the +Great, can decide!" + +While he stated the case against Makeza the induna Stood gazing +defiantly at L'Tunga, and I had a feeling that he was not helping his +case. + +"My spirits will decide whether Makeza is guilty or not!" L'Tunga +announced in a loud voice. + +The witch-doctor waited while the little skins were placed and then +knelt down facing Makeza, who also knelt at a sign from L'Tunga. Next +the assistants placed two roughly carved wooden figures, about a foot +high, in front of the witch-doctor. These are known as "ovitakas" and +are supposed to represent the spirits that are to be invoked for the +divination. It was plain to see that the figures were male and female. +L'Tunga then put on a necklace which was handed him by an assistant. +This seemed to be made of teeth of various wild animals, those of the +lion being most noticeable. He next picked up a gourd and handed it to +Makeza, who immediately commenced to shake it. It was full of seeds of +some kind and made a loud rattle. L'Tunga produced a similar gourd and +also started to shake it. + +This rattling was really the beginning of the ceremony. After a short +time L'Tunga commenced blowing on a whistle, which gave a loud shrill +sound. It was a horn of a small deer set in the end of an ox-tail +which was wrapped with broad bands of red, black, and white beads. The +whistle was to call the spirits and we noted that the people seemed to +get much excited when they heard it. After a few moments L'Tunga began +to vary the whistling with a sort of chant in a minor key. The sound +of his voice struck terror into the audience, and I could see that +they were terribly afraid. Makeza showed his fear by rattling his +gourd with what almost amounted to frenzy. + +The whistling, rattling, and chanting went on and on, all the time +rising in a crescendo. The excitement of the crowd became more and +more intense, until it seemed to me that something must happen soon. +L'Tunga appeared to be quite mad, and Makeza shook his gourd as though +his life depended on the noise he made. + +At the exact moment when the situation became unbearable, and when I +felt as though I would go mad also, L'Tunga stopped his noise. A +second later there was silence, broken only by the deep breaths of the +audience. The sudden silence came with such a shock that it quite +unnerved one. + +Presently L'Tunga raised his empty hands above his head and slowly +brought them down over his "uhamba," which lay on the ground in front +of him. He held his position for a moment, Makeza's eyes riveted on +him. Then L'Tunga slowly waved his hands back and forth, and I could +see Makeza following their every movement. + +This must have lasted for a few moments only, but it seemed an age. +Suddenly the hands stopped, remained still for the space of a breath, +and then swooped down on the "uhamba." With one motion L'Tunga picked +up the charm-case and shook it above his head. Three shakes, and he +held it motionless! + +Slowly, very slowly, he brought it down and laid it on the ground. +Makeza watched, his eyes bright and big with dread. L'Tunga looked at +him fixedly for a brief space, and then slowly lifted the top of the +"uhamba" and glanced into it. + +"Guilty! Guilty!" he shouted in a ringing voice. "The red horn stands! +The spirits have decided! Makeza is guilty!" + +The induna seemed stunned for a second, and for about the same space +the crowd remained quiet. Then everything broke loose at once. Excited +cries rose from the warriors; Makeza sprang to his feet; L'Tunga +jumped up and back to where we stood. The condemned man looked wildly +about and then, snatching up his knob-kerrie, assegais, and shield, +made a wild dash to escape. + +It was all over much more quickly than it can be told. The thud of +knob-kerrie on shield, the flash of steel, and Makeza lay there in the +bright sun, a bleeding, mangled thing! + +L'Tunga was the least excited of all of us; he seemed to take the +killing as a matter of course. + +"Makeza had killed," he said later, when we returned to his hut, "and +his life was forfeit. He knew that he would have to die, so he +attempted to escape. I understand that he would have been joined by a +number of warriors if he had been able to get into the hills." + +Sugden and I were curious to know about the "red horn," and L'Tunga +removed the top of his "uhamba" and showed it to us. The horn was a +short piece of one from an antelope, with the top painted red. In the +basket, also, was a small figure of about the same size as the horn, +on the head of which was a cowry shell. + +"If the spirits had decided that Makeza was innocent," L'Tunga +explained, "the figure would have been standing when I took the top +off the 'uhamba.' But they knew that he was guilty, so the red horn +stood at their command." + +This seemed a poor way to determine a case of life or death, but +Makeza was the only one who had any objections. It was the custom, and +thus was quite all right in the eyes of Swaziland. On theory, Makeza +had an even chance, which is a good deal more than he would have had +before any civilized jury. His appearance alone would have convicted +him. I had about convinced myself that the induna had received a fair +deal, when Sugden insisted that the bottom of the little image of +innocence was round, so that it could not stand. + +"Makeza never had a chance!" he exclaimed. "The cards were stacked +against him. The poor devil!" Immediately Sugden became sorry for the +induna, although he agreed with me that he could not have been +anything but a murderer. + +Before we returned to camp L'Tunga explained some of the work an +accredited witch-doctor is supposed to be able to perform. He said he +could do all the things he talked about. According to him, a real +witch-doctor can recover stolen goods; he can read the past and +future; he can cast out spells and provide charms against them, and +can "smell out" the witches that cause other than violent deaths. The +genuine witch-doctor can cause the corn to grow; he can make or stop +rain and can cause the cows to give milk when they have been bewitched +and their milk dries up too soon. This last is accomplished by boiling +some of the affected cow's milk and whipping the animal severely with +a sjambok while the milk boils. + +Among the hocus-pocus and humbuggery of the witch-doctor's trade we +found several genuine "cures" which they used to alleviate suffering +among their people. I do not know the nature of these "cures," but +they are all drugs. As an emetic, and a most efficient one, L'Tunga +gives his patient "asangu"; for rheumatism he prescribes "amatoli" and +sometimes "ovihata," and the distress of a mother in labor is greatly +lessened by giving her "oluvanga" to chew. This is a leaf, while the +rheumatism "cures" are both powders, as is the emetic. + +One stock remedy of which L'Tunga was very proud greatly amused us +both, but we concealed our amusement lest he think we were making fun +of him. This was "ekulo," a love medicine which he said was most potent. + +"When a wife wishes to be preferred above all other wives of an +induna," he explained, in telling of its use, "she comes to me and I +give her 'ekulo.' This she mixes with the food of her husband, and +from that time on he cannot resist her and she becomes his favorite +wife and is mistress of all the others." + +L'Tunga explained other uses of "ekulo," but these are "too intimate," +as Sugden said, to be set forth here. + +After our investigation of witch-doctoring as it is practiced in +Swaziland, Sugden and I came to the conclusion that the British knew +what they were doing when they placed a ban on it. Even L'Tunga, +kindly soul that he was, ought to be suppressed. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +Wearisome delay in coronation--War suggestions from Umzulek--My plan +to bluff Labotsibeni--The bluff is called--A ticklish situation-- +Labotsibeni refuses to surrender the throne--Our demonstration +fails--Night murders provoke war. + + +During the next two months Tuys and I had almost daily interviews with +Tzaneen and Sebuza, but we got no nearer the coronation. The situation +was becoming a scandal in Swaziland and was hurting the prestige of +the royal family at Lebombo. Indunas kept coming in from the outlying +districts and asking how soon the coronation would take place. With +them came their warriors, and there was much murmuring because of the +delay. + +We, too, were growing more and more impatient, and to add to our +distress Rossman, my camera-man, became ill. I could do little for +him, and he was thoroughly disgusted with the lack of action. Finally, +on his urgent request, I sent him out through Portuguese territory to +Delagoa Bay, where he caught a steamer for his home in America. Oom +Tuys took him to the coast and was gone nearly two weeks. He returned +to find us just where we had been when he left, except that the +population of Lebombo was increased by several hundred more expectant +warriors. These had all come for the coronation and were unable to +understand why Tzaneen did not go ahead with it. + +Tuys brought word from some one he had talked to at Delagoa Bay that +there was a general understanding among the Portuguese that Sebuza +intended taking the throne by force. In fact, traders were warned not +to go into Swaziland for fear that they might get mixed up in the +impending civil war. Rumors of war always lead to "gun-running" in +South Africa, just as they did in Cuba in the old days, and I asked +Tuys if he had heard whether anything of this nature was taking place. + +"The authorities there are not taking any chances," he said. "They are +not anxious to become embroiled with the British and have posted extra +guards at many places along the border. If anyone tries to get guns to +the Swazis, he will have to be very clever or he'll be caught." + +It is absolutely forbidden to sell guns to the kaffirs anywhere in the +Transvaal, but there are always venturesome traders who find it +impossible to overlook the chance of making a big profit, for a gun is +worth more than its weight in silver to any native able to pay for it. +I remembered my experience with King Buno years before, when Oom Tuys +allowed me to present him with a Mauser rifle. + +The monotony of the delay in the coronation was hard to bear. As +already stated, we visited Tzaneen and Sebuza nearly every day, but it +was weeks before anything happened. + +It was about four months after we came to Lebombo that Tzaneen sent +for us one day. We found her surrounded by a number of strange indunas +who seemed to be friendly with Vilakazi, one of the sons of Buno and +therefore an uncle of Sebuza. It seemed that we had been summoned to +attend an important conference. I was glad of this, for it might mean +that some action was about to be taken. We entered the royal hut with +the usual formalities, and the strange indunas saluted respectfully. + +"Nkoos, these great chiefs have come from Stegea," the queen said. +"They have been sent with a message from Umzulek. They are the leaders +of his impis and he has directed them to counsel with me for the +purpose of taking the throne by force. Umzulek has talked much with +Vilakazi, who has explained to him all the difficulties that surround +us. Umzulek declares he will send all his warriors to our assistance, +if we will drive Labotsibeni from the throne and make my son king." + +During this speech Tuys watched me keenly. I could feel that there was +war in the air. The people of Swaziland had come to the end of their +patience and were determined to set up their king whether Labotsibeni +and Lomwazi liked it or not. On my part, I was practically pledged to +keep peace in Swaziland and could not be party to a war, even if it +meant the success of my enterprise. Keeping this thought in mind, I +addressed the queen before Tuys could reply. + +"Nkosikaas, Mother of the King," I said as impressively as I could, +"this is talk of war! We must not have killing. Your son must not gain +his throne through bloodshed. + +"This would be a poor business, Nkosikaas. The government would not +sanction his taking the throne by force and he would be driven out by +the rifles of the English. War must be avoided at all costs, since +Sebuza would lose, even if he won!" + +I went on at length, pointing out the foolishness of war and trying to +get the queen and the indunas to change their minds. I could see that +the indunas were set on war, and they had convinced Tzaneen that it +was the only way. Down in my heart I had a sort of feeling that they +were right. + +Tuys also backed me up and talked of the mistakes made by the Swazis +when he was young. He explained that they must obey the government and +told them how impossible it would be for them to wage war against +Labotsibeni without its consent. He made a good argument against +killing and practically converted the queen. + +Then Sebuza came in! With him was Lochien and a number of the younger +indunas. Immediately the debate became heated. Lochien took our side, +but Sebuza and his men sided with the indunas from Stegea. The queen +remained neutral, though I felt she would have liked to come out for +war. It was Sebuza who made the deciding speech. + +"Who am I that I am kept out of my kingdom?" he almost shouted. "I, +the son of Buno and grandson of Umbandine! I have thousands and +thousands of warriors, and all the people of my country wait for me to +become king. All my indunas and warriors wait for me to give the word, +when they will sweep over the land and crush Labotsibeni and Lomwazi! + +"I call for war! I call to my people to come to me and destroy those +who hold the throne from Sebuza, son of Buno!" + +With this kindly thought the prince sat down, and I could see that +practically all the indunas were in favor of his suggestions. It +looked as though we were to have a civil war whether we wanted it or +not. But I thought of Commissioner Honey's remarks and decided to make +another effort to avoid a conflict. + +I suggested to the queen that the indunas be dismissed and that we +hold a conference to decide the question of whether or not there +should be war. When the indunas had gone, there was a sort of +"executive session" attended by the queen, Sebuza, Lochien, Vilakazi, +Oom Tuys, and myself. + +Tuys and I brought up the question of what would happen to all present +if the indunas of Tzaneen and Sebuza were allowed to precipitate war. +We told them of the misery it would cause their people, and finally +reminded them that the British Government would take a hand and that +they would either be driven out of their country or executed. This +last thought struck home. Nevertheless, they were so exasperated at +the state of affairs that it looked as though they were almost willing +to take a chance. + +"But we have more than five thousand warriors here now," Sebuza +objected. "These brave men are loyal to me and came here to see me +crowned. They are willing to die for me, and I dare not send them home +to their kraals to say that I, the son of Buno, am afraid to take my +throne. Labotsibeni has few warriors, and I have heard that these will +desert her if there is a war. We could seize the throne with little +killing. Only Lomwazi, perhaps, need be killed!" + +That last statement came from the heart. I could see that Sebuza had +hard feelings for his uncle and he looked as if he would enjoy the job +of removing Labotsibeni's able counsellor. + +His remark about there being so many warriors at Lebombo gave me an +idea. It flashed through my troubled head that it might be a good idea +to "pull a bluff" on Labotsibeni, as the Americans say. + +"You say you have more than five thousand warriors here waiting for +you to give the word for war," I said, turning to Sebuza. "Are you +sure that Labotsibeni has few warriors and that these will not remain +faithful?" + +Sebuza repeated his statement, and both Lochien and Vilakazi agreed +with him. + +"Then let us make a demonstration on Zombode," I went on. "Let us get +all the warriors of Sebuza and the queen, and also those of Umzulek, +and march on the royal kraal of Labotsibeni. When we arrive there, let +the impis deploy so that their number is so many that it cannot be +counted." + +[Illustration: CROWN PRINCE SEBUZA IN FESTIVAL DRESS + +The headdress consists of anything that is colored, perhaps a few +colored feathers or colored paper (probably removed from a jam-tin). +The necklace consists of beads worked into various ornaments and +patterns. The anklets are made from the hides of wild beasts] + +[Illustration: CROWN PRINCE SEBUZA + +This picture was taken immediately after his return from the mountains +where he attained his manhood. During the space of two moons, or two +months, he lived in complete isolation among the barren mountains. He +was later subjected to various religious rites, including +circumcision, and went through all the ceremonies incidental to his +sanctification for the throne] + +"When all is ready, the warriors will dance as though for war. After a +little we shall send messengers to Labotsibeni and demand that she +abdicate. Lomwazi will see that we have an overwhelming force and will +advise her to do so, and thus Sebuza will receive the throne of his +father!" + +My suggestion met with the unqualified approval of all the Swazis, +particularly Sebuza and his mother. Oom Tuys, however, spoke quickly +to me in Dutch. + +"Remind them that this is only a demonstration, Owen, and that there +must be no killing," he said. + +I turned to the others again. + +"Nkosikaas, you must instruct your indunas that this is to be only a +peaceful demonstration," I told the queen. "You must tell them that +the warrior who makes an attempt to kill will be executed. There must +be no mistake about this. Prince Sebuza must also tell his indunas +this, and they must understand fully that this is not war--it is only +make-believe." + +All promised to see that these instructions were carried out, and then +we arranged the details of the demonstration. It was set for the day +after the next new moon, or about ten days hence. In the meantime all +the warriors that could be notified were to be rallied at Lebombo, so +that the impis of the queen and Sebuza would be as large and imposing +as possible. At the time I did not realize that this last suggestion +was a mistake. I ought to have remembered that it would be impossible +to muster the warriors loyal to our faction without those of the +opposite persuasion knowing about it. + +The day of the demonstration dawned bright and fair. It was also very +hot. Tuys and the rest of our party were up early, and even then the +kraals of Lebombo seemed alive with fighting men. Lochien came over +before breakfast and said that they would set out so as to reach +Zombode before noon. This meant about half-past nine, since +Labotsibeni's kraal was about a two hours' march distant. + +It was an imposing spectacle to see the various impis assemble in such +formation as they knew. Tzaneen and Sebuza each had their own impis, +wearing a distinguishing headdress. In addition, the men from Stegea +wore plumes that showed they were the "household troops" of Umzulek. +The other impis were more or less nondescript, but their warriors were +picked men. Every man had on his full war costume and they made a +brave array. The indunas could be distinguished by their more splendid +regalia and bearing, and even I was surprised to see what fine types +of savages these were. + +Sugden, Crespinell, Tuys, and I bore our rifles and side-arms so as to +carry out the semblance of war, and we four marched at the head of the +army. The impis were strung out along the roadway, and when I looked +back I felt certain that we had many more than five thousand fighting +men behind us. With us at the head of the troops went L'Tunga, +Vilkazi, Lochien, and Makets, the latter the head induna of Umzulek's +impi. + +We halted at the little stream that marks the dividing line between +Zombode and Lebombo and I took occasion to again impress on the +indunas the fact that we were about to make a peaceful demonstration. +I knew that word must have reached Lomwazi that we were coming, and I +hoped his spies had exaggerated our numbers so that he would realize +how hopeless it was to resist. + +Sebuza had remained with his mother at Lebombo. This was to show that +he had nothing to do with our warlike strategy. He was to stay there +until sent for by his people to take over the throne. + +I had one bad moment when we deployed in front of Zombode. We were +stretched out for more than a quarter of a mile--it must have been +nearer a half--and the formation was made while we were at least five +or six hundred yards from the kraals. With my field-glasses I could +see great numbers of warriors lying or sitting in front of the +village. The grass was high, so that I could make no actual estimate +of how many there were. I could glimpse thousands of headdresses above +the grass, however, and there appeared to be a bank of men on the +ground surrounding the kraals. + +Now it had been planned that our army should advance in solid +formation right across the little plain until it came within about two +hundred yards of the huts. When it halted a signal was to be given, +and then the war dancing would begin. + +We went forward, our little party between the impis of Tzaneen and the +prince, and I could feel the excitement growing. On both sides of me +grim warriors fingered their weapons and their eyes flashed. I had the +feeling that I was on top of a powder-magazine with lightning striking +all around. + +Lochien was several paces in the lead, and it was he who was to give +the signal. On we went, until I began to think he had lost his head +and forgotten the orders. Suddenly he threw up his hands, his shield +gleaming dully in the sun, and halted. Instantly the whole army +stopped--and then came my bad moment! + +Diamond-points of sunlight flashed from a thousand spearheads as impi +after impi rose from the ground around Zombode. In that brief moment +there seemed to be countless warriors, fully armed, standing guard at +the old queen's kraal. + +We fairly gasped with astonishment. Tuys threw his rifle forward and I +heard the breech-lock click. He was as amazed as the rest of us, and +his instinct warned of trouble. + +"What a surprise!" he said, turning quickly to me. "Now we're in for +it! Keep close, lad, and we'll win through!" + +Before I could reply, Lochien began dancing. In another moment our +entire army was chanting and springing up and down like madmen. + +"Soukbulala! Soukbulala!--I will kill you! I will kill you!" they +shouted. From individual shouts this quickly fell into a sort of rude +rhythm, its heavy bass rolling away across the plain. + +Immediately the warriors at the kraals commenced their dance, and +their shouts reached us with the snap of gunshots. Our men waved their +knob-kerries, assegais, and shields in the air, and Labotsibeni's home +guard did the same. The air was full of murderous tools and we were +surrounded by giant savages who seemed to have suddenly gone mad. + +This awful bedlam lasted for some time. Actually, it was six minutes +by my watch, but such a six minutes! Every second I expected to see +some of our warriors dash forward and attack the enemy. + +L'Tunga came to himself first. He sprang out to Lochien, who still +danced in front of us all, and caught him by the arms. Lochien stopped +dancing, and a second later he turned to our army and threw up his +arms. Like a statue he held the great shield above his head, standing +there as though suddenly turned to bronze. + +This was a signal for the dance to cease. In a little time our +warriors saw him and quieted down, only their agitated plumes showing +that their excitement was not wholly dead. Labotsibeni's warriors +caught the change, and soon they, too, became quiet. They swayed to +and fro in front of the kraals, but remained as silent as our impis. + +L'Tunga and Lochien came back hurriedly to us for a conference. + +"Nkoos, this is not what we expected," Lochien said to me in an +anxious tone. "We didn't believe Labotsibeni could muster so many men. +What shall we do now? Shall we go through with the plan, or fight? +Perhaps it is better to fight. We have more than five thousand +warriors, and they cannot have more than about three thousand. Shall +we fight?" + +"No! No!" I replied most emphatically. "Go through with the plan as +arranged. Tell Labotsibeni that you have many more warriors than she +has. Tell her that you don't want to have any killing, but that she +must surrender the throne." + +"Wouldn't it be better to fight?" Lochien insisted, and I could see +that the blood-lust had him. + +I threw my rifle to my shoulder with the muzzle dangerously close to +his head. + +"I shall kill the first man who tries to fight," I said. "If he is a +warrior, I'll shoot him once; if an induna, twice; and if he is one of +the royal blood, I'll fill him full of holes!" + +This settled the question. Lochien thought my threat was real--and he +was not fooling himself much, either. + +L'Tunga, who had a wide reputation throughout Swaziland as a +witch-doctor, then went forward, accompanied by Lochien, Makets, and +several others. They made the peace sign and went halfway across the +debatable ground between the two armies. Here they waited for a few +moments only, and then Lomwazi and half a dozen indunas came to meet +them. I would have given much to have heard that conversation. After a +short talk Lomwazi led our envoys into the village. + +No sooner were they out of sight than Labotsibeni's men again began +dancing and shouting their war-cries. I could feel our warriors +tightening up, and shouted for Vilakazi. I told him to watch closely +and prevent any warrior from breaking ranks, and demanded that he stop +them from dancing. He went along the ranks and spoke to the indunas, +who turned and yelled at their men. In spite of this, I could see the +plumes beginning to sway and felt that it would not be long before +they were at it again. This time I doubted whether we could stop them +if the "enemy" began taunting them. + +Labotsibini's men shouted and jumped, and presently one or two began +running forward a short distance. A warrior would seemingly be +overcome by his emotions and would make a quick dash into the "No +Man's Land" between the forces, using up his energy by a particularly +violent fit of dancing. When this was spent he would hop back to his +place near the kraal, yelling all the while. + +I realized the danger of this sort of thing. If these enthusiastic +savages came far enough, they would tempt some of our men to dance out +and meet them. This would mean a killing. There would be some rapid +blows with the knob-kerries, accompanied by the hollow thud when the +shields caught the strokes, and finally one blow would go home and the +victim would drop. Like a flash would come the stab of the assegai and +there would be a dead man on the ground! + +Our indunas knew this better than I did, and they walked up and down +before their excited warriors watching for the first man to break +ranks. Tuys and I held our rifles ready, fully intending to shoot the +first warrior who started for the middle ground. It was a ticklish +position and my white companions stood nervously waiting for the break +they felt was coming. + +At the moment when it seemed as though the dam must burst and our men +get beyond control, a sudden silence came over the shouting lunatics +at the kraals. I understood the reason when I saw our envoys coming +out of the royal kraal, still escorted by Lomwazi and his indunas. +Amid deep silence they walked slowly to the spot where they had met +before and stopped long enough to ceremoniously salute each other. +Then Lomwazi and his bodyguard returned to the village and L'Tunga and +the others came to where we stood. + +They appeared angry and worried. Lochien also looked dejected, and +Tuys and I listened while L'Tunga made his report. + +"Queen Labotsibeni sends word that she will not surrender the throne, +Nkoos," he said. "She told me to tell our queen that she must die +before the throne passed to Sebuza, and not after." + +Evidently the old queen had made up her mind that the government could +not protect her from the sacrifice if she allowed Sebuza to become king. + +"When I told her that we had many more warriors than she had," the +witch-doctor went on, "she declared that her indunas would fight to +the death, that so long as she held Zombode she was Queen of Swaziland!" + +I could picture the old queen when she delivered this defiance. Blind, +too weak to stand, and more than one hundred years old, her spirit was +still unbroken, her courage undiminished! She had lived like a queen +and evidently had made up her mind to die like one. + +Both armies remained quiet while we held a council of war. Makets +insisted that we attack Zombode; he thought we could rush the village +and take it. I could see that he was carrying out instructions that +Umzulek had given him when he sent him to Lebombo. His advice was +given in a torrent of words that I had difficulty in stopping. He had +the attack all planned. + +"Attack with fire!" he almost yelled, for he was much excited and in +deadly earnest. "First the impis of Tzaneen, Sebuza, and Umzulek will +attack those on guard. After them will come the others, carrying fire. +While we fight, the torch-bearers will break through and burn the +kraals!" + +He had it all planned out and I could perceive the cunning mind of his +chief at work. Makets wanted a bloody holocaust that would bring back +the old days with a vengeance. I had heard of such attacks when the +Boers and British wiped out offending tribes, and I knew what such a +thing meant--a massacre, with the women and children burned to death! + +I finally silenced Makets, but barely in time. He had almost fired the +others with his bloodthirstiness, and for a moment I was afraid they +would bolt and start the carnage. L'Tunga came to my assistance, and a +moment later Lochien joined the anti-war party which Tuys and I +headed. Our argument lasted a long time, but finally we prevailed. + +"Indunas and leaders of the true king's impis," I said at the +conclusion of our council. "We have shown Queen Labotsibeni and +Lomwazi that their nonsense must end. They know now that a majority of +the loyal warriors of Swaziland are behind the son of Buno and they +are afraid! Let us take our impis back to Lebombo, and to-morrow we +will send to Labotsibeni and demand that she give up the throne. She +is afraid that she will be killed, according to the ancient custom, +and for that reason refuses to abdicate. We white men will pledge +ourselves to guard her and escort her to Portugese territory, where +she will be safe. When she hears this, she will have no hesitation in +permitting Sebuza to be crowned." + +This reasoning seemed good to Lochien, L'Tunga, and the others, except +Makets, who grumbled a bit and still wanted to end the business then +and there. I suspect that he hated the thought that he would have to +report to Umzulek that there had been no fighting and that Lomwazi had +escaped. + +Our warriors were squatting on the ground when the command was given +for the return to Lebombo. They rose at once, and Labotsibeni's +watch-dogs also sprang to their feet. These expected that we were +about to attack, and so were greatly puzzled when our army turned +about and started off slowly for Lebombo. Their silence lasted only a +few minutes, however. Then they broke out into revilings and taunts +that would have made a saint fight. Our impis grew more and more +sullen under this volley of insults, and went away from Zombode with +murder in their hearts and the feeling that they would have many +explanations to make when they returned to the home kraals. + +I was sorry that our bluff had failed, but very thankful that we had +pulled through without bloodshed. Tuys walked along beside me, silent +and thoughtful. When Lebombo's kraals came in sight he told me what +was on his mind. + +"Owen, my lad, I know these people," he said, "and I'm afraid that +your peaceful ruse will cause trouble. The Swazi warrior is a proud +man and does not like to be called names. I pray that we may get +through the next few days without an explosion." + +I made light of his forebodings, though probably my attitude was due +to our having withdrawn without a battle. Had I known what was going +to happen, I would not have been so lighthearted. + +Tzaneen and Sebuza were angry at our failure. The prince, of course, +was indignant that we had accepted the insults of Labotsibeni's troops +and was quite rude to Oom Tuys and me for preventing the capture of +Zombode. + +"It would have all been over by this time," he said, "and I would be +king! My impis have lost faith in me for permitting you white men to +do this thing. I shall lose my warriors. They will go over to +Labotsibeni and Lomwazi because they are not afraid." + +Then I explained to him and his mother about our plan to send a +message to Labotsibeni on the following day. When they heard that we +white men would guard the old queen and escort her to safety, they +thought that it might succeed. Sebuza, though, very pointedly +mentioned the fact that according to custom the old queen ought to +die. I protested that she was too old and feeble to do him any harm +after he became king, and he agreed that I was right. + +He was insistent, however, that Lomwazi should die. He felt that +Lomwazi would be a menace to the throne and, it seems, had some old +scores he wanted to pay off. We argued over this for some time, and +Sebuza, on the urging of his mother, finally came around to our point +of view. Yet I had the feeling that we would have to move fast to +prevent an accident happening to Lomwazi. + +I little realized that all this talk was for nothing. My nice little +plan, which sounded so simple, would never even be tried! + +That night Tuys and I arranged the details of the next day. We planned +to take the wagonette and use it to transport Labotsibeni and Lomwazi +to Portuguese territory. We would walk beside it with our rifles ready +and protect the old queen with our lives. We both felt that the safest +thing to do with Lomwazi would be to hide him inside and we spent some +time arranging the vehicle so that he could be concealed within. Of +course he would be found easily if the wagonette was searched, but we +intended to prevent that, even if we had to fight off curious kaffirs. + +In high hopes that we had reached the end of the trail and that the +coronation was at last in sight, we went to bed. Sugden and Crespinell +were glad, too, since they had had their fill of Swaziland and wanted +to go home. + +But our real troubles were only beginning. + +Tuys waked me roughly next morning before day-break. He was much +excited, and I could see that he was fully dressed and had his rifle +in his hand. + +"Get up! Get up at once, Owen!" he said hoarsely. "There is the devil +to pay! War has broken out and there has been killing already!" + +I jumped out of bed and into my clothes in one motion. While I pulled +them on he told me what had happened. + +"Some of Sebuza's indunas started for their kraals last night," he +said. "They went by way of Zombode, and when they passed the little +hill just before you reach the plain they were attacked by several +score of Labotsibeni's warriors and every one of them was killed! It +was cold-blooded murder. They must have been outnumbered about ten to +one!" + +It seems that an induna and his men had lagged behind the others and +had seen the ambush. From their description it was a most unexpected +and brutal attack. Sebuza's indunas tried to put up a fight and +resisted for a short time. Then the enemy overpowered them and stabbed +them to death. + +So it was war after all! In spite of my efforts to prevent it, the +question of who should be ruler of Swaziland was to be settled in the +old-fashioned way. + +Tuys and I went to the royal kraal and found Tzaneen and Lochien +already up. Thousands of warriors and scores of indunas were on guard +and the whole place was in whirl of excitement. As we forced our way +to the royal hut, Sebuza came marching in surrounded by his young +indunas, all of whom were officers in his impis. The prince pushed by +us into his mother's hut and a second later Lochien came out and +beckoned us to enter. + +As soon as she saw us, Queen Tzaneen motioned us to her side. + +"It is war now," she said decisively. "There is no other way! Our +indunas have been murdered and my warriors cannot be restrained. You +white men did everything you could to keep peace, but Labotsibeni +makes war against us and we cannot help ourselves. It is war!" + +The others echoed the word "war," and I could see that they were all +pleased at the prospect. Even Lochien, peace-loving though he was, +realized that there was no help for it and counselled quick action to +secure the capture of Zombode. Makets was in his glory and I knew that +the smell of blood was already in his nostrils. + +But I would not give up. I could not see these people go to war and I +made one last attempt to prevent it. + +"The government will avenge the murder of your indunas, Nkosikaas," I +declared. "The government will send rifles to Zombode and will hang +all those who did the killing. There is no need for you to meet murder +with murder--then you will be also punished by the government's +rifles! Thousands will be killed, and needlessly, for those at Mbabane +will send white troops to catch the murderers and hang them." + +They listened while I spoke, but I could feel that I was talking +against a flood that was irresistible. Tzaneen answered me, and her +words met the hearty approval of all the others. + +"We do not need the government to avenge our dead," she said, holding +her head erect with pride. "Our dead are our own and their blood cries +to us for revenge!" + +That seemed to settle it. They asked us to take part in the war, but +we flatly refused. We told them that it was not a "white man's war" +and that we would have nothing to do with it. Then Sebuza, with his +customary impudence, asked me to lend him my rifle. I refused, and he +grew quite huffy about it. + +"You gave my father, King Buno, a rifle," he retorted. "I shall soon +be as great a king and then you will be sorry you refused!" + +I realized he might be speaking the truth, but nevertheless would not +let him have the gun. I would have felt guilty of any killing he did +with it and I know the government would have taken the same view. + +When Tuys and I got back to our camp we immediately held a council of +war. Our position was dangerous. If Labotsibeni's men attacked +Lebombo, we might have to fight for our lives. We were known as +friends of Tzaneen and Sebuza, and our taking part in the +"demonstration" of the day before had shown all Swaziland that we were +not friendly to Labotsibeni and Lomwazi. Realizing that we might have +to fight and not caring to take advantage of the slim protection of +the kraals, we built up the sides of the great wagon so that it became +more like a fort than anything else. In addition, we arranged for +night watches, so that there would always be at least one white man on +guard, with several of the black boys to assist him. Of course I had +Sibijaan assigned to my watch, while Tuis was to watch with Oom Tuys, +with whom he had become a favorite. Crespinell and Sugden each had +their boys, and we felt that there would be little chance for a +surprise attack on the wagon, if matters worked out as planned. + +An interesting development in our preparations for defense was the +sudden discovery that "Gunga Din" was a soldier. He came to me, asked +for one of the spare rifles, and handled it like a veteran. Like all +Indians, he had a great contempt for negroes, and he seemed delighted +over the prospect that he might have a chance to shoot a few Swazis. +Instead of being worried about the turn of affairs, Din was bucked up +by it and produced a large crooked knife from among his effects, +sticking in his belt where it could be readily reached. It developed +that our chef was a fighting man, after all. + +[Illustration: LOCHIEN, COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF OF PRINCE SEBUZA'S IMPIS + +On either side stand two of his indunas, or captains] + +[Illustration: WARRIORS OF PRINCE SEBUZA'S IMPIS STARTING OUT TO BATTLE + +The enemy was but a short distance away and his warriors were coming +forward in like manner to meet those of the Prince] + +[Illustration: ONE OF THE ROYAL IMPIS + +These regiments of about one thousand men are led by indunas, or +captains. These soldiers are preparing to go into battle. They are +beginning the excitement-producing dance, to be followed by a +succession of single combats which are always fought to the death] + +All that morning excitement prevailed at the kraals. There was much +dancing, and the chanting was continuous. I could see thousands of +warriors on hand and during the afternoon a fresh impi arrived from +the direction of Stegea. These, however, did not look like Umzulek's +men, for they wore no distinguishing mark. + +We were all curious to know what was going to happen. I made another +visit to the royal kraal late that afternoon and was met by Vilakazi. +He was friendly enough, but professed to be ignorant of what was +planned and ended by advising me to return to my camp. He gave me to +understand, politely but firmly, that only those who intended fighting +were desired at the royal kraal. Finding that I was not wanted, I took +his advice and returned to camp to tell Tuys about it. + +"Vilakazi has more sense than you have, Owen," he commented. "You said +that this was not a white man's war and you'd better live up to that. +Don't worry about what's going to happen; it will be bad enough when +it gets here." + +So I decided to mind my own business and try to meet whatever trouble +was coming our way when it arrived. It was as well that I did. I could +do nothing except hope that the conflict would be as short and +bloodless as possible. I had done everything possible to keep peace. + +Late that afternoon I saw a number of small impis--bands of warriors +numbering about one hundred and fifty men--leave the kraals and take +to the hills in the general direction of Zombode. These, Tuys +explained to me, were ambush parties whose work it was to lie in wait +for warriors who might be rallying to the assistance of the old queen. + +"They are murder parties," he repeated, calling them by their right +name, "and they will also act as scouts and spies. If they can waylay +parties of inferior numbers, they will do so and kill every one of +them. Of course there are undoubtedly a number of such parties abroad +now who belong in Zombode. There will be a carnival of murder and +assassination until one side gets up nerve enough to attack the +headquarters of the other. All I hope is that Tzaneen's indunas screw +their courage to the attacking point first. I'd prefer to have this +war fought out at Zombode, and not here!" + +We all agreed with him and turned in that night "all standing." I did +not go to sleep until very late, and it seemed only a few minutes +before Tuys routed me out to take my watch. I was on duty from about +midnight until dawn, but nothing disturbed us. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +Lebombo threatened with attack--Tzaneen flies to us for +protection--Victory for Sebuza--Labotsibeni's mysterious +death--Lomwazi spared for execution later--Funeral sacrifice of the +old queen--Queen Tzaneen in state--We are forced to join the royal impi. + + +There must have been important developments during the night. Shortly +before sun-up I saw several thousand warriors leaving Lebombo in the +direction of the enemy. They marched swiftly and silently, and when +they had gone the kraals appeared deserted. I wanted to send Sibijaan +over to find out what this movement meant, but was afraid to do so for +fear that he might be mistaken for an enemy. + +When Tuys waked, I told him about the impis leaving for Zombode. At +once he became intensely interested. + +"That is the end!" he declared. "We'll know who wins the war by noon. +Tzaneen's impis have gone to attack Zombode, and I hope they take it. +The sooner this business is ended, the better for all of us." + +Shortly before noon a kaffir came out of the royal kraal and shouted +in our direction. He waved his shield, and I sent Sibijaan to see what +he wanted. Through my glasses I recognized him as one of the few old +indunas I had seen in Swaziland. There are practically no old men or +women in the country. This is due to the rigid belief in the doctrine +of the survival of the fittest, the old ones usually being removed +when unable to protect themselves. This old induna was some sort of an +officer for the queen and acted as a tutor for Sebuza. His age +prevented him from taking part in active warfare. + +Sibijaan talked with him for a few minutes, and then turned and raced +back to me. He was terribly excited and could hardly deliver the +message. + +"Ou Baas, there is great danger!" he gasped. "Queen Tzaneen sends to +you for help. She has received word that the impis of Labotsibeni are +coming to attack Lebombo. Thousands of warriors are now in the hills +and will soon attack!" + +Tuys and I were puzzled what to do. Sugden decided for us. With his +ready Yankee wit, he hit upon the solution. + +"You haven't any chips in this game," he said, "and you've got to keep +out of this war. But there's nothing to prevent you from offering +sanctuary to a fugitive king, queen, ace, or jack! Send to Tzaneen and +tell her to come over here, and we'll take care of her if the enemy +comes! We'll have to fight for our own lives anyway, and it won't +matter much if we add her to our responsibility." + +I sent Sibijaan running with this message, and it was only a short +time before Queen Tzaneen arrived with quite unseemly haste at our +camp. In spite of her precarious position she kept her dignity, and we +helped her up into the big wagon, where she hid under the cover with +four of her maids-of-honor. To calm her nerves we gave her a bottle of +gin. + +Then followed one of those periods of suspense that seem as though +they would never end. I searched the hills with my glasses, scanning +every tree and boulder for the oncoming enemy. Every now and then I +would start when I saw a movement, but invariably it turned out to be +caused by either a cow or a sheep. We practically held our breath for +about four hours, waiting for an enemy which might wipe us out. That +was a long long afternoon! + +About the time the shadow from the barren mountain fell across the +royal kraal, which means shortly after five o'clock, our suspense came +to an end. It ended with a shock that I will never forget. + +Tuys and I were still searching the hills when Sibijaan suddenly +gripped my arm, his hand trembling so that I almost dropped my +field-glasses. + +"Look! Look, Mzaan Bakoor!" he cried, pointing down the road which led +to Zombode. "There they come! Shoot quick! Shoot!" + +Through the glasses I could see what looked like several impis +straggling up the road. They marched fast, but without much attempt at +formation. As I watched I could see that many of the warriors were +dancing. + +I felt myself grow cold and hot by turns. Our time had come! It was +the army of Labotsibeni advancing to attack Lebombo and kill Tzaneen +and her white friends. Tuys had the same thought, and he lowered his +glasses and looked at me. A veteran campaigner, nothing flustered him, +but he wanted to see how it affected me. A second later he put out his +great hard hand and I shook it solemnly. + +"Well, Owen, we'll show them how white men can fight--and die, if need +be," he said gruffly. "It has been a good game and we have done our +best!" + +Sugden and Crespinell were watching the oncoming impis and coolly +comparing the sights on their rifles, trying to agree on the proper +distance to set them. This spoke for their courage, and I turned my +glasses on the impis again. Tuys was studying them, and suddenly he +began to laugh in that deep bass way he has when he is highly amused. + +"We're damn fools, Owen, damn fools!" he rumbled, with a chuckle. +"Those niggers are the impis of Tzaneen and Sebuza. The war is over! +They are dancing with joy! They must have taken Zombode and are coming +home to tell us about it!" + +My glasses told me that he was right. My eyes are not so good as his +or I would have known this before. Now I could see that the warriors +were drunk with triumph and were dancing to celebrate their victory. +As they drew closer I could distinguish Lochien and Makets at their +head. + +I called to Queen Tzaneen to come out, and informed her that her army +was victorious and approaching. She climbed down from the wagon, and a +moment later we all went forward to meet the impis. We reached the +royal kraal shortly before Lochien and Makets, and we white men stood +back while she received them. + +Seeing the queen awaiting them, the indunas halted the warriors and +they fell into formation. Lochien paused until all were in place and +then raised his arms in salute. The impis followed his lead and three +times the royal salute was given, with the shrill whistle at its +conclusion. Tzaneen acknowledged the salute, and then Lochien and +Makets stepped forward. + +"Nkosikaas, Zombode is ours! Labotsibeni is dead and the war is won!" +Lochien cried. "Even now Sebuza is king in Zombode and throughout all +Swaziland. King Buno's son is king and our work is over!" + +"Lochien, faithful induna and counsellor," Tzaneen replied, "Is my +son, the king, wounded or hurt in any way? And did he carry himself in +battle as should the son of Buno?" + +Lochien's answer satisfied her and she beamed with pride and joy. +There were a few more leading questions and presently we went into the +kraal. It was only then that I noted Makets closely. He staggered as +he walked and I was startled to see that he was bleeding from several +wounds in the breast. I turned to help him, but he would have none of +it. + +"Nkoos, I am a warrior! I am an induna and a leader of warriors!" he +boasted in a tired voice. "These wounds are nothing! To-day I have won +seven scars of honor. Seven of Labotsibeni's warriors, great fighting +men, fell before me!" + +He seemed much pleased with himself and had not fully recovered from +his slaughter madness. I knew that he could take care of himself and +paid no more attention to him. There were important things to be +learned. I wanted to know how Labotsibeni came to be killed and what +had happened to Lomwazi. + +Tzaneen was almost beside herself with curiosity and began questioning +Lochien as soon as we were seated. + +"How was Labotsibeni killed?" was her first question. + +"Nkosakaas, I cannot answer that," Lochien replied, and I could see +that he was telling the truth. "Strict orders were given that she be +spared, so that the government might not hold King Sebuza to account +for her death. Sebuza told the indunas that the man who harmed the old +queen would die! All our warriors understood this. + +"When we came to her hut, however, she was dead. I think that some +enemy in her own kraal stabbed her when we broke in and they all fled. +Perhaps some woman she had offended did it. Labotsibeni was helpless +and could be easily killed." + +It seemed a pitiful thing to me that Labotsibeni, after ruling +Swaziland for so many years, should be murdered in this way. I was +thinking about her when Tzaneen asked about Lomwazi. + +[Illustration: A VIEW OF THE KRAAL + +Awaiting the arrival of the white men for their initiation ceremonies. +The latter are returning from their sanctification ordeal in the +mountains prior to their induction into the royal impi] + +[Illustration: PRIESTS BUILDING THE SACRED FIRE + +On this pyre the body of Queen Labotsibeni was burned after Sebuza +seized the throne. This is the Swazi custom and strictly adhered to. +It is the Swazi belief that those surrendering power should be done +away with in this manner, since if they continued to live they might +still retain a certain amount of influence which would be antagonistic +and detrimental to the new ruler] + +"Lomwazi is a prisoner, Nkosikaas," Lochien answered. "He will be +killed after he has officially surrendered the throne. These are King +Sebuza's orders, and Lomwazi is under guard in Zombode until the +coronation celebration is held." + +That settled the cunning Lomwazi. Clever as he was reputed to be, he +had not been able to escape his fate. It later transpired that it +was Lomwazi who had sent the false alarm that Lebombo was to be +attacked. Evidently he thought that the impis of the enemy would be +kept on guard there and that he would be able to increase his army by +delaying the attack he knew would be made on Zombode. However, his +word reached Tzaneen too late, as the impis were already on the warpath. + +Lochien next gave us an account of the taking of Zombode. The old +queen's opinion concerning the fighting quality of her impis was not +far wrong. It seems there had been several hundred single combats, +after the custom of the Swazi warriors, and finally a rush upon the +kraal. Of course Lochien exaggerated a great deal--no kaffir can tell +the exact truth--but there must have been between four and five +hundred killed. There were practically no wounded; there never are +when Swazis fight. As soon as a warrior wounds his enemy so that he is +unable to fight back, he kills him. + +It developed that there had been an attempt to burn the kraals, but +Sebuza stopped it. It was he, also, who intervened to save Lomwazi's +life after that good fighter had killed several of Sebuza's own men. +Lomwazi was not spared, however, through any mistaken sense of mercy; +he was kept to be executed as part of the coronation ceremonies. When +I heard this I made up my mind to save him if I could. If there was no +other way, I would buy his life. This is often done, and it might be +possible in Lomwazi's case. + +Lochien gave us many other details of the fight, remarking that there +were many women in Zombode and much loot. Sebuza was to decide on the +disposition of all enemy property and would have his hands full for +some time to come. When Lochien had finished Queen Tzaneen praised him +highly for his loyalty and generalship, and, realizing that the story +was told, we went back to our camp. I felt thankful that the war was +over so quickly, and said as much to Oom Tuys. He quickly undeceived me. + +"Maybe it is over in Zombode and Lebombo," he said, "but it is only +beginning in the outlying districts. It won't be over for some time, +perhaps for months. The news of this war will not reach lots of places +for days, and when it does the factions will clash. Wherever there are +any indunas or warriors who are loyal to Labotsibeni, there will be +killing. It will be bad killing, too,--mostly murders done at night. +It takes a long time to end a war in Swaziland; that's one reason why +the government is so set against it. By the way, I wonder what His +Majesty's Royal High Commissioner for Swaziland thinks of things now?" + +This idea had occurred to me several times, but I always put it away +because I had a feeling that the Commissioner would place much of the +blame for the war on my shoulders. Tuys prediction about war +continuing proved only too true. For weeks after the fall of Zombode +there were killings in the neighboring districts. The only battle of +any importance took place at Stegea, the kraal of Umzulek. Needless to +say, the forces of that much-married potentate were victorious. Of +course many of these killings were due to personal feuds, the war +being only an excuse for them. It is safe to say that Swaziland was in +a ferment for some time after Sebuza seized the throne, and this came +to the notice of the authorities in Mbabane and Johannesburg. + +The following day we went to Zombode. Word had come that the body of +the old queen was to be burned on the sacrificial pyre and we wanted +to witness the ceremony. + +There was not much to it. The burning took place shortly after dark +and L'Tunga arranged the ceremony. During the day we saw the huge pyre +of dry wood on which the body was to be laid and the witch-doctors +were still adding to it late in the afternoon. + +Soon after sunset the impis of the king and his mother gathered about +the great pile, which had been built up in a regular pattern. We were +with Lochien and Vilakazi and were beginning to get bored when there +came a commotion and King Sebuza arrived with his bodyguard. There +were a number of fires near the kraals and these were beginning to +light up the darkness. + +After standing about a little longer it was dark enough to suit Sebuza +and he sent one of his indunas away in the direction of Labotsibeni's +brick-walled hut. Shortly after there arose the cry "Make way! Make +way!" and I saw the warriors draw back and leave a lane to the pyre. + +A moment later six witch-doctors arrived, two and two, bearing a rude +stretcher on their shoulders. On this was a large bundle roughly +resembling a body. It was the remains of Queen Labotsibeni, the most +extraordinary native ruler South Africa ever knew. + +L'Tunga was waiting at the pyre and directed the witch-doctors how to +place the body on its summit. When this was done, he stepped back and +moved to the nearby fire, where he picked up a flaming brand in each +hand. These he raised above his head with wide sweep and held them +steady for a moment. Then swiftly he brought the torches down and the +warriors gave the royal salute--the last tribute to the murdered +queen! This salute was repeated three times, and then L'Tunga, +assisted by the other witch-doctors, lighted the funeral pyre. The +wood was dry and burned fiercely, and soon the leaping flames met over +the body of the queen. + +That was the last of Labotsibeni. + +Next day we tried to have a talk with Sebuza, with the idea of finding +out how soon he planned to be officially installed as king. This was +very important to me, since his coronation would mean the attainment +of the object for which I had come to Swaziland. I would be able to +make an historical record of ceremonies which would be valuable as a +vivid page out of the life of old South Africa--the life that is +passing so quickly now that white men are coming into the country in +such numbers. + +Sebuza sent word to us that he would see us in Lebombo in two days, +and we went back there to our camp. While we were finishing lunch +Lochien came with a request from Queen Tzaneen that we visit her. +Thinking that she was probably more interested in a bottle of gin than +in us, I gave Lochien one for her. He caught my thought and explained +that the queen really wanted to see "all the white men." + +"She has important business to talk over with you, Nkoos," he said, +"and desires that you come to her at once." + +Tuys thought it would be a good thing to do, since we were so near the +coronation ceremonies, so we all put on our hats and followed Lochien +to the royal kraal. There was a noticeable change in manners there +since Sebuza had become king. Instead of the former informality, we +had to go through the salute and all the other ritual. Tzaneen had +revived the formal glories of old Labotsibeni and I was amused to see +how she enjoyed being kowtowed to. She had at least fifteen +maids-in-waiting about her and had set up quite a court. Even Lochien +was on his best behavior and went through the ceremony of presenting +us to her with a neat little speech in which he made it appear that we +had come as suppliants for her favor. I caught Tuys's eye while this +was going on and there was an amused twinkle in it. The wise old +burgher had seen savages of all sorts and nothing they did astonished +him so long as they continued to behave like grown-up children. + +When we were finally seated Tzaneen explained the "important +business." After we heard it we realized that Lochien had spoken truly. + +"Mzaan Bakoor, 'Mlung 'Emantzi Eenui, and Makofa," she said, +addressing me, Sugden, and Crespinell by our native names, "you have +seen a queen die and a king made in Swaziland. You know much about how +these things are done. You know many things about the war that +Lobotsibini made against me and of which you were a part, for did you +not carry out the demonstration that led to the killing?" + +I attempted to take her up on this statement, but Tuys signaled me to +keep quiet. Nevertheless, I maintain that she was not just in blaming +the first killings on us. + +"Now you know that the government has set its face against my son, +King Sebuza," she went on, "and it may be some time before it will +recognize him as the rightful king. When the news reaches Mbabane that +Sebuza has seized the throne, the white chief there, who belongs to +the government, will ask many questions. He will want to know much! + +"When you go to Mbabane, or to your own home, the government will +question you and ask how Labotsibeni came to be killed. Perhaps the +government will want the truth, when a little lie would work much less +harm here in Swaziland. Is it not so?" + +I began to see what she was driving at. Tzaneen was afraid that the +government would get after Sebuza for taking the throne by force and +she wished to make sure that we would protect her son as much as +possible. She had been talking at me, but now she turned to Tuys. + +"Nkoos Tuys, you are the brother of Buno," she said, "and Buno gave +his people into your care. You are the white king of my country and +you will protect us from the government if need be. I need not ask you +to be careful when they question you. I only ask that you advise Mzaan +Bakoor and his men how to avoid rousing the government against us." + +"Nkosikaas, I will answer for Mzaan Bakoor and his men with my life," +Tuys answered. "Mzaan Bakoor is blood of my blood and inherits my +trust as guardian of the Swazis when I die. Buno decreed this as he +died." + +Tzaneen nodded her approval at this brave speech of Oom Tuys and then +was thoughtful for a time. I could see that she was still doubtful and +that the fear of the long, slow, but dreadfully sure arm of the +government was still upon her. Presently she raised her head and +looked at me, and her eyes flashed a sudden resolve. + +"There is one way that I can be certain of your loyalty, Mzaan +Bakoor," she said, without mincing words, "and that is by making you +an induna of the Swazis. You and your two men shall become indunas in +the royal impi. Never before has a white man been worthy to be taken +into a Swazi impi, and you shall be the first!" + +This was a decided shock. I had never thought I would like to be a +Swazi, even if I were an induna. In fact, I would not have enjoyed +being King of Swaziland, with all the power that Buno had. But here we +were face to face with the proposition of being forced to become +indunas in the crack impi of the new King of Swaziland. Even the +distinction of being the first white men to be admitted did not lessen +the blow. + +I was at a loss what to say to Tzaneen. She had the air of having +conferred the highest possible honor on us, but I sat there +speechless, wondering how to avoid becoming a Boer-Swazi. It was good +old reliable Tuys who saved the situation, but ruined us. + +"Nkosikaas, you have done Mzaan Bakoor and his men the greatest +honor," he said, "and they will gladly become indunas of your impi. +They will go to their homes proud to say that they are your indunas!" + +Then the wily old Boer poured out a lot more flattery which Tzaneen +swallowed without blinking an eye. While he talked I thought the +matter over. It looked like a hopeless case; I could see no way out of +it. If we wished to see Sebuza crowned, we would have to go through +with this induna business. + +"Oom Tuys has spoken for us," I told Tzaneen, after Tuys had finished +complimenting her. "For the rest of our lives we shall be proud to say +that we are indunas of your impi. Our children will also be proud of +it and will tell their children!" + +Tzaneen appreciated this, too, and liked it. Then I asked a question +that was close to my heart. + +"When is it planned to hold the formal ceremonies of making Sebuza +king of Swaziland?" + +"In about fourteen days," she answered. "The celebration of his +coronation will take place at the same time that you are made indunas. +You will return from the mountains after ten days, and by that time +all the people of Swaziland will have come to Lebombo and there will +be the greatest celebration any one has ever seen." + +So this had all been planned, I thought, and then it came over me with +a jolt that we must go into exile in the mountains for a "puclandi," +or space of ten days, before we would be sufficiently sanctified to +become indunas. + +"L'Tunga will take charge of you until you return from the mountains," +the queen added, "and he will prepare you for your indunaship." + +This ended our chat, and we went back to camp most unhappy in mind. +Sugden was furious and so was I, but Crespinell regarded it as rather +a joke. Tuys declared we would have to go through with it and had +better make the best of it. That night he cheered us up by telling us +how we would have to live, what we would have to eat, and what L'Tunga +would do to us. I think the old fellow had more fun chaffing us about +our becoming "white Swazis" than he had had in a long time. Some of +his remarks were pointed, and Sugden promised him that he would set +his impi after him just as soon as he became a "sanctified induna." + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +Our sanctification in exile--Hardships in the hills--Oom Tuys saves +Lomwazi's life--The celebration--Lomwazi formally surrenders the +throne--Sebuza acknowledged as king--We are inducted into the royal +impi--Mbabane sends for information--We escape through Portuguese +territory to America. + + +There was even less humor about the induna business next morning. +Bright and early L'Tunga arrived at our camp with a solemn expression +on his face and a corps of assistant witch-doctors. We had eaten the +largest breakfast possible, because Tuys had advised us to eat one +more white man's meal "before you go into the mountains and fight the +goats for their food." I remember thinking that there were times when +the rough and ready humor of this burgher was in very bad taste. + +L'Tunga had little to say. He told us to follow him, and we three +white men meekly did so. On either side of us was our escort of +witch-doctors, and I had all the sensations of being marched to my +execution. We were taken to L'Tunga's kraal and into a large hut, +where we were ordered to take off all our clothes. I thought Sugden +would explode, but he shut his mouth and took it out in murderous +looks. Crespinell, being a modest soul, was unhappy about removing his +garments, but there was nothing to do except to follow instructions. + +I tried to cheer Sugden by remarking in English to him that he would +soon be an induna if his luck held. His only reply was, "Induna? +Hell!" Crespinell was too far gone for words. When we had stripped +L'Tunga presented each of us with a full Swazi warrior's costume, +telling us to put this on. Thankful for anything to cover our +nakedness, we did so as quickly as we could. Then our witch-doctor +friend ordered us to come out of the hut, and we did. We certainly +were the handsomest white Swazis that ever carried a shield! + +Tuys was hanging around the kraal, and the twinkle in his eyes when he +saw us marched out to start on our long walk to the hills was worth +seeing. We did not appreciate it, however, for the hot earth hurt our +feet. + +It would be impossible to detail our experiences during this exile. I +am sure no white men ever suffered more than we did. We were bitten by +insects, scratched by a million thorns, scorched by the sun during the +day and nearly frozen at night, and our feet were in constant agony. +In spite of L'Tunga's tutoring, we could not find enough food, so that +we nearly starved. + +There was only one bright spot. Some young women traveling across the +mountains ran across us and gave us food. Except for this aid, I feel +sure we would never have survived the ordeal. After the first day or +two the only fun we got out of it was enjoyment of each other's +misery. In addition to our actual physical suffering, we were in +constant dread lest we be bitten by some poisonous snake, of which +there are many in these hills. + +But such suffering must have an end. On the appointed morning L'Tunga +and his assistants arrived and escorted us back to Lebombo. How we +ever got there I cannot understand. Our feet were practically useless, +and we must have walked on sheer nerve. No sooner did we arrive at +Lebombo than we were ushered into the presence of the queen. + +We were a sorry looking group. Each had a ten days' growth of beard +and a famished look in his eyes. Tzaneen was very cordial and assured +us that we had come through our sanctification with flying colors. She +congratulated us on our hardihood and said we would make brave +indunas. When I interpreted to Sugden later the "brave indunas" part +of her speech, I thought he would have a fit. + +"If I get through this alive," he exclaimed, "I'll never see a Pullman +porter without wanting to kill him! I don't care how soon the British +send a flying column and wipe out all the Swazis. I hope they start +with L'Tunga, and make Tzaneen and Sebuza close seconds!" + +Tzaneen had been right when she told us that all Swaziland would come +to see Sebuza made king. All the kraals at Lebombo were crowded, and +there were thousands of people camped out around the village. Tuys +estimated that there must have been nearly thirty thousand Swazis +there, a good half of whom were warriors. During our exile in the +hills word had gone throughout the land that the celebration would +take place at the end of ten days, and the people had flocked in from +all directions. + +The celebration began the day after our return from the hills. Tuys +had learned that the first event would be the official turning over of +the throne by Lomwazi, who had been brought from Lebombo for that +purpose. Following this, there would be a giant reception to Sebuza, +during which all the warriors would acknowledge him as king. + +I was curious about Lomwazi. If Sebuza ran true to heredity, his life +was not worth much. + +"What will happen to Lomwazi when he has turned over the kingdom to +Sebuza?" I asked Tuys. "Sebuza was very anxious to kill him a little +while ago. Is Lomwazi going to be executed as part of the festivities?" + +"While you were away I made up my mind to try and save Lomwazi's +life," Tuys said; "not from any love for him, but because he is the +ablest Swazi I know and may be useful to me some day. I have worked on +Tzaneen and Sebuza until they have agreed to spare his life. To tell +the truth, I frightened them into it. I told them that the news of +Lomwazi's death would surely bring the government rifles into +Swaziland and that the first targets they would seek would be Sebuza +and his mother. It took a long time, but they finally agreed to turn +Lomwazi over to me. I am to be responsible for him and see that he +makes no trouble for Sebuza or his mother. Lomwazi does not know about +this, and he won't until after he has turned over the throne." + +When the ceremonies started Sebuza stood on a small mound of the +little plain in front of the kraals, with his "cabinet" behind him. +L'Tunga was there and all the principal indunas, among whom were +Lochien, Vilakazi, and a number of those who had taken part in the +capture of Zombode. Grouped in a tremendous semi-circle about them +were thousands of the Swazi people. They were waiting patiently for +the affair to begin. + +We white men remained a little to one side, and soon we saw a small +body of men coming from the kraals. When they drew closer we could +discern Lomwazi in their midst. He was not bound, but carried no arms +and wore no ornaments. All the men guarding him were indunas. They +marched their prisoner in front of Sebuza, and we came nearer so that +we might hear. + +"Lomwazi, brother of Buno and traitor to his son," Sebuza began. "You +have lost in the war you started against me and now your life is mine. +Labotsibeni is dead and I have sent for you to surrender the throne to +me so that the people of Swaziland may know who is king. Do you give +up the throne?" + +Lomwazi was game. He knew that he faced death, but he never dropped +his eyes or lowered his head. He looked straight at Sebuza and squared +his shoulders. + +"Now that Queen Labotsibeni has been murdered, the son of Buno is the +rightful heir to the throne," he replied in his deep voice. "Nkoos, +you are that son and the throne is yours!" + +That was all he would say, and I saw Sebuza catch Tuys's eye. He +seemed to change his mind suddenly, and then spoke to Lomwazi again. + +"Your life is mine," he said, with a certain amount of petty triumph, +"and I can do with it as I please. I have given it to Oom Tuys, the +White King of Swaziland, the friend of my father, who will do with you +as he desires." + +Tuys then stepped forward and motioned the indunas to move away from +Lomwazi. The savage regarded him fixedly for a moment, and Tuys +stretched out his hand. Lomwazi was stunned by the change in his +fortunes, but a second later gripped the hand and followed Tuys as he +retreated into the group behind the mound on which Sebuza stood. + +Next the warriors formed into impis and, led by their indunas in all +their savage trappings, began marching past the young king. Each impi +would halt in front of him and give the royal salute, thus +acknowledging him as their ruler. It seemed to me that there was an +endless procession of these savages, all of them fully costumed and +armed for battle. + +When this march past was over and Sebuza had thus been officially +recognized as king by the Swazis, the royal impi was sent for and +lined up in front of the "reviewing stand." We were in the background, +waiting at the appointed place, and L'Tunga came and beckoned us to +follow him. I remember how my feet still hurt as we swung in behind +him, carrying our shields like real warriors and trying to step out as +though we were kin to these savages. + +[Illustration: MR. CRESPINELL AT HOME AMONG HIS BLACK BRETHREN] + +[Illustration: DR. SUGDEN, PRINCE LOMWAZI, AND DR. O'NEIL] + +[Illustration: DR. O'NEIL, MR. CRESPINELL, AND DR. SUGDEN AFTER THEIR +INDUCTION INTO THE ROYAL IMPI + +This was one of the conditions insisted upon by Queen Tzaneen to prove +their allegiance to her. Clad in this fashion, the three white men +lived in the mountains for ten days, their only food consisting of +what they could gather or kill in the wilderness. They are the only +white men who have ever been accepted officially into a Swazi impi] + +We halted in front of Sebuza and there followed a moment's silence. I +could see the thousands upon thousands of Swazis watching us, and it +gave me a peculiar, isolated feeling. Sugden and Crespinell kept their +eyes on Sebuza, and I knew exactly what the doctor was thinking. If +his wishes had come true, Sebuza would have choked right there. + +Then Sebuza made a speech. + +"White indunas of the royal impi," he said, addressing us in a loud, +clear voice. "You have proved worthy to be blood brothers of the +warriors who guard the king. You have been sanctified and have borne +the ordeal without flinching. From now on you are Swazis and entitled +to all the privileges of my chosen indunas." + +There was a good deal more, for Sebuza liked to hear himself talk. As +he rambled on I heard Sugden make a remark out of the corner of his +mouth to Crespinell, which brought a blush to that young induna's +tanned cheek. + +"He's going to tell how many wives we can have in a minute," he +whispered. "I hope you get nice fat ones!" + +When Sebuza finally finished, he motioned to me to come forward. I did +so and stood just below him on the mound. An induna handed him a +plumed headdress and he placed it on my head. It was much as though he +were conferring a decoration. I stepped back, and Sugden took my place +and received his headdress. Crespinell followed, and then we turned +and faced the royal impi. Sebuza gave a sign and the impi saluted us. +Then we stepped into its ranks and we all saluted the king. + +That was the end of the ceremony that made us the only white men to +hold commissions in the royal impi of Swaziland. After leaving the +"parade ground" we were only too thankful to hobble back to camp and +minister to our numerous scratches, cuts, and abrasions. But we had +not yet come to the end of our torture! Din, however, practically +saved our lives by rubbing some concoction he made on our abused feet. +It eased them wonderfully and made it possible for us to get through +the rest of that day. + +The same afternoon the real celebration started. Every one had been +drinking tswala, some of which runs as high as twelve per cent. in +alcohol, and this seemed to add to their desire to dance. The warriors +danced before the royal kraal, and we had to perform with our impi. In +spite of Din's treatment, it was agony. The ground was hard and +blistering hot. Sugden's remark that "the hobs of hell have nothing on +this" was fully justified. + +But we went through with it somehow. In addition, we were able to get +many pictures of the dancing, and Crespinell even took some of Sugden +and myself doing our best to be true Swazi indunas. + +The dancing continued all that afternoon and late into the night. As +soon as it became dark hundreds of great fires were lighted, and it +was a weird sight to see these thousands of savages leaping and +prancing in their light. + +The celebration lasted for three full days and nights and on the +morning of the fourth the visiting tribesmen set off for their homes. +There was a general exodus, so that by nightfall Lebombo had returned +to its wonted calm. When I saw how empty it was, I realized that +Tuys's estimate of the number of people who attended the celebration +was very conservative. + +We were resting and recuperating after the ordeal of becoming "white +Swazis" when Lochien came in haste to see us. We were about packed up +and expected to leave Lebombo within a few days. Lochien was troubled +and wanted our advice. + +"A messenger has come from Mbabane," he said. "He says that the +government will not allow Sebuza to be king. The government chief has +heard that Labotsibeni is dead and wants to know how she died. Tzaneen +wishes you would tell her what to say to the messenger." + +This was unpleasant news. I had not believed that the government would +interfere when it heard that Sebuza had actually been made king and +that all Swaziland was rejoicing over it. There was only one thing to +tell the messenger. + +"Tell Tzaneen to speak the truth to the messenger," I directed. "Tell +her to say that she does not know how Labotsibeni was killed. If the +messenger asks about the war, tell the queen to explain how +Labotsibeni's warriors attacked her indunas and killed them, and that +she made war only to protect her people." + +Lochien took these instructions to Tzaneen, but the event gave me food +for serious thought. If the government was sending messengers to ask +questions, it would soon send white investigators--and then would come +trouble. + +That night I called on the queen and informed her that I intended +leaving Swaziland as quickly as possible. She seemed much upset at +this and besought me to stay for several moons more. I gathered that +she was afraid to face the authorities alone. I pointed out to her +that my return to my own world was imperative, and finally she agreed +to let me go. + +"Nkoos, you will always remember that you are a Swazi induna," she +said, in parting. "Now you are one of my people and must always remain +loyal to me!" + +I promised. I shall always remember her last words. She drew herself +up to her full height and threw out her arms in an eloquent gesture. + +"When you go, Mzaan Bakoor, all the sunshine goes out of my life!" she +said, and then turned to enter her hut. + +Sunrise next morning saw us trekking for Delagoa Bay. Oom Tuys brought +Lomwazi with us, and it was understood that he would return to his +kraal, far removed from Lebombo, as soon as it was safe for him to +re-enter Swaziland. + +Ten days later we reached Delagoa Bay, where we were lucky enough to +find a steamer on which I engaged passage for our party to New York. + + +THE END + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Adventures in Swaziland, by Owen Rowe O'Neil + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ADVENTURES IN SWAZILAND *** + +***** This file should be named 38447.txt or 38447.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/4/4/38447/ + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Richard Prairie and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |